40 - Varco Industrial Sales

Pallet Racking Uprights 

UPRIGHT FRAMES 

• One piece all welded construction, complete with all necessary diagonal and 

horizontal bracing 

• Tapered slots are punched on 4" centers for complete height adjustment 

• Face width of 3-1/4" x 1-5/8" depth x 5/8" return 

LOCKING PINS 

• To protect against accidental dislodging of stringers two safety locking pins per 

beam are supplied for installation of one per connector 

SHELVING / WORK BENCHES 

UPRIGHTS – MEDIUM DUTY (20,000 LB CAPACITY): 

Ht. 24" Depth: 30" Depth: 36" Depth: 42" Depth: 48" Depth: 60” Depth: 

(ft) Order No. Mfg. No. Order No. Mfg. No. Order No. Mfg. No. Order No. Mfg. No. Order No. Mfg. No. Order No. Mfg. No. 

6 4069.00003 CUM-624 4069.00036 CUM-630 4069.00069 CUM-636 4069.00102 CUM-642 4069.00135 CUM-648 4069.00168 CUM-660 




10 4069.00015 CUM-1024 4069.00048 CUM-1030 4069.00081 CUM-1036 4069.00114 CUM-1042 4069.00147 CUM-1048 4069.00180 C U M - 1 0 6 0 







UPRIGHTS – HEAVY DUTY (27,000 LB CAPACITY): 

Ht. 24" Depth: 30" Depth: 36" Depth: 42" Depth: 48" Depth: 60” Depth: 

(ft) Order No. Mfg. No. Order No. Mfg. No. Order No. Mfg. No. Order No. Mfg. No. Order No. Mfg. No. Order No. Mfg. No. 

6 4069.00201 CUH-624 4069.00258 CUH-630 4069.00315 CUH-636 4069.00372 CUH-642 4069.00429 CUH-648 4069.00486 CUH-660 










16 4069.00231 CUH-1624 4069.00288 CUH-1630 4069.00345 CUH-1636 4069.00402 CUH-1642 4069.00459 CUH-1648 4069.00516 CUH-1660 



19 4069.00240 CUH-1924 4069.00297 CUH-1930 4069.00354 CUH-1936 4069.00411 CUH-1942 4069.00468 CUH-1948 4069.00525 CUH-1960 





24 4069.00255 CUH-2424 4069.00312 CUH-2430 4069.00369 CUH-2436 4069.00426 CUH-2442 4069.00483 CUH-2448 4069.00540 CUH-2460 

Accessories For Pallet Racking Upright Protector 

Protects industrial racking from 

those damaging impacts that 

can cause unsafe conditions. 

Made from 1/4" thick steel with 

a 90˚ bend. Overall height 18-1/4", 

inside depth 4-3/4", overall 

depth 7". The sides are 5" 

wide. Weight: 12 lb. Colour is 

a highly visible safety yellow. 

4 pre-drilled holes made for 

1/2" anchors (not included). 

40 

523


524 


Pallet Racking Stringers – Interlock Box 

Storing of skids and pallets are the primary use of box stringers, standard depth is 1-5/8", height and length 

to be determined by size and weight of product. 

48" Length: 60" Length: 72" Length: 84" Length: 

Height Load Capacity Load Capacity Load Capacity Load Capacity 

(in) Order No. Per Pair (UDL) Order No. Per Pair (UDL) Order No. Per Pair (UDL) Order No. Per Pair (UDL) 

2 4069.00543 5340 4069.00552 3551 4069.00564 2466 4069.00582 1812 

2-1/2 4069.00546 7821 4069.00555 6078 4069.00567 4221 4069.00585 3120 

3 4069.00549 9379 4069.00558 7518 4069.00570 6265 4069.00588 4855 

3-1/2 — — 4069.00561 9389 4069.00573 7824 4069.00591 6706 

4 — — — — 4069.00576 9181 4069.00594 7870 

4-1/2 — — — — 4069.00579 10806 4069.00597 9262 

5 — — — — — — 4069.00600 10727 











5-1/2 — — 4069.00645 9540 4069.00672 8585 4069.00699 6998 

6 — — 4069.00648 10338 4069.00675 9304 4069.00702 7757 

6-1/2 — — — — — — 4069.00705 9076 

Pallet Racking Stringers – Recess 

Unskidded inventory and loose products are the normal application for recess stringers used with 

steel or plywood decking. Standard depth is 2-1/2", height and length is determined by size and 

weight of product. Optional recess of 7/8" or 1-5/8". 





2-1/2 4069.00711 7143 4069.00720 5714 4069.00735 4041 4069.00753 2970 


3-1/2 — — 4069.00726 9310 4069.00741 7758 4069.00759 6650 


4-1/2 — — — — 4069.00747 10710 4069.00765 9187 

5 — — — — — — 4069.00768 10325 






3 4069.00777 3540 4069.00801 2798 4069.00828 2266 4069.00858 1574 



4-1/2 4069.00786 8039 4069.00810 7146 4069.00837 6140 4069.00867 4264 

5 4069.00789 9035 4069.00813 8030 4069.00840 7277 4069.00870 5343 



6-1/2 — — — — 4069.00849 10593 4069.00879 8827

Kwikerect Steel 

Shelving Components 

Angle Post 1" x 2" 

Vertical adjustment is 2" for boltless clips and 1" for 

bolted construction. 

Order No. Mfg. No. Length (in) 

4069.00882 6014 76 

4069.00885 6015 88 

4069.00888 6016 100 

Back & Side Sway Braces 

Use crossed sway braces on backs and sides of 

open type shelving. Material is 7/8" x 14 ga. bars 

supplied in pairs. When ordering specify by shelf 

depth and width. 

Order No. Mfg. No. Shelf Depth (in) 

4069.00891 6200 12 

4069.00894 6202 18 

4069.00897 6203 24 

4069.00900 6205 36 

4069.00903 6207 48 

Gussets 

Gussets 3" are used in place of sway braces. 

Each unit requires 8 gussets. 

Order No. Mfg. No. 

4069.00906 6220 

Side Panels 

Use combination of these heights for 2 piece sides over 

52". Allow for 4" overlap. 

Order No. Mfg. No. Width x Height (in) 

4069.00909 6111 12 x 40 

4069.00912 6112 12 x 52 






Back Panels 

Use combination of these heights for 2 piece backs 

over 52". Allow for 4" overlap. 

Order No. Mfg. No. Width x Height (in) 





Shelves 

Front and back edges are channel 

formed with an additional return 

bend for maximum strength; sides are angle formed. Bolt 

through two holes at each corner or install on boltless clips 

(four per shelf). Divider holes pierced on 3" centres for easy 

horizontal adjustment of dividers. 

Order No. Mfg. No. Depth x Width (in) 







Angle Reinforcement 

Angle bolts to inside and/or back 

edge of shelf depending on load 

requirements (see shelf table for 

load capacities.) 

Order No. Mfg. No. Length (in) 

4069.00957 6263 36 

4069.00960 6265 48 

Shelving Clips 

Four required per shelf on intermediate levels. 


4069.00963 6223 


525


526 


Easy-Up 5000 Shelving 

Posts 

Slots on 1" centres, covering 3 sides. Marked on 6" 

centres for quick beam installation. 


4069.00966 UP74 




Frame Connectors 

Frame connectors and uprights form a 

rigid endframe. Connectors are designed 

with a patented locking tab to be turned 

into the upright for safety and rigidity. 


4069.00975 FC12 




Standard Beam 

Double locking clip V-type design to 

support board shelf. Steel shelf locks over 

beam. Two beams required per shelf. 


4069.00984 SB36 

4069.00987 SB48 


Baseplate or Heavy-Duty Beam 

Used as kickplate, but may also be 

used as heavy-duty beam if 

increased, load capacity is required. 


4069.00990 BP36 

4069.00993 BP48 


Particleboard Shelves 

Industrial grade 5/8" particleboard, 

with 45 lb. density guarantees a 

strong and smooth uniform surface. 

Order No. Mfg. No. Size (in) 








Steel Shelves 

Full panel steel shelf with 

U-shaped front edge and full 

length beam offers strength 

and durability. 

Order No. Mfg. No. Size (in) 






Beam Safety Clip 

Spring clip locks beam securely to post. 

Clips can be removed easily. 

Order No. 

4069.01026 


Foot Plates 

Foot plates clip into tube section of post to 

distribute weight on tile or wood floors. 

Order No. 

4069.01029


Posts 

Slots on 2" centres, covering 3 sides. Half slot on top 

for flush mounted top shelf. 


4069.01032 P72 





Cross Members 

Cross members and posts form a rigid 

endframe. Cross members are designed with 

a patented locking tab to be turned into the 

post for safety and rigidity. 


4069.01044 CM12 





Light Duty Beams 

Single locking clip. V-type design to support 

shelf. 1-1/4" front face. 


4069.01056 LD36 

4069.01059 LD48 


Medium Duty Beams 

Double locking clip. 90° return bend to 

support the shelf. 2" front face. 


4069.01062 MD36 





Heavy Duty Beams 

Double locking clip. 90° return bend to 

support the shelf. 2-1/2" front face. 


4069.01074 HD96 


Shelf Supports For MD Beams 

Designed to support shelves at any point 

locking into upper lip of beam. 


4069.01077 MSS24 





Supports For HD And XHD Beams 

Shelf supports lock into the upper lip of a 

pair of beams. 


4069.01086 HSS36 

4069.01089 HSS48 


Tie Bars 

Clip into the bottom lip of a pair of 

beams, preventing beams from ‘bowing 

out’ under load. 


4069.01092 TB24 



Easy-Up 7000 Shelving Accessories 

Safety Clips 

Spring clip locks beam into the post slots for safety. 

Can be removed easily. Recommended for uneven 

floors and mezzanine applications on bottom and 

top beams of lower units. 

Order No. 



Foot Plates 

Foot plates clip into tube section of post to disperse 

weight on tile or wood floors, etc. Foot plates are 

punched for lagging to floor, if required. 

Order No. 



Post Splicers 

Steel splice (2 per joint) are used to extend height of 

posts. Splicers are designed to force-fit into the hollow 

sections of the upright. 

Order No. 



Joining Bolts 

Joining bolts are for back to back bays. 

Order No. 



527


528 


Work Benches 

Rugged steel construction for 

heavy-duty use. All models feature 

heavy gauge channel formed 

steel legs with wide foot plate 

for stability, and for easy lagging 

to floor. Stringers provide 

greater bench rigidity, and 

become a convenient back 

stop on models with shelves. 

Height Depth Length 

Order No. (in) (in) (in) 

4069.01113 33-5/8 24 60 

4069.01116 33-5/8 24 72 

4069.01119 33-5/8 30 60 

4069.01122 33-5/8 30 72 

Open Style Benches 

A 

• Basic style 

B 

• Bench with storage shelf 

• Steel tops 12 gauge 

• Legs 12 gauge 

• Lower shelves 16 gauge 

AVAILABLE SIZES 

Steel Steel/Wood Filled Laminated Wood Top Width x 

Order No. Order No. Order No. Depth (in) 

‘A’ BENCH 

4069.01125 4069.01146 4069.01167 24 x 48 





4069.01140 4069.01161 4069.01182 36 x 60 


‘B’ BENCH 








‘E’ BENCH 








Pedestal Benches 

E 

• Single leg and single 

door pedestal 

F 

• Single leg and double 

door pedestal 

I 

• Two single door pedestals 

O 

• Single door and four 

drawer pedestal 

AVAILABLE SIZES 

Steel Steel/Wood Filled Laminated Wood Top Width x 

Order No. Order No. Order No. Depth (in) 

‘F’ BENCH 








‘I’ BENCH 


4069.01380 4069.01401 4069.01422 24 x 60 






‘O’ BENCH 

4069.01440 4069.01461 4069.01482 24 x 48 






4069.01458 4069.01479 4069.01500 36 x 72

Modular 

Drawer Systems 

Drawer Cabinet Bodies 

OVERALL OPENING FOR DRAWERS 

Order No. Mfg. No. W x D x H (in) Height (in) 

4069.01503 8022 36 x 22 x 36 39 



Modular 


Easyup Shelving Cabinet 

Bodies 

May be grouped for greater than 

36" height. 

7000 SERIES 

Drawer Shelv. Drawer Shelv. Storage 

Width Width Depth Depth Height 

Order No. Mfg. No. (in) (in) (in) (in) (in) 

4069.01512 8072 32 36 22 24 24 

4069.01515 8073 32 36 22 24 36 

4069.01518 8083 44 48 22 24 36 

5000 SERIES 

Drawer Shelv. Drawer Shelv. Storage 

Width Width Depth Depth Height 

Order No. Mfg. No. (in) (in) (in) (in) (in) 

4069.01521 8052 32 36 22 24 24 

4069.01524 8053 32 36 22 24 36 

4069.01527 8063 44 48 22 24 36 

Modular 


Kwikerect Shelving Rails 

May be grouped for greater than 

36" height. 

RAILS – Set of 4 

Order No. Mfg. No. Storage Height (in) 

4069.01530 8091 12 

4069.01533 8092 24 

4069.01536 8093 36 


Modular 


Drawers 

All walls are slotted on 2" centres 

for installation of partitions. 

Weight Capacity: 

The full extension drawer 

300 lb. UDL using 

reinforced partitions. 

Order No. Mfg. No. W x D x H (in) Height (in) 

36" NOMINAL WIDTH 





48" NOMINAL WIDTH 





Modular Drawer Systems 

Standard Drawer Layout 

D-36-48 D-36-24 

D-36-12 D-48-66 

D-48-45 

D-48-18 

D-48-24 


529


530 


PLASTIC BINS 

PLASTIC BINS 

Plastic bins are the versatile components that 

can help you develop your own customized 

storage system. Designed to hang from bin 

racks, panels, rails, and carts, these bins enable 

you to meet the specific storage requirements 

of your workplace In almost any application, 

these bins reduce and control inventories, 

shorten assembly times and minimize parts 

handling. 

Nine sizes of bins stack with each other, sit on 

shelving, or hang from bin hanging systems. 

Red, yellow, blue, green and stone bins give 

you the option to colour code. They also let you 

carry parts or tools directly to work areas for 

assembly operations. Dividers are available. 

Full width 

hanger-lip 

Finger grips 

Model No. 

CB122 

Reinforcing ribs 

CB664 

CB098 

CB100 

Divider slots for partitioning 

Extra-wide stacking 

ledge 

Model No. 

CB123 

Anti-slide stop 

Large label slot 

Curved bottom at front 

H. 

W. 

X. 

1800 SERIES AKRO-BINS 

Extra large and extra strong for heavier, bulkier parts and components, 1800 Series Akro- 

Bins are designed to fit standard 18" deep shelving. They are stackable, with reinforcing ribs 

to prevent spreading under big loads. Front and back finger grips make handling easy. The 

colour is light beige. One black cross-wise divider per bin is provided. 

Model Inside Dimensions Outside Dimensions Wt. Qty/ 

No. L" x W" x H" L" x W" x H" lbs. Pkg. 

CB122 20 x 7 3/8 x 6 1/2 20 1/2 x 8 1/4 x 7 3.5 6 

CB123 20 x 10 1/8 x 6 1/2 20 1/2 x 11 x 7 4.0 6 

Available in light beige only. 

L. 

BIN DIMENSIONS 

Bin Load Dividers 

Bin Model No. Mfg. Outside Dimensions Inside Dimensions Cap.** Wt Qty/ Model 

Blue Red Yellow Green Stone No. L" x W" x H" L" x W" x H " x X " lbs. lbs. Ctn. No. 

CB093 CB094 CB095 CB663 CB664 30-210 5 3/8 x 4 1/8 x 3 4 3/4 x 3 7/16 x 2 13/16 x 4 10 0.2 24 CB124 



CB102 CB103 CB104 CB669 CB670 30-235 10 7/8 x 11 x 5 10 1/4 x 10 x 4 3/4 x 9 60 1.5 6 CB127 

CB105 CB106 CB107 CB671 CB672 30-239 10 3/4 x 8 1/4 x 7 10 x 6 9/16 x 6 3/4 x 8 50 1.5 6 CB128 

CB108 CB109 CB110 CB673 CB674 30-240 14 3/4 x 8 1/4 x 7 14 x 6 9/16 x 6 3/4 x 12 60 2.0 12 CB129 

CB111 CB112 CB113 CB675 CB676 30-250 14 3/4 x 16 1/2 x 7 14 x 14 3/4 x 6 3/4 x 12 75 3.5 6 CB130 

**CB114 **CB115 **CB116 N/A N/A 30-265 18 x 8 1/4 x 9 17 1/8 x 6 1/2 x 8 1/4 x 14 1/2 - 3.5 6 CB131 

**CB117 **CB118 **CB119 N/A N/A 30-270 18 x 16 1/2 x 11 17 1/8 x 14 7/8 x 10 1/2 x 13 3/4 - 4.3 3 CB132 

**When attached to panels 30-265 and 30-270 may be too large to hang in certain applications. 

CB669 

CB107 

CB109 

CB111


PLASTIC BIN SUPPORT RACKS 

Locate louvered panels with plastic bins anywhere for easy access to small parts. 

Available in two sizes, louvered bin panels can be wall-mounted, attached to the back of 

shelving, mounted on benches, carts, inside cabinets, fastened to slotted angle components, 

or used for service truck interiors. 

Bins are easily removed, refilled, and replaced. Each heavy-duty panel is 16 gauge cold-rolled 

steel. Slotted holes 3/4" L x 3/8" W at 6" centres simplify installation. Grey baked enamel. 

Installation Note: Panels must be securely fastened to materials of adequate load bearing 

strength. Each panel must be secured vertically at the centre. 

BIN QUANTITY TABLE 

Quantity of identical plastic bins that fit Model CB362 Panel 

Combined 

Panel Height Bin Bin Bin Bin Bin Bin Bin 

35 3/4" Wide CB093 CB096 CB099 CB102 CB105 CB108 CB111 

1 Panel = 19" H 32 32 18 9 8 8 4 

2 Panels = 37" H 72 72 36 18 18 16 8 

3 Panels = 55" H 104 104 54 27 28 28 14 

4 Panels = 73" H 144 144 72 36 36 36 18 

For CB361 Panel, use 1/2 of bin quantities shown above. 

MOBILE 

BIN RACKS 

Two mobile bin racks are available, 

a single sided unit (Model 

CB359, incorporating two Model 

CB362 panels) and a double 

sided unit (Model CB649, incorporating 

six panels). These units 

are ideal for transportation of 

small parts and are shipped allwelded. 

Model CB090 (shown) 

includes 96 plastic bins of various 

sizes. 

Model Rack Dimensions Wt. 

No. Type W" x H" x D" lbs. 

CB359 Single 36 x 46 x 16 60 

CB649 Double 36 x 63 x 24 120 

Blue Red Yellow Green Stone 

CB650 CB651 CB652 CB681 CB682 Single 36 x 52 x 16 83 

CB089 CB090 CB091 CB683 CB684 Double 36 x 63 x 24 187 

STATIONARY BIN 

RACKS 

The Model CB373 stationary single-sided bin 

rack (shown) is made of 1 1/4" square tube 

frame, and 16 gauge heavy duty steel panels. 

The unit incorporates three Model CB362 

panels, see chart above for bin unit capacities. 

The Model CB653 double sided bin rack 

incorporates 6 panels. Both shipped all welded. 

Model No. CB656 (shown) includes 28 

Model CB110 bins. 

® 

Model Rack Dimensions Wt. 

No. Type W" x H" x D" lbs. 

CB373 Single 36 x 61 x 12 60 

CB653 Double 36 x 61 x 24 100 


CB654 CB655 CB656 CB685 CB686 Single 36 x 61 x 12 107 

CB370 CB371 CB372 CB687 CB688 Double 36 x 61 x 24 194 

Model No. CB362 

Panel Only 

Model Panel Size Wt. 

No. W" x H" lbs. 

CB361 18 x 19 6 

CB362 36 x 19 12 

BENCH RACK 

The Model CB363 (shown) all 

welded bench rack is a self- supporting 

work station organizer, 

which incorporates one Model 

CB362 panel, see chart above for 

bin unit capacities. This unit may 

be placed on any flat surface near 

a work area without any bolts or 

fasteners. The Model CB364 all 

welded bench rack is a larger 

capacity unit incorporating four 

Model CB362 panels, designed 

for permanent installation on a 72" 

workbench. Blue enamel finish. 

Model Dimensions Wt. 

No. Rack Type W" x H" lbs. 

CB363 Free standing 36 x 22 22 

CB364 Bolt-on 72 x 40 95 

ACCESSORIES FOR PLASTIC 

BIN SUPPORT AND BENCH RACKS 

Round and square hooks are constructed in sturdy steel and 

come in two sizes: 6" and 12". These hooks can be mounted on 

louvered panels. Model No. CC165 

FOR LOUVERED PANEL 

Model No. Description Std. Pkg. 

CC165 Round Hook, 6" 4 

CC166 Round Hook, 12" 4 

CC167 Square Hook, 6" 4 

CC168 Square Hook, 12" 4 

BIN CARTS 

The Model CB365 mobile bin cart has a work surface of 14 

gauge steel. Bin cart measures 38 1/2" L x 24" W x 37 1/2" 

H and features 5" rubber casters. Shipped all-welded. It 

incorporates two CB362 panels (one each side) and will 

accommodate various bin quantities, see chart above. 

Model CB366 (shown) includes 16 Model CB110 and 4 

Model CB112 bins. 

RACK TYPES 

Model No. CB365 - double sided 

Model No. CB366 - double sided c/w bins 

Model No. CC167 

Model DimensionsWt. 

No. W" x H" x D" lbs. 

CB365 24 x 36 1/2 x 38 1/2 95 


CB366 CB367 CB368 CB689 CB690 24 x 36 1/2 x 38 1/2 133 

® 

® 


531


532 


SECURITY STORAGE CABINETS 

HI-DENSITY SECURITY BIN CABINET 

This Deep-Door bin cabinet provides secure storage for valuable parts, precision tools, 

and other inventories, using a unique shielded padlock hasp. 

The model CB441 all-welded heavy duty 16 gauge steel cabinet measures 38" W x 24" D x 

72" H and incorporates louvered hanging panels welded to the cabinet's back panel and on 

its 4" deep hinged doors for added storage capacity. 

Colour is grey. 

The model CB443 cabinet includes the following plastic bins: 

42 Model CB093, 42 Model CB096, 18 Model CB099, 12 Model CB108 

and 6 Model CB111. (Bins are on page B1). 

Model Wt. 

No. Description lbs. 

CB441 Cabinet Only 316 

Cabinet w/bins Wt. 

Blue Red Yellow Green Stone Description lbs. 

CB443 CB444 CB445 CB691 CB692 Cabinet c/w 120 385 

Plastic Bins 

HEAVY-DUTY DEEP 

DOOR STORAGE CABINET 

The specially designed padlock hasp (cannot be accessed by bolt cutters, etc.) 

help secure the contents of this deep door hi-density storage cabinet. Four (4) reinforced 

adjustable main shelves are complemented by 6 adjustable mini shelves in each 4" deep 

hinged door for a capacity unmatched by any other cabinet. Cabinet dimensions are 38" W 

x 24" D x 72" H and colour is grey. Extra shelves can be ordered as required. 

Model Wt. 


FB024 Cabinet 315 

FB025 Extra Shelf (Cabinet) 18 

FB026 Extra Shelf (Door) 12 

COMBINATION BIN/SHELF 

SECURITY CABINET 

The versatile deep-door combination bin/shelf cabinet is the most outstanding high density 

storage system available to keep your precision tools, valuable parts and small assemblies 

secure, using an innovative padlock hasp/handle design. 

The Model CB442 all-welded heavy duty 16 gauge cabinet measures 38" W x 24 D" x 72" H, 

and incorporates louvered bin hanging panels welded into the cabinet's 4" deep hinged doors. 

The cabinet itself includes four adjustable heavy gauge shelves. Colour is grey. 

The Model CB446 cabinet (shown) includes 84 Model CB093 plastic bins. 

(Bins are on page B1). 

Model Wt. 


CB442 Cabinet Only 324 

FB025 Extra Shelf 18 

Cabinet w/bins Wt. 

Blue Red Yellow Green Stone Description lbs. 

CB446 CB477 CB448 CB693 CB694 Cabinet c/w Plastic Bins 341 

Model No. 

FB024

PLASTIC SHELF BINS 

The economical way to store and display parts and components, these durable polypropylene 

bins are designed for use on 12", 18" and 24" deep shelving, or vertical storage and 

retrieval units. Choose from thirteen different sizes to suit your particular needs. Shelf Bins 

"nest" when empty to save space. Bin colours are red, yellow, blue and green. 4 sizes of bin 

cups are available for easy parts removal. 

CB398 

CC415 

Reinforcing 

Steps for 

Strength 

Hang-Lock 

prevents spills 

CB396 

CB385 

Dividers 

Hopper 

Front 

CB392 

Bin Cups 


CC399 CC403 

CB698 

Wide Label 

Holder 

Bin Model No. Mfg. Outside Dimensions Inside Dimensions Qty./ Dividers Bin Cups Per Bin 

Blue Red Yellow Green No. D" W" H" D" W" H" Ctn. Up to 7 per bin CB379 CB380 CC417 CC418 

CB381 CB382 CB383 CB696 30-110 11 5/8 2 3/4 4 10 1/4 1 5/8 4 24 N/A 3 N/A N/A N/A 

CB384* CB385* CB386* CB697* 30-120 11 5/8 4 1/8 4 10 1/4 3 4 24 CB420 5 2 N/A N/A 

CB393* CB394* CB395* CB698* 30-130 11 5/8 6 5/8 4 10 1/4 5 1/2 4 12 CB421 9 4 N/A N/A 

CC393 CC394 CC395 N/A QSB107 11 7/8 8 1/8 4 10 3/4 7 1/2 3 7/8 20 CC419 N/A N/A 12 4 


CB390* CB391* CB392* CB699* 30-128 17 7/8 4 1/8 4 16 1/2 3 4 12 CB420 8 3 N/A N/A 

CB396* CB397* CB398* CB700* 30-138 17 7/8 6 5/8 4 16 1/2 5 1/2 4 12 CB421 15 6 N/A N/A 

CC399 CC400 CC401 N/A QSB108 17 7/8 8 1/8 4 16 3/8 7 1/2 3 7/8 10 CC419 N/A N/A 19 6 

CC402 CC403 CC404 N/A QSB110 17 7/8 11 1/8 4 16 3/8 10 3/8 3 7/8 8 CC424 N/A N/A 29 9 

CC405 CC406 CC407 N/A QSB105 23 7/8 4 1/8 4 22 1/4 3 1/4 3 7/8 16 CC421 N/A N/A 13 4 

CC408 CC409 CC423 N/A QSB106 23 7/8 6 5/8 4 22 1/4 5 1/2 3 7/8 8 CC422 N/A N/A 21 8 



* 2 full width adjustable/removable dividers included. 

BIN DIVIDERS 

Model No. Mfg. No. Qty/pkg. Description 

CB420 40-120 24 Divider, 2 7/8" wide 



CB423 40-170 24 Divider, 10" wide 

CC419 DSB107 50 Divider, 8 1/8" wide 

CB424 DSB109 50 Divider, 11 1/8" wide 



CB381 

CC407 

CC394 

CC398 

The special built-in hanglock catches the underside of the 

shelf above, allowing each bin to be tilted out for complete 

access. 

BIN CUPS 

Model No. Mfg. No. Qty/pkg. Description 

CB379 30-101 48 Bin Cup, 1 3/4" x 2" 

CB380 30-102 4 Bin Cup, 5" x 2 3/4" 

CC417 QBC111I 48 Bin Cup, 3 1/4" x 1 3/4" 

CC418 QBC112I 48 Bin Cup, 5 1/4" x 2 3/4" 


533


534 


FIBREBOARD BINS & RACKS 

CORRUGATED PARTS BINS 

& DIVIDERS 

Corrugated Fibreboard Parts Bins and Dividers are ideal for storing any loose small parts. 

These economical standard duty bins are constructed of durable corrugated fibreboard, and 

are assembled easily without staples or tape: just fold and they hold. Bins are designed to 

hang from the shelf above for hands-free access. Available in depths of 12" and 18", and in 

widths ranging from 2" to 12". Bin dividers measuring 3 5/8" deep are available in all widths. 

Shipped knocked down. 

12" Deep Parts Bins 18" Deep Parts Bins 

Ctn. Qty 100 Ctn. Qty 100 

Dimensions Model Ctn. Wt. Model Ctn. Wt. 

W" x H" No. lbs. No. lbs. 

2 x 4 1/2 CB063 17 CB056 22 

3 x 4 1/2 CB064 19 CB057 27 

4 x 4 1/2 CB065 20 CB058 30 

6 x 4 1/2 CB066 25 CB059 38 

8 x 4 1/2 CB067 31 CB060 45 

9 x 4 1/2 CB068 36 N/A — 

10 x 4 1/2 CB052 38 CB054 50 

12 x 4 1/2 CB053 44 CB055 57 

Removable Dividers - Ctn. Qty. 100 

Dimensions Model Ctn. Wt. Dimensions Model Ctn.Wt. 

W" x H" No. lbs. W" x H" No. lbs. 

1 3/4 x 4 1/8 CB071 7 7 3/4 x 4 1/8 CB075 22 

2 3/4 x 4 1/8 CB072 9 9 3/4 x 4 1/8 CB069 27 

3 3/4 x 4 1/8 CB073 10 11 3/4 x 4 1/8 CB070 31 

5 3/4 x 4 1/8 CB074 14 

SINGLE SIDED 

PICK-RACKS 

Single sided pick-racks are available in the 61" high floor 

model, c/w 48-4" plastic storage bins and 10-6" plastic 

storage bins or 48-4" corrugated bins and 8-8" corrugated 

bins. The 21 1/2" high bench model, c/w 16-4" plastic storage 

bins, and 5-6" plastic storage bins or 16-4" corrugated 

storage bins and 4-8" corrugated storage bins. Both units 

are free standing, but may be bolted to bench top, floor or 

wall. Order complete with plastic shelf bins, fibreboard bins 

or rack only. Shipped knocked down. Grey enamel finish. 

Model Bin Wt. 

No. Height" Type lbs. 

CB318 21 1/2 Corrugated 22 

CB377 21 1/2 Rack only 17 

CB323 61 Corrugated 57 

CB378 61 Rack only 45 

Blue Red Yellow 

CB320 CB321 CB322 21 1/2 Plastic 25 

CB325 CB326 CB327 61 Plastic 65 

Standard Corrugated 

Bins & Dividers 

DOUBLE SIDED MOBILE 

PICK-RACKS 

Double Sided Mobile Pick Racks feature 22 gauge steel rack 

components mounted on a 26" x 36" dolly, with 3" casters for 

easy mobility. Each rack will accommodate 96- 4" wide storage 

bins, and 20- 6" wide bins. Order complete with plastic 

shelf bins, fibreboard bins, or rack only. Shipped knocked 

down. 

Grey enamel finish. 

Model Bin Wt. 


CB328 65 Corrugated 139 

CB337 65 Rack only 115 


CB330 CB331 CB332 65 Plastic 155 

Removable dividers 

ease handling 

PARTS STORAGE 

SHELVING UNITS 

Parts Storage Shelving Units provide a versatile heavy duty 

storage facility for parts storage bins. Select a 

76" high unit, c/w 96- 4" bins, or a 40" high unit, c/w 48- 4" 

bins. Available with plastic shelf bins, fibreboard bins, or 

shelving only. Shipped knocked down. 


Model Bin Wt. 


CB298 40 Corrugated 90 

RC004 40 Shelving only 80 

RC491 76 Corrugated 163 

RC042 76 Shelving only 144 


CB301 CB302 CB303 40 Plastic 96 

CB435 CB436 CB437 76 Plastic 176


NSBees TM NEST & STACK BINS 

NSBees TM combine all the advantages of nesting and stacking with special features for increased efficiency 

and productivity. 

Durable and versatile, NSBees TM are constructed from moulded co-polymer polypropylene for economy, 

strength and durability. These bins are waterproof, resistant to grease, oil, solvents, and chemicals and 

are autoclaveable up to 250° F. The interior corners are rounded and tapered to keep small parts from 

being trapped. Reinforced side ribs add strength and prevent NSBees TM from spreading when stacked or 

loaded. Built-in stacking posts and postholes allow for secure, same-width stacking. The generous hopper 

front provides access to stored items while the large label area allows for quick content identification. 

NSBees TM can increase efficiency and streamline operations. They give you the freedom to build custom 

workstations and storage centres using unique combinations of mixed widths and lengths. 

Recommended stack of NSBees TM is four bins. When not in use, NSBees TM can dramatically lower shipping 

costs and reduce storage space because they nest. 

NSBees TM are available in five sizes and two colours and are fully compatible with standard 12", 18" or 24" 

shelving. 

Model No. Mfg Outside Dimensions Carton 

Blue Yellow No. L" x W" x H" Qty 

CC083 CC084 30-796 8 7/8 x 6 5/8 x 5 10 

CC085 CC086 30-716 11 7/8 x 6 5/8 x 5 10 

CC087 CC088 30-776 17 7/8 x 6 5/8 x 7 10 

CC089 CC090 30-718 11 7/8 x 8 3/8 x 5 8 

CC091 CC092 30-778 17 7/8 x 8 3/8 x 7 8 

SHIP, STORE & SAVE 

12.8" 

Nested 

28.5" 

Stacked 

Model No. CC085/CC087 

CC087 

Stacked 4 high 

Nested NSBees 

cut shipping & 

storage 

space by 

up to 56% 

CC087 

Nested 4 high 

Model No. 

CC091 

Model No. 

CC087 

Model No. 

CC090 

Model No. 

CC083 

Model No. 

CC086 


535


536 


STORAGE BINS 

HI-STAK PLASTIC BINS 

Model No. 

CB267 Model No. 

CB264 

The most durable, cost effective bins available. Innovative stacking design allows for 

greater visibility and easier access to contents. 

These high quality plastic bins are guaranteed unbreakable and distortion-free from -40°C 

to 120°C. Unaffected by oil, alkaline and most acids. Four 1" post-type legs lets you stack 

the bins. The 1" of extra height between bins allows for easier access and greater visibility 

of bin contents. Bins also attach to each other’s sides for a strong, more stable arrangement. 

Ideal in production or for store display. I.D. card with clear plastic shield provided with each 

bin. Colours : Blue, Yellow and Green. 

Model No. Dimensions Wt. Qty/ 

Blue Yellow Green L" x W" x H"* lbs. Case 

CB260 CB261 CC234 7.2 x 4.8 x 3.2 0.10 60 

CB262 CB263 CC235 10.0 x 6.0 x 4.8 0.15 36 

CB264 CB265 CC236 14.0 x 8.0 x 6.0 0.35 18 

CC239 CC240 CC237 18.0 x 8.0 x 7.1 0.55 12 

CB266 CB267 CC238 18.0 x 12.0 x 7.1 0.60 8 

*Add 1 inch to overall height when stacking on legs. 

MULTI-BINS TM 

Your small parts storage solution 

• Horizontal and vertical configurations 

• Available in 6 various sizes 

• Moulded from high-impact grade ABS plastic 

• ESD models available using conductive plastic 

• Easy access to all your inventoried parts 

• Clear extruded fronts means that you'll always 

know the contents of each Multi-Bin TM 

• Retail display 

• Electronics parts assembly 

• Home and garden 

• Commercial warehouse 

• Crafts & hobbies 

• Ergonomic workstations 

• Available in Grey 

Model No 

No. Colour of Bins Dimensions" 

HORIZONTAL PANELS: 42" X 27 1/2" 

CC147 Grey 66 Small 3 x 3 x 3 

CC148 Grey 40 Medium 4 1/2 x 4 x 4 

CC149 Grey 20 Large 7 1/4 x 4 1/2 x 4 1/2 

VERTICAL PANELS: 27 1/2" X 42" 

CC150 Grey 63 Small 3 x 3 x 3 

CC151 Grey 40 Medium 4 1/2 x 4 x 4 

CC152 Grey 21 Large 7 1/4 x 4 1/2 x 4 1/2 

Model No. 

CB263 

Model No. 

CC234 

HI-STAK Bins feature 4 post type legs 

each for easy access to parts, and 

for better stability when stacked. 

HI-STAK Bins also attach 

to each other's sides 

for a firmer bin 

arrangement.

BINS 

QUANTUM BINS 

Quantum TM Ultra Series bins are ultra strong and versatile containers 

that will stack on one another or hang on louvered panels, rails and carts. 

Features include: 

• Heavy duty, virgin, high density 

polypropylene/polyethylene 

• Large multiple label slots 

• Reinforced design prevents spreading 

• Autoclavable up to 250 °F 

• Optional dividers and clear windows 

are available for most units 

WINDOWS 

Optional clear windows are available to maximize 

storage capacity, prevent spillage and 

protect parts from dust and dirt. Converts bin 

into a true carrying tote, while allowing for 

inspection of parts. 

GIANT STACKING CONTAINERS 

Designed for multiple applications in recycling, storing parts, tools and 

warehouse items. Will stack up to 8 high creating sturdy, tall storage systems. 


• Large grip side handles 

• Extra thick side walls with 

reinforcing ribs allow 

for 100 lbs. stack 

capacity per bin 

• 1/4" drill holes in 

bottom allow for drainage 

• Optional clear window 

and labels are available 

• Outside dimensions : 

15 1/4" L x 19 7/8" W x 

12 7/16" H 


Model No. Mfg. Outside Dim. Inside Dim. Ctn Ctn Bin load Dividers Clear 

Blue Yellow Red Ivory Green No. L" W" H" L" W" H" Qty Wt. lbs. Cap. lbs. Length Cross Window 

CB739 CB741 CB744 CB745 CC264 QUS 205 4 1/2 4 1/8 3 3 3/16 3 1/2 2 7/8 48 .19 8 CB824 - - 



CB763 CB765 CB766 CB768 CC267 QUS 230 11 5 1/2 5 8 11/16 4 13/16 4 13/16 12 .92 20 CB827 CB836 CB812 

CB769 CB771 CB772 CB774 CC268 QUS 233 13 1/2 5 1/2 5 11 1/4 4 13/16 4 13/16 12 1.09 20 CB828 CB836 CB812 

CB775 CB777 CB778 CB780 CC269 QUS 235 11 11 5 9 10 3/8 4 13/16 8 1.75 50 CB827 - CB815 

CB781 CB783 CB784 CB786 CC270 QUS 239 11 8 1/4 7 9 7 1/2 6 3/4 8 1.5 50 CB830 - CB816 

CB787 CB789 CB790 CB792 CC271 QUS 240 14 3/4 8 1/4 7 12 7/8 7 1/2 6 3/4 8 2 50 CB831 - CB816 

CC282 CC283 CC284 CC285 CC286 QUS 245 11 16 1/2 5 9 15 3/4 4 13/16 6 3 60 CC297 - CC300 

CB794 CB795 CB796 CB797 CC272 QUS 250 14 3/4 16 1/2 7 12 7/8 15 3/4 6 3/4 6 3.5 75 CB831 - CB819 

CB798 CB800 CB801 CB802 CC273 QUS 255 16 11 8 13 5/8 10 1/4 7 3/4 4 3.5 75 CB833 - CB820 

CB803 CB804 CB806 CB807 CC274 QUS 260 18 11 10 15 5/8 10 1/4 9 3/4 4 3.75 75 CB834 - CB821 

CC287 CC288 CC289 CC290 CC291 QUS 265 18 8 1/4 9 17 1/8 6 3/4 8 1/4 6 2.8 60 CC298 - CC301 

CB808 CB809 CB810 CB811 CC275 QUS 270 18 16 1/2 11 15 5/8 15 3/4 10 3/4 4 5.75 - CB834 - CB822 

CC292 CC293 CC294 CC295 CC296 QUS 280 19 3/4 12 3/8 5 7/8 18 1/2 11 5 5/8 6 2.8 - CC299 - CC302 

Labels 


Clear window 


Model No Mfg. Qty/ 

Grey Blue Green Ivory Black Red No. Ctn 

CB838 CB839 CB840 CB841 CB842 CC305 QGH700 3 

GIANT STACK 

CONTAINER 

SHELF UNIT 

Includes 10-QGH700 storage 

bins and heavy duty grey enamel 

shelves. 

Shipped Knocked down. 

Capacity 500 lbs. per shelf. 

Dimensions: 

18" D x 42" W x 76" H. 

Model No. No. 

Grey Blue Green Ivory Black Red Description shelves 

CB845 CB846 CB847 CB848 CB849 CC306 Starter 6 

CB970 CB971 CB972 CB973 CB974 CC307 Add-On 6 


537


538 


GIANT STACKING CONTAINERS 

• These heavy duty containers are injection 

moulded from high density polyethylene 

• Ideal for storage and transport of large parts: 

Extra heavy, double wall thickness with 

interlock preformed lip allows containers 

to stack securely 

• Moulded carrying handle on backside 

makes carrying these bins a snap 

• Superior strength and wide stacking ledge allows 

for 200 lb stack capacity 

• Hopper front allows for easy access 

• Moulded in divider and label slots allow full 

utilization and identification of all parts 

• Optional windows maximize storage and prevent spillage 

• Can withstand temperatures ranging from -40° to 250°F 

• Will not rust or corrode, are unaffected by chemicals and solvents and 

are waterproof 

Model No. Mfg. Outside Dimensions Inside Dimensions Case Divider Window 

Blue Green Red Yellow No. L" x W" x H" D" x W" x H" Qty Model No. Model No. 

CC361 CC362 CC363 CC364 QMS531 19 3/4 x 12 3/8 x 5 7/8 17 3/4 x 11 1/4 x 5 1/8 6 CC381 CC385 

CC365 CC366 CC367 CC368 QMS532 19 3/4 x 12 3/8 x 7 7/8 17 3/4 x 11 1/4 x 7 1/4 6 CC382 CC386 

CC369 CC370 CC371 CC372 QMS533 19 3/4 x 12 3/8 x 11 7/8 17 3/4 x 11 1/4 x 11 3 CC383 CC387 

CC373 CC374 CC375 CC376 QMS543 19 3/4 x 18 3/8 x 11 7/8 17 3/4 x 17 1/4 x 11 1 CC384 CC388 

CC377* CC378* CC379* CC380* QMS743 29 x 18 3/8 x 11 7/8 26 3/4 x 17 1/4 x 11 1 N/A N/A 

* Includes heavy duty spread bar for extra strength and support. 

CC380 

CC372 

CC363 

CC373 

CC366

BINS 

RECYCLED SHELF BINS 

Manufactured from recycled 100% post consumer, high density polyethylene. Available in black only. 

Model Mfg. Outside Dimensions Inside Dimensions Ctn Wt. Dividers 

No. No. L" W" H" L" W" H" Qty lbs. Model No. 

CC303 QSB 100B 11 7/8 2 3/4 4 10 1/4 1 5/8 4 36 29 N/A 

CB850 QSB 101 BR 11 7/8 4 1/8 4 10 3/4 3 1/4 3 7/8 36 .41 CB861 

CB851 QSB 102 BR 11 7/8 6 5/8 4 10 3/4 5 1/2 3 7/8 30 .53 CB862 

CB852 QSB 103 BR 18 1/8 4 1/8 4 16 5/8 3 1/4 3 7/8 20 .75 CB861 

CB954 QSB 104 BR 18 1/8 6 5/8 4 16 5/8 5 1/2 3 7/8 20 .9 CB862 

CB854 QSB 105 BR 23 7/8 4 1/8 4 22 1/4 3 1/4 3 7/8 16 .94 CB861 

CB855 QSB 106 BR 23 7/8 6 5/8 4 22 1/4 5 1/2 3 7/8 8 1.5 CB862 

CB856 QSB 107 BR 11 7/8 8 1/8 4 10 3/4 7 1/2 3 7/8 20 .7 CB867 

CB857 QSB 108 BR 18 1/8 8 1/8 4 16 5/8 7 1/2 3 7/8 10 1.2 CB867 

CB858 QSB 109 BR 11 7/8 11 1/8 4 10 3/4 10 3/8 3 7/8 8 1 CB869 

CB859 QSB 110 BR 18 1/8 11 1/8 4 16 5/8 10 3/8 3 7/8 8 1.4 CB869 

CB860 QSB 114 BR 23 7/8 8 1/8 4 22 1/4 7 1/2 3 7/8 6 1.5 CB867 

CC304 QSB 116B 23 7/8 11 1/8 4 22 1/4 10 3/8 3 7/8 6 2.0 CB869 

CC241 QGH 700 BR 15 1/4 19 7/8 12 7/16 - - - 3 13 N/A 

CONDUCTIVE BINS & DIVIDERS 

Ideal for storage and transport of electronic components and parts. Highly dissipative carbon filled copolymer polypropylene material 

protects sensitive electronic components from typical electromagnetic interference. Containers are permanently conductive and are unaffected 

by normal cleansers. Colour: Black. 


• Electrostatic decay rate is tested to meet Mil spec Mil-B-81075B at less than 0.1 seconds 

• Surface resistivity is less than 10 5 ohms per square when tested per ASTM-D257 

Model Mfg. Outside Dimensions Inside Dimensions Ctn Wt. Dividers 

Mo. No. L" x W" x H" L" x W" x H" Qty lbs. Model No. 

CB872 QUS 205 CON 4 1/2 x 4 1/8 x 3 3 3/16 x 3 1/2 x 2 7/8 48 .21 CB958 



CB875 QUS 230 CON 11 x 5 1/2 x 5 8 11/16 x 4 13/16 x 4 13/16 12 1 CB961 

CB876 QUS 233 CON 13 1/2 x 5 1/2 x 5 11 1/4 x 4 13/16 x 4 13/16 12 1.02 CB962 

CB877 QUS 235 CON 11 x 11 x 5 9 x 10 3/8 x 4 13/16 8 1.9 CB963 

CB878 QUS 239 CON 11 x 8 1/4 x 7 9 x 7 1/2 x 6 3/4 8 1.63 CB964 

CB904 QUS 240 CON 14 3/4 x 8 1/4 x 7 12 7/8 x 7 1/2 x 6 3/4 8 2.13 CB965 

CB905 QUS 250 CON 14 3/4 x 16 1/2 x 7 12 7/8 x 15 3/4 x 6 3/4 6 3.6 CB966 

CB955 QUS 255 CON 16 x 11 x 8 13 5/8 x 10 1/4 x 7 3/4 4 3.75 CB967 

CB956 QUS 260 CON 18 x 11 x 10 15 5/8 x 10 1/4 x 9 3/4 4 4 CB968 

CB957 QUS 270 CON 18 x 16 1/2 x 11 15 5/8 x 15 3/4 x 10 3/4 4 6 CB968 

CONDUCTIVE 

DIVIDER BOXES 

These divideable, conveyable boxes, constructed from conductive materials 

can be divided into compartments by length and/or width. Dividers are 

on 1.25" centres. Colour: Black. 

CONDUCTIVE BINS 

Black, carbon-filled, injection moulded polypropylene copolymer resin. 

These containers provide conductive and shielding protection for use in 

electronics manufacturing. Provides a Faraday cage for parts when container 

is covered. Unaffected by humidity. Permanently conductive. Static 

decay rate of


540 


SHIPPING & STORAGE CONTAINERS 

STACK-N-NEST ® STORAGE BINS 

STACK'N'NEST® plastic storage bins are great for storing, 

assembling and transporting small parts, 

components and finished goods. 

Designed for maximum efficiency and utility - set together 

one way they stack and the other way they nest. Hundreds 

of uses in the office, warehouse or factory. May be used on 

shelving or stacked up. Heavy duty design allows higher 

stacking. In the plant - use the same bin for storage, handling, 

and assembly, no need to transfer contents. Colour: 

Blue. 

Model Outside Dimensions Cap. Wt. 

No. L" x W" x D" Cu. ft. lbs. 

CA333 15 3/8 x 12 1/2 x 5 7/8 0.7 1.7 

TRANSFER BOX 

Model No. CA444 

STORALL 

GENERAL PURPOSE 

CONTAINERS 

Moulded from durable UV stabilized polyethylene, the StorAll is designed 

to provide year round maintenance free protection for your items. 

• Double walled lid and convex base 

• Knuckle and rod reinforced hinge design 

• Moulded forklift feet 

• Moulded-in lifting handles 

• Lightweight and easy to handle 

• Keeps contents safe and dry 

• Stacking design saves space and costs of shipping 

• Ideal for campgrounds, cottages, business, farms, trailer parks, 

golf courses, marinas, etc. 

• Dimensions 48" L x 29" H x 30" W 

• Capacity of 1000 lbs. or 13 cu.ft. 

• Stacks 10 high in a trailer un-skidded and 9 high skidded 

Model 

No. Colour 

CC389 Yellow 

CC390 Grey 

Model 

No. Colour 

CC391 Yellow w/hasp 

CC392 Grey w/hasp 

ECONOMY TRANSFER BOXES 

Transport or store inventories safely and 

efficiently with these reusable injection 

moulded plastic transfer boxes. 

Designed to utilize available truck or warehouse space effectively, these containers will stack 

with the attached hinged lids closed, or nest with them open. Available sizes include 1.4 or 

1.8 cubic foot capacities. 

2 POPULAR SIZES 

Model Outside Dimensions Cap. Wt. 

No. L" x W" x D" Cu. ft. lbs. 

CA443 Grey 21 x 15 x 10 1.4 2.2 

CA442 Blue 21 x 15 x 10 1.4 2.2 

CA445 Grey 21 x 15 x 12 1.8 2.8 

CA444 Blue 21 x 15 x 12 1.8 2.8 

STACK-N-NEST ® 

BINS 

Model No. 

CA333


FLIPAK TM DISTRIBUTION CONTAINERS 

These reusable, returnable, attached-lid containers are ideal for use in wholesale 

product distribution and as picking containers. Hinged covers with tight interlocking 

fit provide maximum security and protection. Containers stack with lids 

closed and nest with lids open for optimum use of space in trucks, trailers or on 

pallets. Pebble grain bottom surface provides extra traction on conveyors. Load 

capacity per container is a maximum of 70-75 lbs. Bottom container will support 

250 to 300 lbs. when stacked. (Please inquire for exact load capacities). Flipak TM 

containers are available in polyethylene plastic (PE) and polypropylene plastic 

(PP). 

FLIPAK TM POLYETHYLENE PLASTIC (PE) DISTRIBUTION CONTAINERS 

Outside Dim. Outside Dim. 

Model No. Top Bottom Volume Nesting Wt. 

Grey Red L" x W" x H" L" x W" cu. ft. Ratio lbs. 

LESS THAN 2.0 CU. FT. 

CA452 - 11.8 x 9.8 x 7.7 9.3 x 7.0 0.3 2.8:1 2.6 

CA453 - 15.2 x 10.9 x 9.7 12.8 x 7.8 0.6 4.0:1 3.0 

CA454 - 21.8 x 15.1 x 5.5 18.9 x 13.7 0.7 3.6:1 4.8 

CA455 - 19.7 x 11.8 x 7.3 16.9 x 9.3 0.7 3.0:1 3.4 

CA456 - 20.6 x 13.5 x 6.5 18.2 x 11.7 0.8 2.1:1 5.2 

CA457 - 20.6 x 13.0 x 11.6 17.7 x 11.0 1.4 4.4:1 5.9 

CA458 CA459 21.8 x 15.2 x 9.8 19.1 x 13.5 1.4 4.4:1 5.6 

CA460 - 21.8 x 16.0 x 9.3 19.1 x 13.4 1.4 4.5:1 5.6 

CA461 - 22.3 x 13.0 x 12.8 19.1 x 10.9 1.6 3.8:1 6.2 

CA462 CA463 21.8 x 15.2 x 12.9 18.6 x 12.9 1.8 4.0:1 6.2 

CA464 - 23.5 x 15.7 x 13.0 19.9 x 13.0 1.7 4.5:1 6.9 

2.0 CU. FT. AND GREATER 

CA465 - 27.0 x 17.1 x 10.2 24.6 x 14.8 2.0 3.3:1 6.6 

CA466 CA467 26.9 x 17.1 x 12.6 24.3 x 14.6 2.4 4.2:1 7.7 

CA468 CA469 23.9 x 19.6 x 12.6 21.1 x 17.1 2.7 5.3:1 8.4 

CA470 - 28.0 x 20.6 x 12.5 25.0 x 18.0 3.2 3.5:1 10.0 

CA471 - 39.0 x 14.0 x 13.0 36.3 x 11.3 3.3 4.9:1 10.4 

CA472 - 32.0 x 18.0 x 14.9 28.8 x 15.9 3.8 3.0:1 11.0 

CA473 CA474 27.6 x 20.6 x 15.6 25.8 x 18.7 4.2 2.7:1 12.7 

CA475 - 30.0 x 22.0 x 20.5 27.4 x 19.4 6.1 4.0:1 17.0 

FLIPAK TM POLYETHYLENE PLASTIC (PE) DISTRIBUTION CONTAINERS 

Flipak TM Polyethylene Plastic Distribution Containers are available in grey and red. High density 

polyethylene (HDPE) construction offers maximum product protection from moisture, 

impact and chemicals. 

FLIPAK TM CLEAR POLYPROPYLENE PLASTIC (PP) DISTRIBUTION CONTAINERS 

Flipak TM Clear Polypropylene Plastic Distribution Containers offer all the same benefits as the 

polyethylene containers, plus provide easy content identification. Polypropylene (PP) is the 

same family as polyethylene. Polypropylene's advantages over polyethylene include its 

greater stiffness and elevated use temperature (range 30°F - 150°F). 

FLIPAK TM CLEAR POLYPROPYLENE PLASTIC (PP) DISTRIBUTION CONTAINERS 

Outside Dim. Outside Dim. 

Model Top Bottom Volume Nesting Wt. 

No. L" x W" x H" L" x W" cu. ft. Ratio lbs. 

LESS THAN 2.0 CU. FT. 

CC128 11.8 x 9.8 x 7.7 9.3 x 7.0 0.3 2.8:1 2.6 

CC129 15.2 x 10.9 x 9.7 12.8 x 7.8 0.6 4.0:1 3.0 

CC130 19.7 x 11.8 x 7.3 16.9 x 9.3 0.7 3.0:1 3.4 

CC131 21.8 x 15.2 x 9.8 19.1 x 13.5 1.4 4.4:1 5.6 

CC132 21.8 x 15.2 x 12.9 18.6 x 12.9 1.8 4.0:1 6.2 

2.0 CU. FT. AND GREATER 

CC133 23.9 x 19.6 x 12.6 21.1 x 17.1 2.7 5.3:1 8.4 


541


542 


STACK-N-NEST PLASTIC CONTAINERS 

Model No. 

CA343 

Model No. 

CA341 

Model No. 

CA345 

Model No. 

CA346 

Polylewton Stack-N-Nest containers are used in general manufacturing, food processing and distribution applications. 

Containers are injection moulded from high-impact polyolefins. 

Features: 

• Polylewton containers won't rust, rot or corrode, and they resist 

damaging effects of oil, most chemical solvents, water and steam, 

for extended service life 

• For maximum space utilization, Polylewton containers stack without 

covers, and nest at alternating 180° positions when empty 

• They withstand wide temperature variances, are easily cleaned, 

and are ideal for handling unpackaged products 

• USDA and FDA approved for food applications 

Model No. 

CA346 

Model No. 

CA346 

• Uniform container weight 

• Safe to handle, no sharp edges, burrs or splinters 

• Polylewton containers provide excellent product protection against 

moisture, impact, chemicals and pests 

• Several optional identification methods, as well as a full line of 

accessories, are available to meet application requirements 

• Colour: Grey 

FDA 

USDA 

CONTAINERS COVERS 

Model Outside Dimensions Top Outside Dimensions Bottom Volume Nesting Wt. Model 

No. L" x W" x H" L" x W" cu. ft. Ratio lbs. No. 

CA341 20.1 x 13.0 x 6.2 18.5 x 11.5 0.6 2.1:1 2.6 CA334 

CA344 24.0 x 14.1 x 7.9 21.8 x 11.5 1.1 4:1 3.4 CA337 

CA342 19.4 x 12.9 x 12.1 17.3 x 10.9 1.3 4:1 3.8 CA335 

CA343 21.0 x 17.0 x 12.0 18.8 x 15.0 1.8 4:1 5.0 CA336 

CA346 26.1 x 18.7 x 10.5 24.0 x 15.9 2.1 4:1 5.4 CA339 

CA348 29.6 x 22.4 x 6.1 28.3 x 21.0 2.1 4:1 4.8 N/A 

CA347 28.4 x 18.7 x 10.5 26.0 x 15.9 2.3 4:1 5.8 N/A 

CA345 24.0 x 20.0 x 13.0 21.6 x 17.7 2.7 4:1 6.4 CA338 

CA349 30.1 x 24.0 x 15.1 27.0 x 21.0 4.7 4.5:1 11.0 N/A

STACK & NEST TOTES 

SNT'S 

These heavy duty, tough, and dependable Stack and Nest Totes are the ultimate reusable 

container for storage and transporting your valuable items in any application. 

• Will stack with or without lids for maximum storage and shipping 

• They have a unique ability to stack and then can be turned 180° 

to nest when empty, saving valuable space 

• Textured bottoms ensure safe and easy, non-slip 

grip transit on conveyors 

• Injection moulded from high density polyethylene material that complies 

with USDA and FDA regulations for use in food processing 

• Will no rust, corrode, bend out of shape, are unaffected by chemicals 

and are waterproof 

• Uniform wall thickness and moulded-in design for added strength 

• Fits on standard 48" x 40" pallets 

• Can withstand temperature ranges from -10°F to 250°F 

• Ribs under lip prevent jamming when nested 

• Handle grips on either side for easy carrying and handling 


Model No. Mfg. Outside Dimensions Inside Dimensions Case Lids Model No. Case 

Blue Grey Red No. L" x W" x H" L" x W" x H" Qty Blue Grey Red Qty 

CC315 CC316 CC317 STN180 18 x 11 x 6 15 1/4 x 9 3/8 x 5 7/8 6 CC342 CC343 CC344 6 

CC318 CC319 CC320 SNT185 18 x 11 x 9 15 1/8 x 9 1/8 x 8 7/8 6 CC342 CC343 CC344 6 

CC321 CC322 CC323 SNT190 19 1/2 x 15 1/2 x 0 16 x 13 1/4 x 9 7/8 6 CC345 CC346 CC347 6 

CC324 CC325 CC326 SNT195 19 1/2 x 15 1/2 x 13 15 7/8 x 13 3/8 x 12 7/8 6 CC345 CC346 CC347 6 




CC336 CC337 CC338 SNT240 23 1/2 x 15 1/2 x 12 19 5/8 x 13 x 11 7/8 3 CC354 CC355 CC356 3 

CC339 CC340 CC341 SNT300 29 1/2 x 19 1/2 x 15 25 1/8 x 16 5/8 x 14 7/8 3 CC357 CC358 CC359 3 

* Model No. CC360 Label holder, accommodates up to 3" x 5" Fits all SNT's. 

Optional lids snap on tightly and 

securely to protect container 

contents. As pictured, lids can be 

fastened and locked for added 

secuity 

All nine sizes of totes have the 

ability to use the optional clear 

label holder. It securely 

attaches to SNT with or without 

lid for easy part identification. 


543


544 


DIVIDER BOX ® CONTAINERS 

CA597 

CA593 

Multipurpose DividerPak II ® (NDC) containers and Divider Box ® (DC) containers are used in commercial, industrial and medical applications. Both styles of containers are dividable 

and conveyable, and are widely used for storage, assembly, fabrication, and distribution. Containers are injection-moulded HDPE. Standard container colour: grey. Other colours are 

available but not in stock. 

Features: 

• DividerPak ® (series NDC) models include features that increase 

your productivity: 

- Large, flat areas on all four sides for contents identification 

- Comfort grip handle 

- Security tie holes on two ends 

- No-guess textured divider grid and numbered divider slots 


Cardholder 4.25" W x 7.75" L (with 2 snaps) 

CA591 & 

CA559 

CA594 & 

CA559 

GREY 

IN STOCK FOR 

Fast Delivery 

• All containers can be divided into compartments by length and/or width 

• Dividers are on 1.25" centres 

• Thirteen sizes, three standard footprints, and heights ranging from 2.5" to 12", 

the multi-container line provides the most efficient and versatile selection for your application 

• Stack-only style container 

• One set of cardholder snaps included on all NDC models 

• Full range of optional accessories available including cardholders, 

vertical and horizontal dividers, and clear snap-on or dust covers 

DIVIDER BOXES 

Outside Dimensions Outside Dimensions SHORT DIVIDERS LONG DIVIDERS 

Model Top Bottom Volume Wt. Model No. of Model No. of CLEAR LIDS 

No. Series L" x W" x H" L" x W" cu. ft. lbs. No. Slots No. Slots Model No. 

CA562 DC 10.8 x 8.5 x 2.5 9.8 x 7.3 0.07 0.5 CA568 7 CA571 5 CA556 




CA591 NDC 16.5 x 10.9 x 3.5 15.5 x 9.9 0.24 1.1 CA572 11 CA578 7 CA559 









CA556 


Cardholder 2.25" W x 6.50" L (with 2 snaps) 

CA562 

CA565 

CA560 

CA595


STAKPAK ® PLUS 4845 CONTAINERS 

STAKPAK ® PLUS 4845 SYSTEM CONTAINERS 

The StakPak ® system is a series of stack-only, injection moulded, straight-wall modular containers. Made of high density 

polyethylene (HDPE), this system was designed for just-in-time applications where the same containers are used for shipping, 

storing and work-in-progress. Reinforced external ribbing adds maximum stacking strength. Smooth, straight interior 

walls provide maximum space utilization and easy cleaning. Modular design optimizes cube on standard 45" x 48" pallet, 

allows for mixing and matching of various sizes. Ergonomically designed handles for comfort and safety. Containers hold up 

under temperatures from -10°F to 120°F. Optional cardholders improve inventory control and boost efficiency. Standard 

colours: grey, medium green and royal blue. 

Model No. Outside Dim. Total Product 48' Trailer Cover Model No. 

Medium Royal Top Bottom Container Clearance" Volume Capacity Wt. Medium Royal Cardholder 

Green Grey Blue L" W" L" W" Height" * cu.ft. (containers) lbs. Green Grey Blue Model No. 

STAKPAK ® CONTAINERS 

CA498 CA499 CC112 12.0 7.4 12.0 7.4 5.0 4.3 0.1 8640 1.3 CA487 CA488 CC120 CA448 

CA500 CA501 CC113 12.0 15.0 12.0 15.0 5.0 4.3 0.3 4320 1.9 CA489 CA490 CC121 CA448 


CA504 CC174 CC115 12.0 15.0 12.0 15.0 9.5 8.8 0.6 2304 3.3 CA489 CA490 CC121 CA449 





STAKPAK ® COVERS 

CA487 CA488 CC120 12.0 7.4 0.3 

CA489 CA490 CC121 12.0 15.0 0.7 

CA491 CA492 CC122 24.0 15.0 1.4 

ATTACHED LID CONTAINERS 

- CA518 - 24.0 15.0 21.4 13.0 9.5 8.6 1.4 1296 5.6 CA449 

- CA516 - 24.0 15.0 21.4 13.0 14.6 13.8 2.3 864 7.3 CA449 

*When containers are stacked on top of each other approximately 1/2" is lost to nesting. 

CARDHOLDERS 

Model No. L" x W" 

CA448 8.5 x 4.0 

CA449 8.5 x 4.6 


545


546 


COLLAPSIBLE CONTAINERS 

HINGED LID CONTAINERS 

These collapsible polypropylene containers provide the greatest range of options for 

meeting your handling and transportation requirements. 

Unique collapsible design allows for a maximum 5:1 return ratio saving on transport costs. 

HINGED LID containers fit standard AIAG foot print, up to 80% space savings when storing 

and transporting empty containers. Moulded of durable 100% recyclable polypropylene, 

these collapsible industrial containers also eliminates one-way corrugation waste and disposal 

costs. Colour: Grey. 

STANDARD 

COLLAPSIBLE CONTAINERS 

Model Outside Dim. Cap. Gross Return Wt. 

No. L" x W" x H" cu. ft. Wt. lbs. Ratio lbs. 

CB459 15.5 x 11.0 x 7.0 0.51 45 3:1 3.0 

CB458 21.9 x 15.5 x 7.5 1.00 45 3:1 5.8 

CB457 21.9 x 15.5 x 11.0 1.63 45 4.5:1 6.9 

CB456 21.9 x 15.5 x 14.5 2.19 45 4.5:1 8.5 

Medium Duty solid wall collapsible containers offer significant advantages over conventional 

stack & nest and stack-only containers. Designed to fit 40" x 48" pallets. 

Model No. Cap. Outside Dimensions Wt. 

Grey Blue Description cu. ft. L" x W" x H" lbs. 

CB466 CB465 Standard Container 2.20 23 1/2 x 15 3/4 x 12 1/2 5.8 

SNAP BOX 

COLLAPSIBLE TOTE BOX 

Quick, easy set-up and collapsibility makes the Snap Box folding container the most 

versatile and convenient tote box available. 

Each box folds from a set-up height of over 11", to a knocked-down height of only 2 1/2". 

Stackable up to 5 units high. Fits 43" x 48" pallets. 

Model No. Oustide Dimensions Volume Gross Return Wt. 

Grey Blue lo" x la" x h" cu. ft. wt. lbs. ratio lbs. 

CB462 CB461 20.8 x 14.0 x 11.0 1.47 40 5:1 3.8


FOOD HANDLING CONTAINERS 

Airflow Trays 

Orbis' variety of durable, returnable and reusable containers, trays and 

totes are designed for many food handling and processing applications. 

All containers are injection moulded from FDA approved plastics. 

FDA 

USDA 

Model No. 

CA631 

Model No. 

CA632 

FOOD 

APPROVED 

PLASTICS 

AIRFLOW TRAYS 

Chilling and distribution trays stack with bails and nest when open. Air flow design maximizes 

ventilation and minimizes freezing and cooling time in food processing: efficiently 

chills and cools packaged poultry, red meat, produce and seafood. Standard features include 

bails and moulded-in handgrips. Injection moulded from high-density polyethylene (FDA 

approved materials, USDA approved for packaged goods). Standard colour: Beige. 

Agricultural Containers 

Distribution Totes 

Model No. 

CA633/CA636 

Model No. 

CC125 

DISTRIBUTION TOTES 

Distribution totes provide durable, long service life in wholesale and grocery products distribution: 

poultry, meat, sea food, food processing, health and beauty aids. USDA and FDA 

approved. They stack with covers, nest when empty. Standard colour: Beige. 

AGRICULTURAL CONTAINERS 

For use in wholesale product distribution: field harvest, in-plant handling, storage and processing 

of fruits and vegetables. These easy-to-clean containers withstand exposure to 

sunlight and hydro-cooling. Injection moulded of FDA approved high density U.V. stabilized 

polyolefin. Secure stacking when full, space-efficient nesting when empty. Standard colours: 

Sun Orange and Sun Yellow. 

Model Top Outside Dimensions Vol. Wt. 

No. Colours L" x W" x H" cu. ft. lbs. 

AIRFLOW TRAYS 

CA631 Beige 24.0 x 20.3 x 6.8 1.4 4.6 

CA632 Beige 24.0 x 20.3 x 12.8 2.7 6.5 

DISTRIBUTION TOTES 

CA636 Beige 24.0 x 16.0 x 10.7 1.9 4.7 

CA633 Beige Cover 2.2 

AGRICULTURAL CONTAINERS 

CC125 Sun Yellow 23.9 x 16.0 x 7.3 1.0 3.0 


547


548 


FOOD & LIQUID CONTAINERS 

TRIMELD ® INGREDIENT 

BINS 

Rubbermaid's Trimeld ® process combines structural 

foam with a surface of non-corrosive polypropylene for 

strength. Seamless construction makes them easy to 

clean and bacteria free. Transparent lids keep contents 

visible. Lids flip up or slide. Colour is white. All casters 

are 3", 2 swivel and 2 rigid. 

Model Dimensions 

No. Capacity D" x W" x H" 

CA616 2.8 cu. ft/21 gal. 29 1/4 x 13 1/8 x 28 

CA617 3.5 cu. ft/26 gal. 29 1/2 x 15 1/2 x 28 

CA618 4.1 cu. ft/31 gal. 29 3/4 x 18 x 28 

CC425 3.8 cu. ft/28 gal. 22 x 23 x 23 

ROUND STORAGE CONTAINERS 

Containers provide efficient, effective food storage. Large ergonomic pull-tab 

lids makes for easy opening. Double seal lids help minimize leaking, spoilage and spills. 

Dishwasher safe durable plastic construction. Features ergonomic, easy-grip handles for 

comfort and control. Containers are available in clear or white. All containers come with 

bright yellow lids. 

Model No. Wt. 

White Clear Description Capacity lbs. 

CB583 CB584 Round Storage Containers 2qt/1.89L .35 




CB591 CB592 Round Storage Containers 12qt/11.36L 1.25 



CB602 - Round Storage Containers 22qt/20.82L 2.6 

w/Bail 

INDUSTRIAL BEVERAGE COOLERS 

PLASTIC 

Built to withstand the abuse of 

the roughest work area or job site. 

Features include 

• Recessed spigot with large button 

for easy access, 

even with gloves 

• Red and yellow high 

visibility safety colours 

• Replaceable parts 

• 5 Year warranty 

Bracket for cup dispenser is included 

on 3 gallon and up coolers. 

Cup dispensers fit all 3 gallon and up 

coolers. Available in metal or plastic. 

Model No. Description Wt. lbs. 

OZ001 2 Gallon Cooler 4.5 

OZ002 3 Gallon Cooler 6.6 

OC404 5 Gallon Cooler 7.6 

OC405 10 Gallon Cooler 11.6 

OC529 Metal cup dispenser - 4 oz. cone cups 


OC531 Plastic cup dispenser - 4 - 4 1/2 oz. cone cups 

Model No. Description Qty/pkg. 

OD034 4 oz. conical paper cups 200 

CC425 

LIDS 


CB595 Yellow lid, fits CB583, CB584, CB585, CB586 .22 

CB596 Yellow lid, fits CB587, CB588 CB589, CB590 .28 

CB597 Yellow lid, fits all other containers 1 

HEAVY DUTY METAL 

Galvanized steel water coolers 

are insulated with Ultratherm ® 

foam insulation. 

Features include 

• Pressure fit lid with reinforced 

top handle 

• Reinforced seams and bottom 

• Cup dispenser clip available on 

3 gallon and up models 

• Recessed, drip proof spigot 

• Spigot, lid and cup clip are replaceable 

• Corrugated galvanized steel exterior and 

Perm-A-Lined vinyl coated liner 

Cup dispensers fit all 3 gallon and up 

coolers. Available in metal or plastic. 

CA618 


OC406 2 Gallon Heavy Duty Metal 6.9 




OC410 15 Gallon Heavy Duty Metal 22.8 



OC531 Plastic cup dispenser - 4 - 4 1/2 oz. cone cups 

Model No. Description Qty/pkg. 

OD034 4 oz. conical paper cups 200

POLYETHYLENE TANKS 

CYLINDRICAL TANKS 

The practical answer for storage, plating, compounding, pickling, mixing and various other 

applications. Except where stated, cylindrical tanks are self-supporting when filled and the 

natural translucent walls permit visual inspection of contents at all times. A wide selection 

of sizes of tanks and covers are available from stock, from 5 to 2000 imperial gallon capacities. 

An assortment of fittings may be installed to meet the most demanding applications. 

Colour: Natural white. 

TANK COVER 

Model Capacity Inside Tank Wt. Model Wt. 

No. Imp. Gals. Dia. " Depth " lbs. No. lbs. 

CA074 5 11 16 3 CA075 1 

CA027 12 13 27 4 CA028 1 

CA020 15 16 24 6 CA026 1 

CA025 25 16 35 8 CA026 1 

CA021 30 18 33 10 CA022 1 

CA067 30 20 27 1/2 11 CA068 2 

CA036 45 22 1/2 34 18 CA037 3 

CA076 60 22 1/2 45 22 CA077 3 

CA078† 75 24 48 23 CA079 3 

CA126† 90 28 42 30 CA127 5 

CA034† 100 30 42 35 CA035 6 

CA046† 125 30 48 40 CA047 6 

CA038† 150 36 42 45 CA039 8 

CA122† 175 30 71 75 CA123 6 

CA054† 175 36 48 55 CA055 8 

CA048† 240 42 48 65 CA049 11 

CA105† 270 42 54 72 CA106 11 

CA111† 300 48 48 100 CA112 22 

CA124† 400 52 60 160 CA125 26 

CA058† 500 48 84 175 CA059 22 

CA060*† 1000 69 84 375 CA061 36 

CA120*† 2000 78 126 550 CA121 48 

* Wooden support girdle required for extreme applications such as materials with high 

specific gravity or operating temperatures in excess of 100°F (38°C). 

† F.O.B. Lindsay, Ontario 

RECTANGULAR TANKS 

Ideal for storage, mixing and various other uses at constant temperatures up to 150°F or 

170°F intermittent. Rectangular tanks are available from stock in capacities of 6 to 500 

imperial gallons. Covers are available for most sizes. To prevent bulging under continuous 

heavy and liquid load, simple bracing of steel, plywood or lumber is recommended for these 

tanks. Straight sides, external lip unless otherwise stated. Colour: Natural white. 

TANK COVER 

Model Capacity Inside Dim. Wt. Model Wt. 

No. Imp. Gals. L " x W " x D " lbs. No. lbs. 

CA110 6 11 x 11 x 15 6 N/A - 

CA065 15 24 x 15 x 11 10 N/A - 

CA069 15 45 x 22 x 5 18 N/A - 

CA084 20 23 x 19 x 16 11 CA085 3 

CA066 20 23 x 23 x 12 11 N/A - 

CA050 20 24 x 10 x 24 12 N/A - 

CA045** 30 30 x 14 x 24 16 N/A - 

CA063 30 35 x 23 x 10 18 CA064 6 

CA029 45 25 x 25 x 27 21 N/A 4 

CA071* 50 45 x 22 x 15 28 CA072 7 

CA086 60 35 x 23 x 23 28 CA087 6 

CA042† 75 42 x 24 x 24 32 CA043 7 

CA089† 100 37 x 26 x 31 40 CA091 7 

CA051† 140 54 x 30 x 24 70 CA052 11 

CA030† 160 48 x 30 x 30 75 CA031 11 

CA099† 190 60 x 30 x 30 75 N/A - 

CA115† 200 48 x 24 x 48 80 N/A 10 

CA056† 300 72 x 36 x 33 135 CA057 15 

CA032† 500 84 x 42 x 42 190 CA033 26 

* Tapered Sides ** Top dimensions restricted. 

† F.O.B. Lindsay, Ontario 


Cylindrical Tanks 

Rectangular Tanks 

APPROVED 

FOR FOOD & DRUG 

APPLICATIONS 

Covers sold separately 

APPROVED 

FOR FOOD & DRUG 

APPLICATIONS 

FITTINGS 

A large variety of fittings are available for all types and sizes of tanks. These include: 

•Threaded taps •True union ball valves 

•Welded Boss •Removable Adaptors 


549


550 


POLYETHYLENE CONTAINERS 

A. Nesting Type Tote Boxes 

D. Straight Sided Tote Boxes 

G. Tote Tubs 

A to E - TOTE BOXES 

Tough rotationally moulded polyethylene tote boxes are available with a complete range 

of functions and capacities for storing and containing bulk liquid or dry goods. Choose 

from: Nesting type (A & B); Stacking type (C & D); and Cross Stack & Nest type 

(E).Colour: "Natural" white, except Model CB483 Grey. 

F to H - BARRELS, TUBS & PAILS 

Approved for food and drug use, these containers - round or square - offer toughness, 

resistance and long life. F & G are rotationally moulded polyethylene; covers available. 

General purpose polyethylene pails (H) are designed for shipping and storing dry or 

liquid materials. Snap on lids available: Dry seal type or gasket type for liquid handling. 

All pails include galvanized steel handles. 

Model App. Cap. Inside Top Dim. Wt. 

Description No. Cu. ft. L" x W" x D" lbs. 

A Nesting Type CB490 0.8 16 x 11 x 9 4 

A Nesting Type CB489 1.7 22 x 16 x 9 7 

B Nesting Tub CB483 2.3 22.5 x 17.5 x 9.5 6 

C Stacking Type CB482 1.3 24 x 15 x 6 7 

C Stacking Type CB492 2.8 38 x 32 x 4 21 

D Straight Sided CB485 0.8 18 x 15 x 5 5 

D Straight Sided CB484 1.9 20 x 18 x 9 7 

E Stack & Nest CB486 0.7 19 x 12 x 5 4 




B. Akro-Tub Tote Boxes C. Stacking Type Tote Boxes 

E. Stack & Nest Tote Boxes F. Tote Barrels 

H. Industrial Pails 

Model Cap. Inside Dia. Wt. 

Description No. Gal. Top" x Bottom" x Height" lbs. 

F Round Tote Barrel CA094 10 15 3/4 x 12 3/4 x 18 4 

F Round Tote Barrel CA081 15 17 x 13 1/2 x 24 7 

F Round Tote Barrel CA107 35 22 1/2 x 19 x 29 1/2 12 

F Round Tote Barrel CA117 45 25 1/2 x 20 x 31 3/4 15 

G Round Tote Tub CA040 3 11 1/4 x 9 1/4 x 11 2 

G Round Tote Tub CA023 5 12 3/4 x 11 x 14 3 

G Square Tote Tub CA080 15 15 3/4 x 15 3/4 x 20 5 


Description No. Dia" x H" lbs. 

H 4 L pail w/plastic handle CB040 8 1/4 x 6 0.5 

H Lid for pails 4, 5, 6 L w/static joint CB039 8 1/2 x 1/2 0.2 

H 11.4 L pail w/metal handle CB043 11 x 9 1.1 

H Lid for pails 11.4 L w/o static joint CB041 11 3/8 x 5/8 0.3 

H 20 L pail w/metal handle CB046 11 7/8 x 15 3/8 2.0 

H Lid for 20 L pail w/o static joint CB044 12 1/2 x 5/8 0.4 

H Heavy duty lid for 20 & 23 L pails CB045 12 1/8 x 3/4 0.6 

w/pouring spout

PARTS CABINETS 

MODULAR PARTS CABINETS 

Organize and control small parts inventory. Standard cabinets come with light grey polystyrene drawers that are virtually indestructible. 

Transparent windows on drawer fronts enable user to see inside; label holder on drawer pull allows for instant 

identification. Comes with two removable dividers per drawer. Stackable steel cabinet frames measure 17" W x 11" H x 11" D 

and are finished in grey baked enamel. Model No. CA850 and Model CA851 feature all transparent styrene drawers; includes 

one divider per drawer. Cabinet frames measure 18" W x 9 1/2" H x 6" D. 

Model No. CA853 Model No. CA854 Model No. CA856 


POLYPROPYLENE UTILITY BOXES 

Protect small components, fittings, electronic parts and hardware in these convenient utility 

boxes. Removable dividers permit a variety of compartment configurations within each box. 

Choose from three sizes of clarified polypropylene boxes with hinged lids. Model CB493 has 

six permanently moulded-in compartments. Model CB494 and CB495 have permanent partitions 

and removable dividers. 

MOBILE REVOLVING 

STORAGE BIN 

This mobile storage bin provides an easy method 

of moving parts or tools anywhere in the shop. 

Four heavy duty structural foam shelves rotate 

independently on a central metal shaft. Shelf diameter 

measures 19 3/4" and has a capacity of 100 

lbs. each. Each shelf is divided into 6 sections by 2" 

high dividers. Distance between shelves is 7 7/8". 

Overall height: 37 1/2". Rolls on four 3" polyolefin 

casters. Colour: Charcoal Grey. Wt. 32 lbs. 



Model No. 

CA850 


Model No. 

CA851 

Model No. of Drawer Sizes Wt. Dividers Replacement Drawers 

No. Drawers W" x H" x D " lbs. Model No. Model No. 

CA853 28 2 3/8 x 2 1/4 x 11 24 CB126 CA859 

CA854 20 3 5/16 x 2 1/4 x 11 21 CB133 CC143 

CA856 16 4 3/16 x 2 1/4 x 11 20 CA878 CA860 

CA857 15 3 3/8 x 3 3/16 x 11 20 CA880 CA863 

CA858 9 5 9/16 x 3 3/16 x 11 18 CA882 CA865 

CA851 36 2 5/8 x 1 1/8 x 5 3/4 12 CA879 CA862 

CA850 18 2 5/8 x 2 1/2 x 5 3/4 10 CA881 CA864 

Model Outside Dimensions 

No. W" x H" x D" Compartments 

CB493 3 x 1 3/16 x 4 5/8 6 equal 

CB494 4 5/8 x 1 3/16 x 8 5/16 6-18 

CB495 6 1/2 x 2 1/4 x 11 5-15 


HEAVY DUTY 

DRAWER CABINETS 

These heavy-duty parts cabinets feature break resistant 

high impact clear plastic "scoop" drawers for easy removal 

of small parts, complete with two adjustable compartment 

dividers. Drawers measure 

2 7/8" W x 1 7/8" H x 5 1/2" D each. Welded steel cabinets 

are finished in blue baked enamel. 


ROTARY PARTS 

CABINET 

Ideal for the space saving storage of hardware, 

tools, parts and accessories. Clear 

styrene drawers allow for easy identification 

of contents. 172 drawers: 160 - 2" W x 1 3/8" 

H x 5 5/16" D, 8 - 5 5/16" W x 2 1/4" H x 5 

5/16" D, 4 - 11" W x 2 1/4" H x 5 5/16" D. Fully 

welded steel frame construction, electro-static 

powder paint finish does not scratch or chip. 

Ball bearing rotating base comes with 

adjustable feet for uneven surfaces. Clip-on 

holders allow tools to hang on sides of 

cabinet. Overall dimensions: 23" H x 18" W x 

18" D. 

Cabinet colour: Black. Wt. 55 lbs. 

Note: tools not included. 



Model No. of Cabinet Sizes Wt. 

No. Drawers W" x H" x D" lbs. 

CA899 64 25 1/2 x 21 3/4 x 6 1/2 34 

CA898 20 16 1/2 x 11 1/4 x 6 1/2 12 



551


552 


PARTS CABINETS 

CAROUSEL DRAWER CABINETS 

Designed to utilize open and often unused areas such as corners, these rotary carousel units provide convenience for small 

parts storage. All-welded cabinets feature clear drawers, dividers, and I.D. labels. Blue enamel finish. Turntable model CA912 

may be set up with up to 3 levels of 4 cabinets per level. 

Model Drawer Sizes Wt. 


CA870 60 2 x 1 3/8 x 5 5/16 10.7 

CA869 48 2 1/2 x 1 3/8 x 5 5/16 10.7 

CA868 30 24 - 2 1/2 x 1 3/8 x 5 5/16 10.7 

4 - 5 5/16 x 2 1/4 x 5 5/16 

2 - 11 x 2 1/4 x 5 5/16 

CA867 16 5 5/16 x 2 1/4 x 5 5/16 10.3 

CA912 - (3 Tier Turntable Unit Only) 40.0 


16 Drawer Cabinet 

PLASTIC 

ASSORTMENT BOX 



• 8 flexible compartments 

• 11" W x 2 1/2" H x 5 5/16" D 

• Capacity of 5 lbs. 

• Weight 0.51 lbs. 

• Also available in Black, Red and Yellow - 

(must order a minimum quantity of 2000 pcs.) 




CA840 



69" 

47" 

25" 

ADD-A-DRAWER ® 

These grey plastic drawer modules with clear windows simply slide and lock 

onto each other. They can be stacked both horizontally and vertically. This allows 

you to create a customized drawer cabinet to meet your storage requirements. 

Add on one or more units as more storage capacity is required. Dividers and 

labels included. 

3" 

CA842 

Model No. CA912 Turntable 

shown c/w 12 no. CA869 cabinets 

CA841 

Model Unit size Wt. 


CA840 2 5 x 2 x 5 0.88 

CA841 1 2 1/2 x 2 x 5 0.20 

CA842 1 4 1/2 x 2 1/2 x 10 1.00


STEEL DRAWER CABINETS & TRUCKS 

A. 48, 72 and 96 Drawer 

Cabinets, Base included 

A - E. DURHAM INDUSTRIAL 

DRAWER CABINETS 

Durham Industrial Drawer Cabinets provide a rugged modular storage system for small 

parts. Select from a range of drawer capacities from 9 drawers to 96 drawers per cabinet. 

Various drawer sizes are available including drawer heights of 2", 

2 3/4" and 3 1/2", and drawer depths of 11 1/8" and 17". Each drawer includes 

2 adjustable dividers and full width handles for easy opening. 

Drawer sides are slotted to hold dividers. Two dividers are provided with each drawer and a 

special snap-in feature keeps them in place, yet they are easy to remove. Colour: Grey. 

KLETON ® 

DRAWER TRUCKS 

KLETON Drawer Trucks allow small repair or assembly 

parts to be transported directly to your work site, while 

providing a work surface (tray type), and a lower shelf for 

added storage capacity. Runs on two rigid and two swivel 

5" rubber casters. Drawers are made of prime cold rolled 

steel, and feature adjustable dividers and full-width pull 

handles. Four standard models are available, including 18, 

24, 36 and 48 drawer capacities. Overall dimensions are 

18" W x 36" L x 35" H. 

® 

Model No. of Drawer Size Wt. 


MA245 18 5 1/4 x 17 x 2 3/4 134 

MA246 24 5 1/4 x 17 x 2 145 

MA247 36 5 1/4 x 17 x 2 3/4 195 

MA248 48 5 1/4 x 17 x 2 220 

96 Drawer 

72 Drawer 

48 Drawer 

B. 18 Drawer Cabinets 

C. 24 Drawer Cabinets 

Drawer 

Trucks 

Model No. 

MA245 

Model No. 

MA247 

D. 9 Drawer Cabinets 

E. 30 Drawer Cabinets 

Model No. of Drawer Size Cabinet Wt. 

Type No. Drawers W" x H" x D" Height" lbs. 

A CA936 48 5 1/4 x 2 3/4 x 11 1/8 43 176 

A CA939 72 5 1/4 x 2 3/4 x 11 1/8 54 238 

A CA941 96 5 1/4 x 2 3/4 x 11 1/8 65 300 

B CA924 18 5 1/4 x 2 3/4 x 11 1/8 10 7/8 50 

B CA925 18 5 1/4 x 3 1/2 x 11 1/8 12 3/4 87 

B CA926 18 5 1/4 x 3 1/2 x 17 12 3/4 75 

C CA930 24 5 1/4 x 2 3/4 x 11 1/8 14 1/4 60 

C CA932 24 5 1/4 x 3 1/2 x 17 16 7/8 96 

D CA942 9 5 1/4 x 2 3/4 x 11 1/8 10 7/8 28 

E CA934 30 5 1/4 x 3 1/2 x 11 1/8 21 1/8 87 

E CA935 30 5 1/4 x 3 1/2 x 17 21 1/8 118 

— CA945 Extra Divider for 2" H. Drawer 0.1 

— CA946 Extra Divider for 2 3/4" H. Drawer 0.1 

— CA947 Extra Divider for 3 1/2" H. Drawer 0.1 

Model No. 

MA246 

Model No. 

MA248 


553


554 


PARTS CASES - STEEL 

Sliding drawer parts cabinets provide a convenient parts storage system 

with the flexibility of removable drawers, and a large assortment 

of drawer configurations. Drawers are housed in a "sliding" drawer 

SLIDING DRAWER CABINETS 

These cabinets feature sliding drawer carriages that extend 100% of the drawers’ depth for 

easy access to parts. Cabinets are available for both the small and large drawer sizes. 

Drawers are sold separately. Standard colour: Grey. 

Model For Drawer Wt. 

No. Drawer: Capacity lbs. 

CA963 Large 2 20 

CA965 Large 4 34 

CA972 Small 4 22 

CA975 Small 6 32 


Drawer Cabinet 

Drawers sold 

separately 

CABINET BASES 

Cabinet bases raise your cabinet/drawer combination 

12" off of the floor or work bench for 

easier access to drawers. Models are available 

to adapt to both small and large drawer 

size cabinets. 

Standard colour: Grey. 

Model For Wt. 

No. Drawer: lbs. 

CA980 Large 13 

CA983 Small 12 

Fixed drawer configurations, order by number of compartments 

cabinet, and may be mounted on a raised base. Small 13 1/4" x 9 1/4" 

x 2" and large 18" x 12" x 3" drawers are available. 


Drawer 

STEEL SCOOP DRAWERS 

These fixed compartment drawers allow you to store and remove your small parts easily. 

Choose from between 8 and 32 compartment fixed drawers in either the small 13 1/4" x 9 

1/4" x 2" or large 18" x 12" x 3" drawer size. Manufactured of prime cold rolled steel and finished 

in rust and acid resistant baked enamel, drawers have inserts of high impact plastic. 

These inserts have rounded scoops, making it easy to remove small parts. All models have 

covers designed to stay open for easy access, making it simple to read the cover labels. 

Durham Storage Drawers also have handles and a catch. Standard colour: Grey. 

See Chart below for drawer configurations. 

8 12 16 20 21 24 32 

Large Drawers 18" x 12" x 3" Small Drawers 13 1/4" x 9 1/4" x 2" 

ADJUSTABLE 

DRAWERS 

Adjustable drawers provide the added flexibility 

of arranging your drawers according 

to your changing needs. Removable 

dividers can be “slotted” into place, or 

removed altogether. 

Standard colour: Grey. 

Model Drawer Wt. 

No. Size lbs. 

CA977 Large 8 

CA979 Small 4 

Number of Model Wt. Model Wt. 

Compartments No. lbs. No. lbs. 

8 - - CB032 4 

12 CA986 8 CB015 4 

16 CA989 8 CB017 4 

20 CA992 8 CB023 4 

21 CA995 8 CB026 4 

24 CA997 8 CB029 4 

32 CB002 8 - -

Model CB496 

Wt. 3.5 lbs. 

24 compartments 

F 

A 

E 

D 

C 

B 

E 

A 

D 

C 

B 


PLASTIC COMPARTMENT CASES 

COMPACT POLYPROPYLENE 

COMPARTMENT CASES 

Seven different configurations to choose from allow a wide 

selection of compartment sizes and shapes to fit just about 

every need. Manufactured of high strength, oil resistant 

polypropylene, boxes are furnished with covers fitted with 

heavy duty reinforced hinges. The hinges have a special "stop" 

feature which allows the cover to remain in the open position. 

Covers are designed to overlap on all sides of the bottom tray, 

fitting snugly against a shelf-like ridge. This results in extra 

protection against dirt, dust and moisture. Two snap latches 

assure secure closure. Both transparent and opaque yellow 

models will not cloud up or fade over time. Durham Plastic 

Compartment Boxes are stackable. 

A: 18 1/2" 

B: 13" 

C: 3" 

D: 3" 

E: 4" 

F: 2 7/8" 

Model CB497 

Wt. 3.5 lbs. 

For 8 to 

32 compartments 

24 partitions 

provided 

A: 18 1/2" 

B: 13" 

C: 3" 

D: 2 15/16" 

E: 2 1/8" 

CB513/ 

CB514 

CB501/ 

CB502 

CB509/ 

CB510 

Model No. Overall Dimensions No. of Compartment Dimensions Wt. 

Clear Yellow W" x H" x D" Compartments W" x H" x D" lbs. 

CB513 CB514 11 x 1 3/4 x 6 3/4 6 1 3/4 x 1 9/16 x 6 1/4 0.7 

CB509 CB510 11 x 1 3/4 x 6 3/4 12 1 3/4 x 1 9/16 x 3 1/8 0.7 

CB511 CB512 11 x 1 3/4 x 6 3/4 18 1 3/4 x 1 9/16 x 2 1/16 0.7 

CB507 CB508 13 1/8 x 2 5/16 x 9 6 2 x 2 x 8 1/2 0.8 

CB501 CB502 13 1/8 x 2 5/16 x 9 12 2 x 2 x 4 3/32 0.8 

CB503 CB504 13 1/8 x 2 5/16 x 9 18 2 x 2 x (6) 4 3/4(12) 2 0.8 

CB505 CB506 13 1/8 x 2 5/16 x 9 24 2 x 2 x 2 0.8 

K-RESIN TRANSPARENT 

COMPARTMENT BOXES 

Heavy duty boxes ideal for storing and/or displaying electronic parts, lab supplies, office 

supplies, parts and small tools. Hinged lid overlaps for secure fit. Overall dimensions include 

hinge and lid overlap. Individually packed in chipboard sleeves. 

Model No. of Overall Dimensions Compart. Dimensions 

No. Compartments L" x W" x D" L" x W" x D" 

CB707 36 7 x 10 x 1 13/16 1 x 1 1/2 x 1 1/2 

CB708 6 4 1/2 x 8 1/4 x 1 3/8 4 x 1 1/4 x 1 1/8 

CB709 1 4 1/2 x 8 1/4 x 1 3/8 4 x 7 7/8 x 1 1/8 

CB710 12 4 1/2 x 8 1/4 x 1 3/8 2 x 1 1/4 x 1 1/8 

CB711 6 3 x 4 5/8 x 1 1/8 1 1/4 x 1 3/8 x 7/8 

CB712 1 3 x 4 5/8 x 1 1/8 2 1/2 x 4 3/8 x 7/8 

CB713 18 6 3/4 x 11 x 1 3/4 1 7/8 x 1 5/8 x 1 1/2 

CB714 12 9 x 13 1/8 x 2 5/16 4 1/8 x 2 x 2 

CB715 24 9 x 13 1/8 x 2 5/16 2 x 2 x 2 

LARGE CASES - 18 1/2" L x 13" W 

Large "Super Satchels" organize tool cribs, maintenance departments, shop floors and allow 

complete portability. Two draw-tight latches, a luggage style handle and their lighter weight 

(3.5 lbs. vs. 8 lbs. in metal), makes "Super Satchel" cases 100% portable. 


• See-through lids allow quick identification of contents 

• Copolymer resins will not rust which means no corrosion 

carryover onto box contents 

• Brass pinned hinges for optimum strength and durability 

• Identification card holder for quick case selection 

• Moulded integral feet allow these containers to stand upright 

making ideal presentation cases 

CB503/ 

CB504 

CB511/ 

CB512 

SMALL CASES - 15" L x 11 3/4" W 

Small "Satchel" style cases offer solutions for a wide range of needs. Ideally sized to store and 

organize large, medium, small and flat parts. They are very adaptable with their removable 

partitions. Content identification is immediate with their high-impact transparent lids. Storing 

them flat or upright on their integral feet allows plenty of options for developing custom storage 

systems or presentation cases. Moulded from copolymer resins that will not rust or dent. 

With two draw-tight latches, a luggage style handle and brass pinned hinges, they are truly 

portable cases. Variations available include the open interior style (#CB498), the divided style 

(#CB499) which may be divided into 9 to 24 compartments, and the double case style 

(#CB500) with two cases sonically welded back to back. 

A: 15" 

B: 11 3/4" 

C: 2 1/2" 

CB505/ 

CB506 

CB707 CB708 CB709/CB712 CB710/CB714 


Wt. 2.2 lbs. 

B 

C 

CB507/ 

CB508 

CB711 CB713 CB715 


Wt. 2.9 lbs. 


Wt. 5.8 lbs. 

A A: 15" 

B: 2" 

C: 3 1/8" 

D: 2 1/8" 

D 

E 

F 

C B 

A A: 15" 

B: 2" 

C: 3 1/8" 

D: 2 1/8" 

A 

C B 

D 

E 

F 

E: 2" 

E: 2" 

F: 11 3/4" 

G: 2 1/2" 

G 

F: 11 3/4" 

G: 5" 

G 


555


556 


JUMBO DRAWER CABINETS 

Practical, Efficient and 

Economical 

The KLETON drawer cabinets combine all three 

characteristics to provide the best value available in 

an industrial grade parts storage system. Four 

different jumbo-sized transparent plastic drawers 

allow you to store larger tools or materials close at 

hand. Drawers are housed in an all-welded steel 

cabinet measuring over 3 feet high. Each drawer 

features an I.D. card with a clear plastic shield. Steel 

tabs prevent drawers from spilling their contents 

when pulled out. Cabinets are finished in grey 

enamel. Drawer dividers included. 

Model No. CA889 Model No. CA892 


Model No. of Drawer Size Cabinet Size Wt. 

No. Drawers D" x W" x H" D" x W" x H" lbs. 

CA889 30 9.6 x 5.6 x 3.3 10.4 x 21.3 x 37 10.9 

CA892 48 8.6 x 4.7 x 2.8 8.7 x 22.6 x 37 12.7 

CA890 60 9.6 x 5.6 x 1.6 10.4 x 21.3 x 37 12.0 

CA894 60 7.1 x 3.5 x 2.8 8.7 x 22.6 x 37 13.5 


® 


WORKBENCH CABINETS 

Ideal for storing parts etc . . . right on your workbench, these two Kleton jumbo drawer cabinets 

provide the high drawer load capacities of full sized jumbo cabinets. Available with 24 drawers 

8.6" D x 4.7" W x 2.8" H each or with 32 drawers 7.1" D x 3.5" W x 2.8" H each. All-welded steel 

cabinets are finished in grey enamel. Drawer dividers included. 

Model No. of Cabinet Size Wt. 

No. Drawers D" x W" x H" lbs. 

CA891 24 8.7 x 17.3 x 25.6 5.9 

CA893 32 8.7 x 18.0 x 25.6 6.6

STACKBIN CONTAINERS 

A. Steel Stackbins 

& Stackracks 

A. STEEL STACKBINS & STACKRACKS 

B. PLASTIC STACKBINS 

Available in two types and sizes of plastic. The CB314 is moulded of polyethylene, and has a capacity 

of 1600 cubic inches. The CB310 is moulded of polypropylene and has a capacity of 200 cubic 

inches. The exclusive interlocking front bar prevents the bins from spreading under heavy loads. 

C. STEEL STACKBOXES 

Rugged steel Stackboxes can be readily interstacked with corresponding sized Stackbins, or on 

Stackracks. Stackboxes have drop handles for easy handling, as well as card holders for rapid identification 

of contents. Standard blue baked enamel finish. 


No. W" x L" x H" lbs. 

CA813 7 1/2 x 13 x 6 5.5 

CA814 9 x 15 3/4 x 7 1/2 9.0 

CA817 10 x 20 x 8 12.0 

CA815 12 x 16 1/2 x 9 1/2 i12.5 

CA816 15 x 19 1/4 x 11 20.0 

CB695 18 x 24 x 12 25.0 


Hopper-front steel Stackbins are available with capacities from 70 cubic inches up to 5100 cubic inches. They may be easily stacked one on top of another, or housed in steel Stackracks, allowing lower units 

to be removed without disturbing units stacked above them. Stackbin covers, dividers, and Stackrack bases (shown) are available. Standard blue baked enamel finish. 

STACKBINS Cap. Dimensions Wt. STACKRACKS Wt. STACKRACK BASES Wt. 

Model No. Cubic ins. W" x L" x H" lbs. Model No. lbs. Model No. lbs. 

CA765 70 4 1/2 x 8 x 4 1/2 1.8 N/A N/A - 

CA766 200 5 1/2 x 12 x 4 1/2 3.0 CA773 4.0 N/A - 

CA767 500 7 1/2 x 15 1/2 x 6 5.5 CA774 5.5 N/A - 

CA768 900 9 x 18 3/4 x 7 1/2 9.0 CA775 8.5 CA687 15.0 

CA772 1400 10 x 24 x 8 12.0 CA780 9.0 CA702 18.0 

CA769 1600 12 x 20 1/2 x 9 1/2 12.5 CA776 10.0 CA692 16.0 

CA770 2800 15 x 24 x 11 20.5 CA778 12.0 CA696 18.0 

CA771 5100 18 x 30 x 12 30.0 CA779 14.0 CA699 20.0 

Model No. Dimensions Wt. 

Blue Grey Red Yellow W" x L" x H" lbs. 

CB310 CB311 CB312 CB313 5 1/2 x 12 x 4 1/2 0.8 

CB314 CB315 CB316 CB317 12 x 20 1/2 x 9 1/2 4.0 

SECTIONAL STACKBINS 

E. Sectional Stackbin units are an economical alternative 

to standard Stackbins, as individual compartments 

are created from a standard 37" wide unit divided by 

welded steel partitions. Each unit may be stacked on a 

larger, or similar sized unit, with covers, bases, and filler 

strips available to complete the unit (as shown). 

F. Sectional Stackshelves are similar, but with a full 

Model Dimensions Bins in Wt. 

No. W" x L" x H" Section lbs. 

E. Sectional Stackbins 

CA786** 37 x 8 x 4 1/2 8 11.0 

CA787** 37 x 12 x 4 1/2 6 13.8 

CA788 37 x 15 1/2 x 6 5 20.0 

CA789 37 x 18 3/4 x 7 1/2 4 29.0 

CA790 37 x 20 1/2 x 9 1/2 3 35.0 

CA791 37 x 24 x 11 2 40.0 

F. Sectional Stackshelves 

CA759 37 x 15 1/2 x 7 1/2 25.0 

CA760 37 x 16 1/4 x 9 1/2 28.0 

CA761 37 x 19 x 11 34.0 

G. Sectional Trucks (Bins not included) 

CA809 fits CA789, CA759 39.0 

CA810 fits CA790, CA760 39.0 

CA811 fits CA791, CA761 39.0 

open front for bulk storage. They may be interstacked 

with sectional Stackbins. 

G. Trucks are available to mobilize your sectional stackbin 

units. Standard blue baked enamel finish for all 

components. 

Model 

No. Description 

H. Sectional Bases 

CA793 Base for CA788 




I. Sectional Covers 

CA797 Cover for CA786 






** No bases available 

F. 

G. 

B. Plastic 

Stackbins 

C. Steel Stackboxes 

D. STACKBIN COVERS & DIVIDERS 

Keep dust, dirt and moisture out of your Stackbins. Covers are available for the hopper-front and 

for the top. Hopper-front cover swings up and can be removed if operations require. The cover for 

the top fits Stackboxes as well. 

Model No. Description 

HOPPER FRONT COVERS 

CA735 Cover for CA768 Stackbin 





BIN TOP AND STACKBOX COVERS 

CA706 Cover for CA768 Stackbin and CA814 Stackbox 



CA709 Cover for CA771 Stackbin and CB695 Stackbox 


SPACE SAVING DIVIDERS 

CA711 Divider for CA768 Stackbin 



CC104 Divider for CA771 Stackbin 


D. Covers 

D. Space Saving Dividers 

E. Sectional Stackbins 


557


558 


TIP-OUT TM BINS & BASKETS 

HAND-HELD 

SHOPPING BASKETS & STANDS 

These versatile baskets come in a choice of nickel chrome finish or plastic. They are lightweight 

and convenient. Plastic baskets come in four colours: red, blue, yellow and orange. Stands are 

available for nickel chrome baskets (CC257) and plastic 

baskets (CC262). Both stands hold 25 baskets and have a nickel chrome finish. 


No. Description L" x W" x H" lbs. 

NICKEL CHROME FINISH 

CC256 Basket w/nickel chrome finish 20 x 14 x 7 3/4 2.5 

CC257 Stand for CC257 w/sign holder 14 3/8 x 16 1/4 x 42 12 

PLASTIC 

CC258 Red plastic basket 12 3/4 x 15 1/2 x 8 3/4 1.5 

CC259 Blue plastic basket 12 3/4 x 15 1/2 x 8 3/4 1.5 

CC260 Yellow plastic basket 12 3/4 x 15 1/2 x 8 3/4 1.5 

CC261 Orange plastic basket 12 3/4 x 15 1/2 x 8 3/4 1.5 

CC262 Stand for CC258-CC261, holds 25 16 1/2 x 11 3/4 x 28 1/4 2.5 

TIP-OUT TM BIN MODULAR STORAGE SYSTEM 

1 bin 

2 bins 

3 bins 

4 bins 

5 bins 

6 bins 

9 bins 

Each bin has a slot for labeling and can be completely removed for replenishing or cleaning. 

Modular cabinet design features uniform widths of 23.6" (for units of 2 to 9 bins); choice of 

bin sizes accommodates different sized parts or components. Can be used free-standing or 

with stands and pedestals. 

Colour: beige or grey. 

TILT BINS 

Model No. Bin Dimensions Cabinet Dimensions Wt. 

Beige Grey Bins H" x W" x D" H" x W" x D" lbs. 

CB552 CB553 9 2 1/2 x 2 3/16 x 1 3/4 3 1/8 x 23 5/8 x 2 1/2 2.0 

CB549 CB550 6 3 3/4 x 3 1/2 x 2 5/8 4 1/2 x 23 5/8 x 3 5/8 3.0 

CB546 CB547 5 5 3/4 x 4 1/4 x 3 3/4 6 1/2 x 23 5/8 x 5 1/4 5.0 

CB543 CB544 4 7 1/2 x 5 5/8 x 5 8 1/8 x 23 5/8 x 6 5/8 7.0 

CB540 CB541 3 8 5/8 x 7 3/8 x 5 7/8 9 1/2 x 23 5/8 x 7 3/4 9.0 

CB977 CB978 2 13 5/8 x 11 1/16 x 8 7/8 13 7/8 x 23 5/8 x 11 7/8 14 

CB975 CB976 1 13 5/8 x 11 1/16 x 8 7/8 13 7/8 x 11 13/16 x 11 7/8 7 

CB573 Disc & screw set (2 needed for each bin case) 

CC256 CC257 

CC258 

Mobile 

Floor Stand 

CC262 

Transparent compartments tip out for 

easy access and viewing. Designed to 

provide efficient and orderly storage 

of parts and assembly components. 

Wall 

Frames 

TILT BIN STANDS 


No. Description W" x H" x D" lbs. 

CC107 48" Two Sided Floor Stand/Wall Frame 24 x 48 x 8 44 

CC108 72" Two Sided Floor Stand/Wall Frame 24 x 72 x 8 58 

CC109 48" Two Sided Mobile Floor Stand 24 x 48 x 18 69 

CC110 72" Two Sided Mobile Floor Stand 24 x 72 x 18 81 

CC101 48" One Sided Floor Stand/Wall Frame 24 x 48 x 4 16 

CC102 72" One Sided Floor Stand/Wall Frame 24 x 72 x 4 22 

CC100 24" Workstation Stand 24 x 24 x 4 29 

CC103 Base only 24" W w/4 swivel casters w/brakes - -

STEEL STORAGE BINS 

Pigeonhole type steel storage bin units organize small 

parts, making them easily accessible. 

These cabinets are best suited where space 

is limited and organization is crucial. 

They are produced of prime cold rolled steel and will not warp, twist or sag. Fully 

hemmed label holders provide adequate space for content 

identification. 

Each divider is hemmed in a tear drop design to avoid sharp edges, 

and vertical ribs provide added strength. Doors with padlock attachment and 

bases to raise units are available for use with most models. 

All units are 33 3/4" wide, and some are available in depths of 12" and 9". Units 

are fully welded and finished in grey baked enamel. 







12" Deep Storage Bins 9" Deep Storage Bins 

Model Model Model Model Model Model Model Model Model Model 

CA133 CA134 CA136 CA149 CA151 CA152 CA154 CA150 CA153 CA155 

Width 33 3/4" 33 3/4" 33 3/4" 33 3/4" 33 3/4" 33 3/4" 33 3/4" 33 3/4" 33 3/4" 33 3/4" 

Height 11 1/2" 19 1/4" 23 7/8" 23 7/8" 42" 42" 42" 22 1/4" 42" 42" 

Depth 12" 12" 12" 12" 12" 12" 12" 8 1/2" 8 1/2" 8 1/2" 

No. of Bins 16 18 24 40 42 56 72 40 56 72 

Bin Depth 11 7/8" 11 7/8" 11 7/8" 11 7/8" 11 7/8" 11 7/8" 11 7/8" 8 7/8" 8 7/8" 8 3/8" 

Bin Height 5 1/6" 6 3/8" 5 7/16" 4 1/2" 4 7/16" 5 1/16" 4 1/2" 4" 4 5/8" 4 1/2" 

Bin Width 4" 5 1/4" 5 3/8" 4" 5 3/8" 4 13/16" 4" 4" 4 7/8" 4" 

Door Model No. - - CA142 CA142 CA141 CA141 CA141 CA148 CA141 CA141 

Base Model No. CA157 CA157 CA157 CA157 CA157 CA157 CA157 CA158 CA158 CA158 

Weight lbs. 25 38 44 50 71 75 80 50 60 85 


559


560 


REVOLVING SHELF STORAGE UNITS 

ROTABIN STORAGE UNITS 

28" DIAMETER 

28" diameter Rotabin units feature 

6 permanent 14 1/2" wide 

compartments per shelf. Model 

CA221 dividers can be inserted on 

1" centres. 500 lbs. shelf capacity. 

Pan units include 12 

removable 2" deep plastic pans 

(Model CA269, c/w 1 divider 

each) per shelf, stacked 2 high. 

Pans available in Red, Yellow, or 

Blue. 

Model No. 

CA203 

Model No. of No. of Unit Wt. 

No. Shelves Pans Height" lbs. 

CA193 5 0 38 125 

CA194 6 0 41 144 

CA195 7 0 47 163 

CA196 8 0 53 182 

CA197 9 0 60 201 

CA198 10 0 66 220 


CA206 CA207 CA208 5 60 38 157 

CA209 CA210 CA211 6 72 41 183 

CA212 CA213 CA214 7 84 47 208 

CA215 CA216 CA217 8 96 53 234 

CA218 CA219 CA220 9 108 60 259 

CA203 CA204 CA205 10 120 66 284 

CA269 CA270 CA271 Plastic pan for 28" Rotabin 0.7 

CA221 Divider for 28" Rotabin0.2 

17" DIAMETER ROTABIN 

Available in steel or plastic these units can 

be used on counter tops or workbenches. 

Each shelf has 4 permanent compartments. 

Steel models can have up to 16 compartments 

per shelf using the Model CA192 

adjustable dividers. Plastic models can have 

up to 8 compartments per shelf using the 

model CB658 removable dividers. Curved 

bottom facilitates removal of small parts. 

Rotabins are the space-saving answer 

to a wide range of small parts storage 

problems. 

Each Rotabin unit incorporates revolving shelves offering 

greater accessibility and visibility than traditional shelf 

storage systems. The circular, revolving shelves turn dead 

space in corners and aisle ends into useable storage space. 

Each Rotabin shelf sits on a ball bearing that is held in place 

with a solid steel pin. This arrangement allows each shelf to 

rotate smoothly and independently of other shelves in the 

same unit. Rotabin units are available in shelf diameters 

ranging from 17" to 58". Removable small parts pans for 

the 28" and 34" diameter units permit easy removal of parts 

inventories for restocking, transporting to a work area, or 

for weighing. 

34" DIAMETER 

34" diameter Rotabin units feature 

5 permanent 21" wide compartments 

per shelf. Model CA231 

removable dividers can be 

inserted on 1" centres. Ca-pacities 

are 500 lbs. per shelf. Pan units 

include 15 removable 4" deep 

plastic pans (Model CA256) per 

shelf. Pans avail-able in Red, 

Yellow, or Blue. 

Model No. of Unit Wt. Capacity Wt. 

No. Description Shelves Height" per Shelf lbs. lbs 

CA188 17" Steel 4 18 1/2 60 25 

CA189 17" Steel 6 26 1/8 60 34 

CA190 17" Steel 8 34 1/2 60 43 

CA191 17" Steel 10 42 1/8 60 52 

CB659 17" Plastic 4 17 3/8 30 14.6 

CB660 17" Plastic 6 25 3/8 30 17.7 


CA192 Divider for Steel Unit .02 

CB658 Divider for Plastic Unit .01 

Model No. 

CA247 

Model No. of No. of Unit Wt. 

No. Shelves Pans Height" lbs. 

CA225 4 0 35 135 

CA226 5 0 43 162 

CA227 6 0 50 188 

CA228 7 0 66 215 

CA229 8 0 66 240 


CA232 CA235 CA237 4 60 35 195 

CA238 CA239 CA240 5 75 43 237 

CA241 CA242 CA243 6 90 50 278 

CA244 CA245 CA246 7 105 66 320 

CA247 CA248 CA249 8 120 66 360 

CA256 CA259 CA261 Plastic pan for 34" Rotabin 1.0 

CA231 Divider for 34" Rotabin0.2 

TO ORDER: 

ROTABIN SECURITY 

CABINETS 

Sturdy, reinforced steel units provide room for 

parts storage using the standard 

28" diameter Rotabin units. They feature a 

locking door handle to protect parts against 

theft, chemicals, dust and debris. Doors lock at 

three points by a pin tumbler lock in the chrome 

handle. Constructed of 24 gauge steel side and 

back panels with 13 gauge angle posts. An 

additional shelf allows for storage of boxed 

i t e m s . 

28" Rotabin Unit is not included. 

1) Measure available floor space to 

determine Rotabin shelf diameter 

that will not intrude on aisles. 

2) Determine number of Rotabin shelves 

required by matching the unit height 

with the available storage height. 

3) Select the appropriate Rotabin unit: 

for 34"or 28" diameter units, select either 

the standard unit c/w bin fronts, or the 

pan unit c/w removable storage pans. 

44" & 58" DIAMETER 

44" and 58" Rotabin units 

are designed for the 

storage of larger 

quantities of small 

parts or fasteners, or 

heavier parts. Scoop 

compartment design is 

manufactured from 

one piece of heavy 

gauge steel, with dividers 

welded in place. 

44" diameter units 

feature 5 compartments 

per shelf, 

with a 625 lbs. capacity 

each shelf. 58" diameter units feature 10 compartments 

per shelf, with a 2,000 lbs. capacity each shelf. 


APPLICATIONS: 

• Speeds access to production parts or 

sub-assemblies when located on production lines 

• Point of sales storage facility for hardware 

• Storage of bulk quantities of nails, bolts, etc. 

Model Shelf No. of Unit Wt. 

No. Dia." Shelves Height" lbs. 

CA262 44 3 34 154 

CA263 44 4 45 196 

CA264 44 5 56 238 

CA265 44 6 67 284 

CA272 58 4 53 456 

CA273 58 5 66 563 


CB661 Starter Unit, 30" W x 30" D x 61" H 169 

CB662 Add-On Unit, 30" W x 30" D x 61" H 154

SPECIAL STORAGE UNITS 


A. B. C. D. 

E. 

A. THREADED ROD RACK 

Separates and protects threaded rods. Eighteen 2 1/8" diameter openings accommodate different 

rod sizes. 24 1/8" W x 6 7/8" D x 24" H. Colour: Grey. Wt. 16 lbs. Shipped knocked 

down. 


B. KEY STOCK RACK 

Ten compartments hold key stocks up to 3/4" square and approximately 12" long. Keyholes 

permit wall mounting. 12 1/4" W x 6 1/4" L x 12" H. Colour: Grey. Wt. 8 lbs. 


C. MULTI PURPOSE BIN 

Removable vertical dividers allow for the creation of multi-width compartments. Scoop 

shelves allow contents to be removed easily. Ideal for the storage of fasteners, electrical 

connectors, fittings and most other small components. Key-hole slots provided for wall 

mounting. 23 3/4" W x 4 3/4" D x 23 3/4" H. 36 bins 3 7/8" W x 4 5/8" D x 3 3/4" H. Colour: 

Grey. Wt. 25 lbs. 


D. HOSE CLAMP RACK 

This ten-post rack provides easy access to adjustable hose clamps from the smallest miniclamp 

up to the 2 3/4" diameter #36 clamp. For countertop use or may be wall mounted 

using two built-in hanger loops (provided). Sign panel lists clamp diameters. 23 1/4" W x 5 

1/4" D x 16 1/8" H. Colour: Grey. Wt. 5 lbs. 


LIGHT DUTY STORAGE CONTAINERS 

• Adjustable bottom shelf can be set to 4 different heights to maintain a full look 

• Sign holder included 

• Nickel chrome finish 

Model Nominal Size Wt. 

No. W" x D" x H" lbs. 

RD660 13 x 18 x 33 15 

RD661 18 x 18 x 33 18 

RD662 20 x 20 x 33 20 

RD663 24 x 24 x 33 22 

RD664 30 x 30 x 33 26 

RD665 36 x 36 x 33 30 

F. 

E. AEROSOL CABINET 

Divided into four equal compartments to hold up to 72 - 2 3/4" diameter cans. Double doors 

with key lock protect contents. 33 3/4" W x 8 1/2" D x 22 1/4" H. Colour: Grey. Wt. 45 lbs.. 


F. WIRE SPOOL RACKS 

Choice of models with 1, 2 or 4 plated steel rods for the convenient storing and dispensing 

of wire. The four rod rack holds spools up to 10" in diameter. The two rod rack is ideal for 

counter top use, and the single rod rack has a handle for portability. Colour: Grey. Shipped 

knocked down. 

Model No. of Dimensions Wt. 

No. Rods W" x D" x H" lbs. 

KH572 1 26 1/8 x 6 x 10 3/8 9 

KH573 2 26 1/8 x 6 x 17 7/8 11 

CB579 4 26 1/8 x 6 x 37 1/8 25 

G. WELDING ROD CABINET 

Holds welding rods up to 18" long in six compartments. Each compartment is 5 1/4" W 

x 18 3/8" D x 4" H. O.A. Dimensions: 16 1/8" W x 18 1/2" D x 8 1/8" H. Colour: Grey. Wt. 

17 lbs. 


G. 


561


562 


BULK STACKING CONTAINERS 

OPEN MESH CONTAINERS 

This industry standard meets the challenge of your bulk material handling problems. 

Rugged construction ensures long lasting, trouble free service. 3/4" - 13 gauge expanded 

metal mesh panels permit full visibility, excellent ventilation. Comes standard with 2 half 

drop gates. Four way fork truck access with 4 1/4" underclearance. 34 1/2" x 40 1/2" x 32 

1/4" high overall dimensions. Stackable up to 5 high, 3000 lbs./15 cu. ft. capacity. Choice 

of mesh or sheet metal deck. Standard finish: Blue enamel. 

Model Wt. 

No. Style lbs. 

CA397 Mesh deck 105 

CA398 Sheet metal deck 114 

BULK STACK AND NEST CONTAINERS 

This heavy-duty material handling container is designed for bulk storage. Smooth interior 

and exterior is easy to clean. Rotationally moulded from high density polyethylene, USDA 

approved design and FDA approved material. Stackable up to three high with optional cover 

for nonsupporting contents. 

Colours: Natural White or Grey. 

Model No. Outside Top Inside Top Volume Wt. 

White Grey L" x W" x H" L" x W" x H" Cu. ft. lbs. 

CA439 CA438 48.0 x 41.5 x 30.0 43.5 x 37.0 x 25.8 20 75 

CA441 CA440 Optional cover 30 

CORRUGATED STEEL 

CONTAINERS 

Maximize floor space usage and increase productivity with 

these stackable, welded corrugated steel containers. These 

4000 lbs. capacity containers are constructed of 13 gauge 

steel sides for added strength. 4 way fork truck entry with 

4" underclearance. Stackable up to 5 high. Available with 

fully enclosed sides, hopper front and drop gate. Hopper 

front is on 35" side, drop gate on 42" side. Allows for easy 

access to contents. Unpainted. Please inquire for painted. 

Model Cap. Inside Dim.Wt. 

No. Cu. ft. L" x W" lbs. 

FULLY ENCLOSED-18" HEIGHT 

CA387 9.0 30 x 30 110 

CA388 10.5 30 x 35 126 

CA389 12.3 35 x 35 136 

CA390 12.6 30 x 42 140 

CA391 14.5 30 x 48 152 

CA392 14.7 35 x 42 153 

CA393 16.9 35 x 48 171 

CA394 17.7 42 x 42 175 

CA395 20.2 42 x 48 190 

CA396 23.1 48 x 48 206 

FULLY ENCLOSED-24" HEIGHT 

CA374 12.5 30 x 30 136 

CA375 14.5 30 x 35 147 

CA372 17.0 35 x 35 159 

CA376 17.5 30 x 42 163 

CA377 20.0 30 x 48 175 

CA369 20.4 35 x 42 177 

CA378 23.3 35 x 48 198 

CA373 24.5 42 x 42 195 

CA379 28.0 42 x 48 219 

CA380 32.0 48 x 48 237 

Model Cap. Inside Dim.Wt. 

No. Cu. ft. L" x W" lbs. 

HOPPER FRONT-24" HEIGHT 

CA381 14.5 30 x 35 147 

CA382 17.0 35 x 35 149 

CA370 20.4 35 x 42 177 

CA383 23.3 35 x 48 198 

DROP GATE-24" HEIGHT 

CA384 17.5 30 x 42 163 

CA371 20.4 35 x 42 177 

CA385 24.5 42 x 42 194 

CA386 28.0 42 x 48 219 

Hopper Front 

Drop Gate 

Fully Enclosed

SINGLE TYPE GATES 

Model No. 

Locking Locking Collapsed In-Use Wt. 

Left Right Width' Height' Height' lbs. 

KA035 KA036 3 to 4 6 1/2 6 58 

KA037 KA038 3 to 4 7 6 1/2 61 

KA039 KA040 3 to 4 7 1/2 7 64 

KA041 KA042 3 to 4 8 7 1/2 67 

KA043 KA044 3 to 4 8 1/2 8 70 

KA045 KA046 4 to 5 6 1/2 6 61 

KA047 KA048 4 to 5 7 6 1/2 63 

KA049 KA050 4 to 5 7 1/2 7 65 

KA051 KA052 4 to 5 8 7 1/2 67 

KA053 KA054 4 to 5 8 1/2 8 69 

KA055 KA056 5 to 6 6 1/2 6 64 

KA057 KA058 5 to 6 7 6 1/2 66 

KA059 KA060 5 to 6 7 1/2 7 68 

KA061 KA062 5 to 6 8 7 1/2 70 

KA063 KA064 5 to 6 8 1/2 8 72 

KA065 KA066 6 to 7 6 1/2 6 69 

KA067 KA068 6 to 7 7 6 1/2 71 

KA069 KA070 6 to 7 7 1/2 7 73 

KA071 KA072 6 to 7 8 7 1/2 75 

KA073 KA074 6 to 7 8 1/2 8 77 

KA075 KA076 7 to 8 6 1/2 6 74 

KA077 KA078 7 to 8 7 6 1/2 77 

KA079 KA080 7 to 8 7 1/2 7 80 

KA081 KA082 7 to 8 8 7 1/2 83 

KA083 KA084 7 to 8 8 1/2 8 87 

KA085 KA086 8 to 9 7 6 1/2 85 

KA087 KA088 8 to 9 7 1/2 7 87 

KA089 KA090 8 to 9 8 7 1/2 89 

KA031 KA032 9 to 10 7 6 1/2 91 

KA033 KA034 9 to 10 8 7 1/2 94 


STEEL FOLDING SECURITY GATES 

Please contact us for assistance 

or for special size design services. 

DOUBLE TYPE GATES 

Steel folding gates guard against unauthorized entry, pilferage 

and vandalism. May be installed surface mounted - on 

surface of wall or outside a door frame - or recess mounted 

- between two walls or within a door frame. 


• Provides ventilation, visibility, and access control; 

• Pin type "L" bracket mount allows gate to pivot 

away when not in use; 

• Heavy duty 14 gauge steel U-type channel: 

3/4" x 3/8" riveted back to back, verticals made of 

1 1/2" x 1 1/2" x 1/8" steel angles, c/w steel casters; 

• Equipped with self-securing centre drop pin 

(extra drop pins with gates over 10 ft. wide); 

• Galvanized finish. 

TO ORDER: 

(1) Select single or double type gates 

(2) Select gate width that suits width 

of opening 

(3) Select suitable gate height 

Single Double 

Model Collapsed In-Use Wt. 

No. Width' Height' Height' lbs. 

KA026 6 to 8 6 1/2 6 100 

KA027 6 to 8 7 6 1/2 104 

KA028 6 to 8 7 1/2 7 108 

KA029 6 to 8 8 7 1/2 112 

KA030 6 to 8 8 1/2 8 116 

KA001 8 to 10 6 1/2 6 120 

KA002 8 to 10 7 6 1/2 124 

KA003 8 to 10 7 1/2 7 128 

KA004 8 to 10 8 7 1/2 132 

KA005 8 to 10 81 /2 8 136 

KA006 10 to 12 6 1/2 6 140 

KA007 10 to 12 7 6 1/2 144 

KA008 10 to 12 7 1/2 7 148 

KA009 10 to 12 8 7 1/2 152 

KA010 10 to 12 8 1/2 8 158 

KA011 12 to 14 6 1/2 6 150 

KA012 12 to 14 7 6 1/2 154 

KA013 12 to 14 7 1/2 7 158 

KA014 12 to 14 8 7 1/2 164 

KA015 12 to 14 8 1/2 8 166 

KA016 14 to 16 6 1/2 6 160 

KA017 14 to 16 7 6 1/2 164 

KA018 14 to 16 7 1/2 7 166 

KA019 14 to 16 8 7 1/2 168 

KA020 14 to 16 8 1/2 8 172 

KA021 16 to 18 7 6 1/2 170 

KA022 16 to 18 7 1/2 7 174 

KA023 16 to 18 8 7 1/2 176 

KA024 18 to 20 7 6 1/2 180 

KA025 18 to 20 8 7 1/2 192 

ENVIRONMENTAL STRIP CURTAIN DOORS 

EASY installation kits. 

Specify KLETON ® strip doors for top quality ! 

See page B69. 


563


564 


WIRE MESH SECURITY PARTITIONS & ENCLOSURES 

POSTS 

Available in 3 standard heights: 8'3", 10'3", and 12'3" high. 

Each post is formed of 2" x 2" x .100 steel square tube, and 

is pre-drilled and welded to a foot plate of 5/16" x 2 1/2" x 

7" flat bar that is ready for anchoring to your floor. 

Model No. Description Dimensions 

KD052 Post 8'3" 

KD045 Post 10'3" 

KD048 Post 12'3" 

KD053 Corner Post 8'3" 



PANELS 

Available in 7 standard sizes: 2' x 3', 2' x 4', 2' x 8', 3' x 8', 

4' x 3', 4' x 4' and 4' x 8'. Each panel features 2" x 2" x 10 

gauge welded wire mesh, firmly welded into a 1 1/8" x 1 

1/8" x 10 gauge formed angle frame, and reinforced with 

two 3/16" x 3/4" flat bar stiffeners. 


KD031 Panel 2' x 3' 







FASTENERS & HARDWARE REQUIRED 

For Each Panel Add: 

• 4 x KD018 for each 8' long panel 

• 2 x KD018 for each panel under 8' long 

• 1 x KD043 for each KD018 required 

For Each Sliding Door Add: 

• 1 x KD028 for each sliding door (regardless of size) 

• 1 x KD029 Door Track for each KD106 4' wide sliding door 

• Add 2 x KD029 Door Track for each KD108 

or KD107 8' wide sliding door 

SLIDING DOORS 

Are available in 3 standard sizes: 4' x 8', 8' x 8', and 8' x 

10'. The welded wire mesh door panel is mounted on a 

frame of 1 1/4" x 1 1/4" x 12 gauge square tube for extra 

strength, and is equipped with a padlock hasp. This universal 

door design allows for installation of the door opening 

right to left, or left to right. 


KD106 Sliding Door 4' x 8' 



KD028 Sliding door installation kit 

KD029 Sliding door track 8' 

ADJUSTABLE 

FILLER PANELS 

Adjustable filler panels fill in blank spots on the ends of 

wire mesh partitions to plug up potential security risks. 

Filler panels come in two sizes: 1' x 4', and 1' x 8', and slide 

over the ends of the existing wire mesh sections. Bolt holes 

on the filler panels are separated per every inch and allow 

the filler panel to fill in a space between 6" and 10" wide. 

The holes line up with holes on the existing panel which are 

drilled in at the top and bottom to securely fasten the filler 

panel in two places. 


KD118 Filler Panel 1' x 8' 

KD119 Filler Panel 1' x 4' 

For Each Post Add: 

• KD052 add: 4 x KD019, 2 x KD001 

• KD053 add: 8 x KD019, 2 x KD001 

• KD045 add: 6 x KD019, 2 x KD001 

• KD046 add: 12 x KD019, 2 x KD001 

• KD048 add: 6 x KD019, 2 x KD001 

• KD050 add: 12 x KD019, 2 x KD001 

• Add 1 x KD043 for every KD019 required. 

® 

Rugged Kleton ® wire mesh partitions and enclosures provide 

maximum security at low cost for tools, valuable 

inventory, hazardous materials, and any area of your plant 

where restricted access is required. Bolt-down posts and 

reinforced panels provide the strength that your application 

demands. 

Welded wire mesh panels permit full visibility, and enable 

unrestricted circulation of air, heat and light, providing an 

ideal storage facility. All standard components are finished 

in one coat of electrostatically sprayed blue enamel, and are 

in stock for immediate delivery. Other colours are available. 

The simplified design of all Kleton ® wire mesh partition predrilled 

modular components makes it extremely easy to 

install, expand, rearrange or relocate a partition as required 

with only a minimal investment of man-hours required. 

Only a drill and wrenches are necessary for proper installation. 

Without roof 

With roof 

SWING DOORS 

A and B (below) are available in 2 standard sizes: 3' x 7', 

and 4' x 7', and come complete with a 1' transom. A standard 

4' x 7' swing gate complete with a 14" high x 45" wide 

fold-down service wicket is available. (B) The welded wire 

mesh door panel is mounted on a frame of 1 1/4" x 1 1/4" x 

12 gauge square tube for extra strength, and is equipped 

with a padlock hasp. This universal door design allows for 

installation of the door to swing outward to the left, or to 

the right. 


KD110 Swing Door 3' x 7' 

KD111 Swing Door 4' x 7' 

KD112 Swing Door w/wicket 4' x 7' 

A. Swing 

Door 

B. Swing 

Door 

w/Wicket

PLASTIC PALLETS 

ORBIS NESTABLE PLASTIC PALLETS 

Engineered to last, Orbis pallets are stronger, lighter and more durable than wood. Ideal in 

many industrial and food processing applications. Cost effective due to their durability, these 

pallets are resistant to moisture and chemicals, clean easily and won’t splinter. Consistent 

size and weight reduces worker fatigue and injury. Smooth moulded design helps eliminate 

product damage; no boards to splinter or break, no nails or sharp points to rip into loads. 

High density polyethylene construction. Standard colour: Black. 

Orbis Nestable single-faced, skid type pallets stack 15 high in only 48" for cost-effective 

transport. These one piece structural foam pallets are lightweight, nestable and recyclable. 

Orbis stackable double-faced pallets are held together by 12 nylon fasteners. Ideal for stack 

loading, pallet racking and conveyor use. 

Orbis stackable 

Double-Faced 

Orbis Nestable 

Single-Faced 

Load Entry 

Model Capacity lbs. Fork Pallet Wt. 

No. Dimensions" Moving Static Lift Truck lbs. 

ORBIS NESTABLE SINGLE-FACED 

CB520 40 x 48 x 5 3000 20000 4 way 4 way 29 

CB522 45 x 48 x 5 3/4 4000 20000 4 way 4 way 42 


ORBIS STACKABLE DOUBLE-FACED 

CB525* 36 x 36 x 5 3/4 3000 20000 4 way 2 way 32 

CB526 40 x 48 x 5 3/4 4000 20000 4 way 4 way 39 


CB528 45 x 48 x 7 1/2 w/lip 4000 20000 4 way 4 way 65 

CB529* 48 x 48 x 6 1/2 4000 20000 4 way 4 way 68 

CB531 48 x 60 x 5 3/4 2500 20000 4 way 4 way 88 

CB532 48 x 72 x 5 3/4 2500 20000 4 way 2 way 110 

*Also available in USDA/FDA approved material for non-direct food contact. 

ORBIS NESTABLE 

LIGHTWEIGHT PALLET WITH LIP 

This cost efficient, lightweight plastic pallet features a 5/8" raised edge surrounding the 

deck to prevent loads from sliding off. Single faced, one-piece high-density polyethylene 

construction. Cleans easily with efficient drainage design. Nestable for space saving 

storage. 2500 lbs. moving load capacity, 10,000 lbs. static load capacity. 4 way fork lift and 

2 way pallet truck entry. Colour: Black. 

Model Load Capacity lbs. Wt. 

No. Dimensions" Moving Static lbs. 

CB521 40 x 48 x 5 1/2 w/lip 2500 10000 21 

Also available in USDA/FDA approved material for non-direct food contact. 


RECYCLED PLASTIC PALLET 

• Slip resistant/no skid surface 

• Nestable for easy storage 

• Lightweight, 32 lbs. 

• 100% recycled plastic 

• Easy to clean 

• 4 way fork truck and 

hand truck entry 

• Doesn't rot, mildew, mould or 

splinter and is insect resistant 

Model Load Capacity lbs. Nest 

No. Dimensions" Static Dynamic Ratio 

CC098 48 x 40 x 5 30,000 4000 2:1 

ORBIS RACKSTAR PALLETS 

Ideal for use in the food industry and in situations where 

higher capacity racking capabilities are important. Doubledeck, 

one piece construction with an open grid 

and large corner for easy cleaning. 

Choice of standard high density 

polyethylene or USDA/FDA approved 

HDPE virgin material for direct food 

contact. In an edge-supported rack, the 

Rackstar can hold up to a 2500 lbs. evenly 

distributed load. Moving load capacity of 5000 

lbs., static load of 20000 lbs. 4 way fork lift or 

pallet truck entry. Colour: Standard-Black, 

USDA/FDA-Blue. 

Model No. Dimensions" Wt. lbs. 

CB536 40 x 48 x 6 5/8 Standard 45 

CB537 40 x 48 x 6 5/8 USDA/FDA Food Approved 45 

Note: Test for pallet deflection on loads over 2500 lbs. when used with unsupported 

(edge-supported) pallet rack. 

DRUM PALLET 

The 48 x 48 one-piece drum pallet features four moulded-in rings to secure the drums 

during transportation, underside rings for secure double stacking and complete flow 

through design. 

• 48 x 48 four drum pallet 

• Structural foam 

• Pallets fit side by side in regular trailers 

• Standard colour: Black 

• Weight: 57.0 lbs. 

• Dimensions: 

48.8" L x 48.8" W x 5.5" H 

Model Load Capacity lbs. Truckload QuantityFork Truck Hand 

No. Static Dynamic 48' Trailer 53' Trailer Entry Entry 

CC153 15000 3500 396 468 4 way 4 way 

ROLL PALLET 

Rotationally moulded of durable polyethylene, 

these lightweight pallets can handle rolls up to 

a maximum diameter of 42". Moulded 

construction eliminates product damage due 

to splinters and nails. 2 way forklift entry. 

Colour: Black 

Model Overall Capacity Wt. 

No. Dimensions" lbs. lbs. 

CB535 38 1/2 x 21 x 8 1/2 1500 24 


565


566 


STORAGE RACKS 

BAR STORAGE RACKS 

All steel vertical and horizontal racks are ideal for storing bars, tube, pipe and angles. 

Economical K-D design reduces storage and shipping costs. 

COMBINATION VERTICAL RACK 

Stores bars up to 12 feet long and has shelf 

storage capacity for smaller parts. 8" deep 

arms divided into 3 sections. 3 pan shelves 

21" apart. Capacity: 3000 lbs. Base size: 36" 

x 24". Height: 84". 

Wt.: 90 lbs. 

Model No. RB959 

HORIZONTAL BAR RACK 

Stores bars up to 10 feet long (use 2 racks 

for longer lengths). 9" deep arms with 9 

storage levels at 6" intervals. Capacity: 

1800 lbs. Base: 30" sq. 

Height: 84". Wt.: 68 lbs. 


MOBILE PIPE AND BAR RACK 

Safely stores up to 1,000 lbs. of bars, 

tubes, pipe and angles. Folds down to 61" 

x 34" x 15 1/2". Four storage racks with 

curved edges to prevent pipe from rolling 

off. Constructed of structural square tubing. 

Includes 2 swivel and 2 rigid, 6" hard 

rubber casters. O.A. Dim.: 58 1/2" W x 34" 

D x 58" H. 

Wt.: 100 lbs. 


Model No. 

RB959 

AIRECTOR ® 

Airector ® racks are made of a welded base unit that includes 

a steel reinforced wood deck and a set of 4 welded tubular 

steel posts. Rack has a 4000 lbs. stacking capacity and can 

be stacked 4 units high. Includes 1" x 6" sturdy deckboards. 

Utilizes warehouse airspace and can be easily relocated. 

Base frame has six centre supports for 4 way entry by lift 

trucks. 


No. Description W" x L" lbs. 

RB954 Wood Deck Base 42 x 48 96 




RB966 H.D. Posts (set of 4) 36" H 46 



STACKING U-RACKS 

Lightweight, inexpensive and easy to use, these racks will 

stack up to four high. All welded construction. I.D. 16 1/2" 

W bottom x 25 1/4" W top x 15 3/4 " H. Units are packaged 

and sold individually. 

Model No. 

RB958 

PORTABLE STACKING RACKS 

Fabricate your own storage racking system with these versatile mini modules. Sturdy, yet 

lightweight, easy for one person to assemble. All welded steel construction requires no 

bolts, tools or fittings. A highly flexible storage system that is expandable in length, width 

and height. 

Model Overall Dimensions Cap. Wt. 

No. W" x L" x H" lbs. lbs. 

RB952 12 x 16 x 13 1/2 2500 18 

RB953 14 x 19 x 17 3700 25.5 

RB964 15 x 22 x 20 1/2 5600 31 

RB965 16 x 26 x 23 1/2 7500 44 

MINITREE TM CANTILEVER RACK 

This light-duty adjustable arm cantilever rack is especially suited 

for installations requiring neat housekeeping and efficient storage 

of plastics, conduit, extrusions, hydraulic tubing and similar 

lightweight materials. 250 lbs. capacity per arm. Single or double-sided 

racks available. Overall dimensions: 36" W x 18 1/4" D 

x 76 1/4" H (single); 36" W x 30" D x 76 1/4" H (double). Shipped 

knocked down. 

QUIK-TREE ® 

CANTILEVER RACK 

Multi-purpose cantilever style rack is ideal for storage of steel, 

iron, aluminum, wood or plastic pipes. 500 lbs. capacity per arm. 

Seven 14" arms included per column side and adjustable on 1 

1/2" centres. Available with a 3' or 6' wide brace set, and a single 

or double sided rack. Overall dimensions: 3' W or 6' W x 21" D x 

7' H (Single) or 34" D (Double). Shipped knocked down. 

Bottom base frame 

4 way entry 

Model Capacity Wt. 

No. lbs/pr. lbs. 

RB969 6,000 25 

RB970 10,000 3 

Model Capacity Wt. 

No. Description lbs/Column lbs. 

RG621 Single-sided, 14 single arms 1750 165 

RG622 Double-sided, 14 double arms 3500 215 

Brace 

Set Cap. lbs/ Model No. Wt. Model No. Wt. 

Description L' Column Starter lbs. Add-on lbs. 

Single-sided, 14 arms 3 3500 RG631 237 RG632 135 

Double-sided, 28 arms 3 7000 RG633 345 RG634 189 

Single-sided, 14 arms 6 3500 RB177 255 RB176 153 

Double-sided, 28 arms 6 7000 RB173 363 RB172 207 

Model No. 

RB952 

1" x 6" sturdy 

deckboards. 

Finished on 

all 4 sides. 

2 1/2" 

4000 lbs. 

capacity Tubing 

2.17" square 

Socket 2 1/2" 

Square 

Underclearance 4 

1/2”


RACKING & SHELVING UNITS 

PRONTO BULK STORAGE RACKS 

Featuring up to 2000 lbs. capacity per shelf, each easily assembled Pronto bulk storage rack 

starter unit is comprised of two all-welded end frames, and three 5/8" presswood shelves 

flush-fitted into positive locking steel shelf beams (2 per shelf). Add-on units include only 

one end frame. Additional shelves may be added into any unit at 4" vertical centres. Order 

one starter unit, and multiple add-ons for a continuous racking set-up. Available in three 

standard heights; 8',10',12'; three depths; 24", 36", 48"; and two widths; 7' and 8'. For extra 

stability and rigidity, all units feature three safety bars per shelf. Rack only units (no 

wood shelves) are available upon inquiry. Blue enamel finish. 

NOTE: Not recommended for powered 

lift truck applications. 

Starter Unit Add-On Unit 

Assembles quickly 

without bolts 

Model No. RA507 

24" Shelf Depth 36" Shelf Depth 48" Shelf Depth 

Size Cap. Model Wt. Model Wt. Model Wt. 

W' x H' Description lbs. No. lbs. No. lbs. No. lbs. 

7 x 8 Starter 1400 RA443 245 RA475 288 RA507 331 

7 x 8 Add-on 1400 RA441 217 RA473 258 RA505 299 

7 W Add'l shelf 1400 RA470 63 RA502 76 RA534 89 

8 x 10 Starter 2000 RA453 302 RA485 351 RA517 400 

8 x 10 Add-on 2000 RA451 268 RA483 315 RA515 362 

8 W Add'l shelf 2000 RA471 78 RA503 93 RA535 108 

8 x 12 Starter 2000 RA463 316 RA495 365 RA527 414 

8 x 12 Add-on 2000 RA461 275 RA493 322 RA525 369 

8 W Add'l shelf 2000 RA471 78 RA503 93 RA535 108 

SPEEDI-BILT ® BULK STORAGE RACKS 

An economical solution to any storage problem… 

from the supplies storage room, to the larger warehouse application. 

Key features include: 

• 4 shelves per unit 

• Additional shelves available 

• Shelves adjustable on 1 1/2" centres 

• Standard heights: 7' or 10' 

• Standard depths: 30" or 48" 

• Starter and add-on units available 

• Unobstructed access, all 4 sides 

• Baked enamel finish, sand colour 

• Standard widths: 6' or 8' 

• Centre deck support for each shelf 

• Each shelf includes 5/8" presswood deck 

• 6' W units have a capacity of 700 lbs./shelf 

• 8' W units have a capacity of 1000 lbs./ shelf 

Speedi-Bilt ® components assemble 

easily without the need for special tools or fasteners. 

All you need to assemble these units is 

a rubber mallet. 

30" Shelf Depth 48" Shelf Depth 

Size Starter Wt. Add-on Wt. Starter Wt. Add-on Wt. 

W' x H' Model No. lbs. Model No. lbs. Model No. lbs. Model No. lbs. 

6 x 7 RA613 222 RA612 226 RA615 328 RA614 328 

6 x 10 RA607 234 RA606 233 RA609 336 RA608 336 

8 x 7 RA623 286 RA622 286 RA625 415 RA624 415 

8 x 10 RA617 294 RA616 294 RA619 422 RA618 422 

Additional Shelves 

6 RA610 46 - - RA611 77 - - 

8 RA620 67 - - RA621 99 - - 


567


568 


STEEL SHELVING & LABELLING SYSTEMS 

MAIN 

FEATURES: 

Starter 

• No-bolt shelf design saves up to 

80% of installation time 

• Employs an innovative shelf clip, which 

slips into a slotted T post 

OPEN TYPE 

Add-on 

Adjustable open shelving units provide strength, yet an economical 

storage system for your plant, warehouse or office. 

Open type shelving starter units include the number of shelves required for your 

application, 4 T posts, 2 pairs of side sway braces and 1 pair of back sway braces. 

The add-on units are similar, except that only 1 pair of side sway braces, and 2 

posts are required. 

To order open or closed type shelving, determine the height, the 

number of shelves, and the shelf dimensions that suit your application. 

If multiple units are to be connected, order one starter unit, 

and add-on units for the balance. If a larger 

number of shelves are required than the units shown, order extra 

shelves. Shelves may be added at 2" intervals. 

LABEL HOLDERS 

Clearly identify your shelf/bin contents with the efficient and time-saving 

CEL-U-DEX holders. Versatile, highly protective, easy to read, and even 

custom designed with a special matte finish for fool-proof bar code applications. 

Ideal for all types of racking, shelving and bin/drawer storage systems. 

Available in 3 different types: 

HOL-DEX ® 

• Can be custom cut to your specific size specifications 

• Available in clear, green, blue, red and lemon 

for colour coding (clear provides the most accurate 

bar code scan) 

• Shelves are 18 gauge steel with 

a 630 lbs. cap. (36" W) and 

315 lbs. cap. (48" W) for 

evenly distributed loads 

Size Qty/ Model No. 

W" x L" Box Clear Green Blue Red Lemon 

Self-Adhesive 

1/2 x 6 12 OA340 OA355 OA354 OA357 OA356 

3/4 x 6 12 OA339 OA359 OA358 OA361 OA360 

1 x 6 12 OA341 OA366 - OA370 - 

2 x 6 12 OA338 OA363 OA362 OA372 OA371 

Magnetic 

1/2 x 6 12 RG650 RG651 RG652 RG653 RG654 

3/4 x 6 12 OA389 OA378 OA377 OA380 OA379 

1 x 6 12 OA336 OA374 - OA376 - 

2 x 6 12 RG655 RG656 RG657 RG658 RG659 

Hook & Loop 

1 x 6 12 RG660 RG661 RG662 RG663 RG664 

2 x 6 12 RG665 RG666 RG667 RG668 RG669 

WRITE-ON 

MAGNETIC TAGS 

A fast, simple and inexpensive means of labelling high volume applications, 

primary uses in warehouses and other storage areas. The newly formulated 

write-on/wet erase tags come with an aggressive magnetic backing. The vinyl 

top coating makes marking with any standard wet erase marker a snap. The 

special wet erase feature will keep tags clear and clean for extended periods. 

Mark with a standard wet erase marker, erase with a damp cloth and remark. 

3 standard widths available. Custom widths and lengths available too. 

Standard product thickness is 1/32". Sold 25 per box, or in 50' rolls. 

Model No. RC166 

• Shelves come in various sizes (D x W) with a 

height of 1" 

• Extra shelves may be added to standard units 

to increase storage capacities 

Starter 

• Shelves are adjustable on 2" centres 

• All units shipped knocked down 

to minimize freight charges 

• Available in two types: open or closed 

CLOSED TYPE 

Add-on 

Closed type shelving units have all of the features of open shelving, 

while providing the added benefits of a fully enclosed unit. 

Closed type shelving starter units include the number of shelves required 

for your application, 2 end panels, 1 back panel and 1 base plate. The addon 

units are similar, except that only 1 end panel is required. 

SUPERSCAN 

• Available in 4 extra large sizes for pallet 

racking installation 

• Clear plastic matte finish assures precise 

bar code reading everytime 

• Inserts are laser ink jet printer compatible 

for easy labelling 

SUPERSCAN (Clear only) 

Size Qty/ Model 

W" x L" Box No. 

Self-Adhesive 

3 x 5 50 RG670 

4 x 6 50 RG671 

5 x 7 25 RG681 

8 1/2 x 11 25 RG682 

Many different configurations of the Open and Closed type shelving 

are available. On the following pages are just a few of our most popular 

models. Styles available are unlimited. Please contact us if you 

need a different arrangement. Shipped knocked down. 



Magnetic 

3 x 5 50 RG672 

4 x 6 50 RG673 

5 x 7 25 RG683 

8 1/2 x 11 25 RG684 

WIRE-RAC TM 

• New snap on holders easily and quickly identify stored contents 

• Clear, flexible plastic sleeves fit new or existing wire shelving with 1 1/4" facing; paper 

inserts included 

• Available in 4 different lengths: 3", 6" 12" and 24" 


No. W" x L" 

Boxes (25/box) 

RH687 1 x 3 

RH688 1 x 4 

RH689 1 x 6 

RH690 1 x 8 

RH691 2 x 3 

RH692 2 x 4 

RH693 2 x 6 

RH694 2 x 8 

RH695 3 x 4 

RH696 3 x 6 

RH697 3 x 8 



Hook & Loop 

3 x 5 50 RG674 

4 x 6 50 RG675 

5 x 7 25 RG685 

8 1/2 x 11 25 RG686 

Dimensions Qty/ Model 


1 5/16 x 3 25 RH683 

1 5/16 x 6 25 RH684 

1 5/16 x 12 12 RH685 

1 5/16 x 24 6 RH686 

Model No. Dimensions 

Rolls (50' roll) 

RH698 1" W 

RH699 2" W 

RH700 3" W


STEEL SHELVING UNITS - 36"W X 6'4"H 

OPEN TYPE 

Contains: 3 Bays 36" Wide x 24" High 

Depth" Starter Unit Add-On Unit 

12 RC006 RC005 

18 RC008 RC007 

24 RC010 RC009 



12 RC012 RC011 

18 RC014 RC013 

24 RC016 RC015 


Complete with Locking, 

Swinging Doors 


12 RC054 RC053 

18 RC056 RC055 

24 RC058 RC057 

Note: Individual bay heights are approximate. 

OPEN TYPE 



12 RC018 RC017 

18 RC020 RC019 

24 RC022 RC021 

Contains: 6 Bays 36" Wide x 12" High Contains: 9 Bays 36" Wide x 8" High Contains: 12 Bays 36" Wide x 6" High 


12 RC024 RC023 

18 RC026 RC025 

24 RC028 RC027 





12 RC060 RC059 

18 RC062 RC061 

24 RC064 RC063 

OPEN TYPE 



12 RC030 RC029 

18 RC032 RC031 

24 RC034 RC033 


12 RC036 RC035 

18 RC038 RC037 

24 RC040 RC039 


6 Bays 36" Wide x 8" High 




12 RC072 RC071 

18 RC074 RC073 

24 RC076 RC075 

OPEN TYPE 



12 RC042 RC041 

18 RC044 RC043 

24 RC046 RC045 


12 RC048 RC047 

18 RC050 RC049 

24 RC052 RC051 






12 RC066 RC065 

18 RC068 RC067 

24 RC070 RC069 


569



OPEN TYPE 



12 RC164 RC163 

18 RC166 RC165 

24 RC168 RC167 



12 RC170 RC169 

18 RC172 RC171 

24 RC174 RC173 



Swinging Door 


12 RC212 RC211 

18 RC214 RC213 

24 RC216 RC215 


OPEN TYPE 



12 RC188 RC187 

18 RC190 RC189 

24 RC192 RC191 

Contains: 6 Bays 36" Wide x 14" High Contains: 7 Bays 36" Wide x 12" High Contains: 14 Bays 36" Wide x 6" High 


12 RC194 RC193 

18 RC196 RC195 

24 RC198 RC197 





12 RC218 RC217 

18 RC220 RC219 

24 RC222 RC221 

OPEN TYPE 



12 RC176 RC175 

18 RC178 RC177 

24 RC180 RC179 


12 RC182 RC181 

18 RC184 RC183 

24 RC186 RC185 





12 RC224 RC223 

18 RC226 RC225 

24 RC228 RC227 

OPEN TYPE 



12 RC200 RC199 

18 RC202 RC201 

24 RC204 RC203 


12 RC206 RC205 

18 RC208 RC207 

24 RC210 RC209 






12 RC230 RC229 

18 RC232 RC231 

24 RC234 RC233 


571


572 



Contains: 2 Bays 36" W x 28" H 

4 Compartments 18" W x 14" H 


12 RC236 RC235 

18 RC238 RC237 


Contains: 1 Bay 36" W x 14" H 


1 Bay 36" W x 28" H 


Swinging Doors. 


12 RC260 RC259 

18 RC262 RC261 

24 RC264 RC263 

Contains: 126 Metal Shelf Boxes (drawers) 

5 5/8" W x 2 3/4" H 


12 RC280 RC279 

18 RC282 RC281 


Contains: 4 Compartments 18" Wx 14" H 


1 Bay 36" Wide x 14" High 


12 RC242 RC241 

18 RC244 RC243 

24 RC246 RC245 

Contains: 9 Compartments 12" W, 12" H 

complete with 3" Compartments fronts 


complete with 1" Compartment fronts 

30 Metal Shelf Boxes (drawers) 

5 5/8" W x 4 3/4" H 


12 RC266 RC265 

18 RC268 RC267 


11" W x 4 3/4" H 


12 RC284 RC283 

18 RC286 RC285 

Contains: 21 Compartments 12" W x 12" H Contains: 84 Compartments 6" W x 6" H 


12 RC248 RC247 

18 RC250 RC249 

24 RC252 RC251 

Contains: 21 Compartments 12" W x 12" H 


Swinging Doors. 


12 RC270 RC269 

18 RC272 RC271 

24 RC274 RC273 


5 5/8" W x 4 3/4" H 

15 Metal Shelf Boxes (drawers) 

11" W x 4 3/4" H 


12 RC288 RC287 

18 RC290 RC289 


12 RC254 RC253 

18 RC256 RC255 

24 RC258 RC257 


5 5/8" W x 4 3/4" H 


12 RC276 RC275 

18 RC278 RC277 

Contains: 84 Compartments 6" W x 6" H 

Complete with 1" Compartment Fronts. 


12 RC292 RC291 

18 RC294 RC293 

24 RC296 RC295


STEEL SHELVING UNITS - 36" W X 8'4" H 

OPEN TYPE 



12 RC298 RC297 

18 RC300 RC299 

24 RC302 RC301 



12 RC304 RC303 

18 RC306 RC305 

24 RC308 RC307 



1 Bay 36" W x 24" H 


12 RC346 RC345 

18 RC348 RC347 

24 RC350 RC349 


OPEN TYPE 



12 RC310 RC309 

18 RC312 RC311 

24 RC314 RC313 

OPEN TYPE 


Contains: 8 Bays 36" W x 12" H Contains: 12 Bays 36" W x 12" H Contains: 4 Bays 36" W x 24" H 


12 RC316 RC315 

18 RC318 RC317 

24 RC320 RC319 


12 RC322 RC321 

18 RC324 RC323 

24 RC326 RC325 

Contains: 24 Compartments 12" Wx 12" H Contains: 48 Compartments 9" W x 8" H 


12 RC352 RC351 

18 RC354 RC353 

24 RC356 RC355 


12 RC328 RC327 

18 RC330 RC329 

24 RC332 RC331 


12 RC358 RC357 

18 RC360 RC359 

24 RC362 RC361 

OPEN TYPE 



12 RC334 RC333 

18 RC336 RC335 

24 RC338 RC337 



18 RC342 RC341 

24 RC344 RC343 




12 RC364 RC363 

18 RC366 RC365 

24 RC368 RC367 


573


574 


SLOTTED ANGLE SHELVING 


Solve unique storage problems with the convenience and strength of Benoma slotted steel 

angle. It's easy to build what you need - when and where you need it, to your own specifications, 

i.e. shelving and storage systems, work benches, tubing storage, protective framing 

around machinery, platforms around assembly projects, etc. Choose from the various components 

available, or pre-configured shelf units. Offered by Nelson is their unique boltless clip 

design which allows for adjustability of shelves easily and effortlessly, and also, clip design fits 

both single and double slotted angle posts. To ensure stability, it is recommended that 3 shelf 

levels are bolted when using boltless clips. Among the various accessories available to customize 

your unit are: side and back panels, kick panels, dividers, bin fronts, label holders, etc. 

RH701 RH774 

Type 300 

2 7/8" x 1 5/8" 

Steel slotted angle allows you to design and build anything to your own specifications: 

Metal Decking Tubing Storage Overhead Storage Overhead Storage Wide Storage Special Work Benches 

SLOTTED ANGLE ACCESSORIES 

CORNER GUSSET PLATE 

Add strength and rigidity to your slotted angle assembly. 3" W x 3" L. 

Model No. RG994 

PLASTIC FEET 

Accomodate single or double 1 3/8" x 1 3/8" angle posts. 

May be modified to fit larger angles. 

Model No. RG237 single post 

Model No. RG238 double "T" post 

SLOTTED ANGLE CUTTER 

Makes angle cutting a one man, single-stroke operation. 


Model No. RG232 

Type 225 

2 1/2" x 1 5/8" 

Type 140 

1 3/8" x 1 3/8" 


6 Shelves/75" Post 7 Shelves/87" Post 8 Shelves/99" Post 

Size Model No. Model No. Model No. 

W" x L" Open Closed Open Closed Open Closed 

12 x 36 RH701 RH774 RH707 RH780 RH713 RH786 






All shelving units include 4 posts (1 3/8" x 1 3/8" slotted angle), shelves, panels 

(for closed units), plastic feet and all necessary hardware. 

Model Dimensions Angle Steel Wt. 

No. W" x D" Length' Gauge Colour UDL* lbs. 

SLOTTED ANGLE 

RG979 1 3/8 x 1 3/8 8 14 Grey — 6 

RG980 1 3/8 x 1 3/8 10 14 Grey — 7 

RG981 1 3/8 x 1 3/8 12 14 Grey — 8.5 

RG982 2 1/2 x 1 5/8 8 14 Grey — 9 

RG983 2 1/2 x 1 5/8 10 14 Grey — 11 

RG984 2 1/2 x 1 5/8 12 14 Grey — 13 

RG229 

SHELVES 

2 7/8 x 1 5/8 12 12 Grey — 15 

RG985 12 x 36 — 20 Galvanized 450 7 

RG986 15 x 36 — 20 Galvanized 450 8.3 







RG993 24 x 48 — 19 Galvanized 400 18.5 

*UDL: Maximum uniformly distributed load allowance where maximum 

shelf deflection is fully recovered when load is removed. 

SIDE PANELS 

BACK PANELS 

Model 

No. 

Dimensions 

W" x L" 

Steel 

Gauge 

Wt. 

lbs. 


No. RG232 W" x L" 

Steel 

Gauge 

Wt. 

lbs. 

RH759 12 x 75 24 7 RH768 36 x 75 24 22 

RH760 18 x 75 24 11 RH769 48 x 75 24 29 

RH761 24 x 75 24 15 RH770 36 x 87 24 25 

RH762 12 x 87 24 8 RH771 48 x 87 24 34 

RH763 18 x 87 24 13 RH772 36 x 99 24 29 

RH764 24 x 87 24 17 RH773 48 x 99 24 38 

RH765 12 x 99 24 10 KICK PANELS 

RH766 18 x 99 24 14 RH792 36 x 3 20 1.3 

RH767 24 x 99 24 19 RH793 48 x 3 20 1.7 

RG994 RG996 

RG237 

RG232 

ACCESSORIES 


RG994 Corner gusset 3" 0.7 

RG995 Nut and bolt 0.05 

RG996 Boltless shelf clip 0.6 

RG237 Plastic foot (simple post) 0.02 

RG238 Plastic foot (double post) 0.03 

RG232* Slotted angle cutter 17 

* Shipped knocked down

WIRE SHELVING 

ADAPTA-PLUS WIRE SHELVING UNITS 

Open wire construction will maximize light pene-tration for better visibility, air circulation, and water 

coverage from your sprinkler system. Rugged square post construction. Chrome finish posts are 

16 gauge and stainless steel posts are 18 gauge. All posts include plastic top caps and leveling feet. 

Shelf capacities: Wire shelves have a capacity, depending on the width, from 800 to 1000 lbs. 

All shelf capacities are based on static loads that are evenly distributed. Standard shelves can be 

assembled on a 2" slope. 

ZINC FINISH: Most economical coating for a wire shelf. It is used mainly for dry storage of boxed 

goods or paper products. 

CHROME FINISH: More durable than zinc. Impervious to the accumulation of dust. Used widely in 

assembly line areas, manufacturing, electronics industry, offices and storage rooms. 

TECH-SEAL TM : A new state-of-the-art process to prevent corrosion. Zinc is applied to the entire wire 

shelf followed by a chrome sealer, a cathodic primer and a final powder coating of heavy duty polyester 

which is baked on to assure resistance to water, humidity, salt and UV. Guaranteed for 10 

years against rust formation. 

STAINLESS STEEL FINISH: Made from #304 stainless steel. Fully corrosion resistant and used 

mainly in clean rooms or food processing applications, anywhere bacteria cannot accumulate. 

ZINC FINISH WIRE SHELVING 

60" H/4 SHELVES 72" H/4 SHELVES 84" H/ 6 SHELVES 

Shelf Add-On Add-On Add-On 

W" x L" Starter Straight 90° Starter Straight 90° Starter Straight 90° 

18 x 36 RD542 RD564 RH382 RD526 RD525 RH398 RD558 RD557 RH430 

18 x 48 RD544 RD543 RH384 RD528 RD527 RH400 RD560 RD559 RH432 


18 x 72 RD548 RD547 RH387 RD532 RD531 RH403 RF962 RF963 RH435 


24 x 48 RD536 RD535 RH392 RD520 RD519 RH408 RD552 RD551 RH440 


24 x 72 RD540 RD539 RH395 RD524 RD523 RH411 RD556 RD555 RH443 

TECH-SEAL TM WIRE SHELVING 




18 x 48 RD393 RD392 RH512 RD385 RD384 RH528 RD401 RD400 RH560 

18 x 60 RD395 RD394 RH514 RD387 RD386 RH530 RD403 RD402 RH562 



COMPONENTS 

POSTS 

Height" Wt. lbs. Chrome Finish Tech-Seal TM Finish Stainless Steel Finish 

36 2.5 RD346 RD409 RD494 

43 3 RD347 RD410 RD495 

54 3.7 RD348 RD411 RD496 

60 4.2 RD349 RD412 RD497 

72 5 RD350 RD413 RD498 

84 6 RD351 RD414 RD499 

96 7 RD352 RD415 RD500 

WIRE SHELVES 

Shelf Wt. Zinc Chrome Tech-Seal TM Stainless Steel 

W" x L" lbs. Finish Finish Finish Finish 

12 x 24 6 - RD251 RD356 RD427 

12 x 36 9 - RD252 RD357 RD428 

12 x 48 10 - RD253 RD358 RD429 

12 x 60 12 - RD254 RD359 RD430 

12 x 72 15 - RD255 RD360 RD431 

15 x 24 7 - RD256 RD361 RD432 

15 x 36 8 - RD257 RD362 RD433 

15 x 48 12 - RD258 RD363 RD434 

15 x 60 14 - RD259 RD364 RD435 

15 x 72 17 - RD260 RD365 RD436 

18 x 24 8 RD503 RD261 RD366 RD437 

18 x 36 10 RD504 RD262 RD367 RD438 

18 x 48 13 RD505 RD263 RD368 RD439 

18 x 60 16 RD506 RD264 RD369 RD440 

18 x 72 19 RD507 RD265 RD370 RD441 

21 x 36 11 RD508 RD266 RD371 RD442 

21 x 48 15 RD509 RD267 RD372 RD443 

21 x 60 18 RD510 RD268 RD373 RD444 

21 x 72 22 RD511 RD269 RD374 RD445 

24 x 24 10 RD512 RD270 RD375 RD446 

24 x 36 12 RD513 RD272 RD376 RD447 

24 x 48 16 RD514 RD274 RD377 RD448 

24 x 60 20 RD515 RD277 RD378 RD449 

24 x 72 24 RD516 RD278 RD379 RD450 


CHROME FINISH WIRE SHELVING 












STAINLESS STEEL WIRE SHELVING 








The Unique CARI-ALL TM system uses a series of components to assemble the shelving 

units. This versatility will allow you to choose the type of shelving that is best suited 

to your specific application. 

HOW TO ORDER 

1. Determine the height of your shelving and choose the post's finish. 

2. Select the shelf dimension, shelf finish and the number of shelves per unit. 

3. Count how many starter units (free standing) and how many add-on units 

there will be. 

4. Select other accessories. 

Shelf Clip 

Square Post 

Corner "S" 

Hook 

Joining Bar 

ADAPTA PLUS 

Shelving 

Add-on 

Support 


575


576 


HEAVY DUTY STORAGE PRODUCTS 

EXTRA HEAVY DUTY SHELVING 

Designed to hold the heaviest loads... 

Clear access on all four sides. Excellent for storage of dies, fixtures, jigs, or any heavy 

material. Formed angle 2" x 2" uprights are constructed of 13 gauge steel, punched on 1" 

centres for quick and easy shelf adjustment. Grey baked enamel finish. Shelf capacities are 

based on loads that are evenly distributed. Extra shelves and 96" high units are available. 

Each unit includes 5 shelves. 

Shelves: 14 gauge 2" deep channels on all four 

sides. An extra channel welded to the bottom 

of shelf to prevent flexing under heavy loads. 

Model Dimensions Capacity per Wt. 

No. W" x D" x H" Shelf lbs. lbs. 

RC524 36 x 18 x 72 1570 167 

RC525 48 x 18 x 72 1600 212 

RC526 60 x 18 x 72 1500 252 

RC527 36 x 24 x 72 1625 197 

RC528 48 x 24 x 72 1650 242 

RC529 60 x 24 x 72 1500 292 

CLEARVIEW 

CABINETS 

The clear polycarbonate 

windows in the doors will take 

the guess work out of your 

product storage system. All your 

tools and supplies are visible at a 

glance. 12 gauge one piece body 

design. A 6" sweep space is 

provided by 3/16" steel legs. 

Adjustable 14 gauge shelves. A 

three point locking device with a 

3/8" latch rod and 3/16" latch 

plate. Hinges are 10 gauge with a 

5/16" brass pin. 

Model Dimensions O. A. No. of Shelf Wt. 

No. W" x D" x H" Ht" Shelves Cap. lbs. lbs. 

FB044 48 x 24 x 60 66 3 1200 446 

FB047 48 x 24 x 72 78 4 1200 536 

EXTRA HEAVY-GAUGE 

STORAGE CABINETS 

These cabinets are so tough, they're like 

having safes on your shop floor for storage. 

All welded 14 gauge cabinets, with 14 gauge shelves can be adjusted every 3". Doors feature secure 

3 point locking system with 3/8" latch rod and 3/16" latch plate. All cabinets are 21" deep and 36" 

wide. Shipped with shelves bolted in place and on 4" high wood blocks. Optional 7 gauge bolt-onlegs 

are available. They add 4" to the overall height of the cabinet and provide fork lift access to move 

the cabinet. Colour: Grey. 

Model No. of Dimensions Wt. 

No. Shelves W" x D" x H" lbs. 

FB013 4 36 x 21 x 78 370 

FB012 3 36 x 21 x 60 300 

FB011 2 36 x 21 x 42 230 

FB014 Bolt-on-legs, set of 4" high 24 

VISIBLE STORAGE 

WIRE MESH 

CABINET 

All welded mesh storage cabinet 

provides a secure yet visible area to 

place your tools and equipment. 

Reinforced K-Brace welded to the door 

frame delivers additional strength and 

proper door align-ment. Diamond 

shaped 13 gauge steel mesh. 

Adjustable shelves bolt into holes 

spaced 8 3/4" at bottom to 8 3/4" from 

top. Door has three point latching 

system with cam-lock and chrome 

plated handle. Baked on grey enamel 

finish. Dimensions: 24" W x 21" D x 72" 

H. Wt: 146 lbs. All stored items are 

clearly visible even with the door 

closed. 

Model No. FB015


Model No. FF985 

COUNTER HIGH CABINETS 

Serves as a counter and cabinet combination. Ideal for 

storage where vertical space is limited. Contemporary 

styling with flush fronts, backs, sides and rounded front 

corners. Double doors with three point door locking device 

swing to full 180° to maximize access. Nylon washers, 

plastic inserts and felt pads make it a quieter operating cabinet. 

Features two shelves adjust-able every 2", capacity of 

180 lbs. per shelf. Durable heavy-gauge steel construction 

in Dove Grey. Cabinet dimensions: 36" W x 42" H with 18" 

or 21" D. Shipped knocked down. 

Model No. Description Depth" Wt. lbs. 

FF985 High cabinet 18 88 

FF986 High cabinet 21 96 

FF987 Extra shelf (For FF985) 18 9 

FF988 Extra shelf (For FF986) 21 7 

HEAVY-DUTY DEEP DOOR STORAGE CABINET 

The specially designed padlock hasp (cannot be accessed by bolt cutters) helps secure the contents of this deep door hidensity 

storage cabinet. 4 reinforced adjustable main shelves are complemented by 6 adjustable mini shelves in each 4" 

deep hinged door for a capacity unmatched by any other cabinet. Cabinet dimensions are 38" W x 24" D x 72" H and colour 

is grey. Order extra shelves as required. 

Special padlock hasp conceals padlocks from 

bolt cutters. 

Model No. FB019 


WELDED 

COMPACT CABINET 

For any situation where a full sized cabinet is too large, this 

compact cabinet will fit in. It has a width of only 18", but 

provides 5 1/2 cubic feet of storage space, including three 

divided drawers, and two stationary shelves. Constructed 

of 24 gauge steel, it features a lock and handle, and is finished 

in grey enamel. 

Model Size Wt. 


FB019 18 x 12 x 44 42 


No. Description W" x D" x H" lbs. 

FB024 Cabinet 38 x 24 x 72 315 

FB025 Extra shelf for cabinet 18 

FB026 Extra shelf for door 2 

Model No. 

FB048 


ECONOMICAL COMPACT 

CABINETS 

These cabinets are ideal anywhere a full sized cabinet is too 

large. Includes adjustable shelves, handle (no lock), and 

white enamel finish. 

Model Size No. Wt. 

No. W" x D" x H" Shelves lbs. 

FB048 19 x 12 x 36 2 33 

FB070 19 x 12 x 60 3 50 

HEAVY GAUGE 

SECURITY CABINETS 

These high security, fire resistant, double wall cabinets feature 

14 and 18 gauge steel construction, pick resistant 

Medeco locks, and four adjustable shelves. Two models are 

available, for storage of dangerous and hazardous flammables 

Model FB075 or for storage of valuable items Model 

FB080 with carpet lined shelves. 



FB075 34 x 18 x 65 325 

FB080 34 x 18 x 65 325 


577


578 



WELDED STORAGE CABINETS 


Combination Type 


Wardrobe Type 

The all-welded steel storage cabinet is still the best choice for your office, plant, school and 

institutional storage needs. Standard features include: fully adjustable shelves; recessed 

handle; cylinder lock; and coat rods (wardrobe and combination types). Choose from Hi- 

Boy, Lo-Boy, Wardrobe, and Combination cabinets in Grey, Beige or Black enamel finish. 

Additional shelves are available. 


Hi-Boy Type 

HEAVY-DUTY STORAGE CABINET JUMBO STORAGE CABINET 

Model No. FB021 Model No. FB051 

For any industrial application where wear and tear takes its toll on general duty cabinets. 

This all-welded 20 gauge steel cabinet features four adjustable shelves, lock and handle. 

Finished in grey enamel. Additional shelves are available. 


No. Description H" x W" x D" lbs. 

FB021 Cabinet 72 x 36 x 18 185 

FB022 Add’l shelf 1 x 36 x 18 8 


Lo-Boy Type 

Model No. Dimensions Wt 

Description Grey Beige Black H" x W" x D" lbs. 

Hi-Boy FB039 FB034 FB029 72 x 36 x 18 140 

Wardrobe FB040 FB035 FB030 72 x 36 x 18 121 

Combination FB041 FB036 FB031 72 x 36 x 18 144 

Lo-Boy FB038 FB033 FB028 40 x 36 x 18 90 

Add'l shelf FB037 FB032 FB027 1 x 36 x 18 6.5 

® 

The highest capacity cabinet available to store large, bulky items securely: 78" H x 48" W x 

24" D. Four adjustable shelves, lock and handle are included. Shipped knocked-down and 

easily assembled. Choose Grey or Beige enamel finish. Additional shelves available. 

Model No. Wt. 

Grey Beige Description lbs. 

FB051 FB049 Cabinet 250 

FB054 FB050 Add'l shelf 20

DATA WORKSTATIONS 

DATA WORKSTATIONS 

These workstations are a basic industry 

requirement for a clean, convenient place 

to collect, display and analyze your data. 

The high impact yellow polystyrene panels measure 26" x 

13" for Models FD038 and FD037 and 9" x 12.5" for Model 

FF118. Used in Quality Control departments, production 

lines, laboratories and construction sites. 

MODEL NO. FD037 

Includes clips, two panels, c/w acrylic covers, utility tray with 

locking door, side tray, solar powered calculator, 3-2" locking 

casters and an 18" adjustable column. 

MODEL NO. FD038 

Includes clips, two panels and an acrylic cover on the 

sloped writing surface. Height to the writing surface 42", 

overall height 55 1/2". 

MODEL NO. FF074 

Has a 36" x 26" back panel for your blue prints and other 

smaller documents. The size of the sloped writing surface is 

26" x 13" with a 42" height. It includes a stationary base, 

acrylic cover on writing surface with two clips and three 

clips on the back panel. 

MODEL NO. FF073 

Includes all the above standard features of the FF074 plus 

an adjustable 18" stand, acrylic covers for both panels and 

a utility tray. 

DUAL & TRI STATION 

PRINTER STANDS 

Shelves can be positioned every 2.5" to 

accommodate the full range of machine sizes. 

Upright channels provide full internal cable 

management and accommodate surge protectors. 

Supports 300 lbs; includes locking twin wheel 

casters. 

Size: 29 1/2" W x 32" D x 49 1/2" H. 

Dual Printer Stand - Double your space by using the 

refold position flush against the wall. Receiving tray 

can also be attached to the back. 

Model No. OA314 

Tri-Station Printer Stand - Most versatile, triple 

station stand. Holds any machine combination of 

laser printer, ink jet printer, dot matrix printer or fax 

machine. 


HEAVY DUTY 

COMPUTER 

WORKSTATIONS 

Mobile workstation with pull-out keyboard shelf. 

Complete with surge electric and 8" pneumatic tires for 

transporting delicate equipment. 

Assembly required. 


No. L" x W" x H" Colour lbs. 

OD268 32 x 24 x 31 Black 70 

OD269 32 x 24 x 31 Grey 70 

OD270 32 x 24 x 31 Putty 70 

Model No. 

OA314 

Model 

No. 

FF074 

Model 

No. 

FD037 


Model No. 

OA313 

Model 

No. 

FD038 

WALL MOUNT DATA 

WORKSTATION 

This compact unit is designed for 

mounting to machines or walls, 

anywhere space is limited. 

Includes clips, acrylic cover on 

writing panel and a rigid 

mounting bracket with a 20" 

reach. 



Optional swivel arm swings the 

workstation into a 

convenient position. 

Total reach 43". 

WORKSTATION/ 

INSPECTION STAND 

Workstation/inspection stand 

provides mobility and protection 

for computers, printers, 

terminals, gauges and data 

entry devices on your shop 

floor. 

Stand Features: 

• Easel 24" x 12.5" to display 

process sheets, charts and 

graphs 

• Integrated 24" x 12" 

terminal platform, 24" x 

8.5" keyboard tray and 

1.75" wide pencil tray 

• Two 22.75" x 15.5" x 7.25" keyed alike 

drawers. Provides security for tools, 

instruments and printers 

Model No. 

FH100 


Optional Vinyl Cover 

fits 5" below top shelf 

ECONOMY 

WORKSTATIONS 

Moulded shelf and legs 

won’t scratch, dent or rust. 

Complete with surge electric 

and 4" casters (2 with brakes). 

Assembly required. Weight: 34 

lbs. Dimensions: 32" W x 24" D x 

27" H. 

Model No. OD271 Putty 

Model No. OD272 Black 

Model No. OD273 Grey 

RECESSED COMPUTER 

WORKSTATION 

Wood and steel computer 

workstation with recessed monitor 

compartment, pull-out keyboard shelf, 

CPU tower holder and 

2" casters, 2 with brake. Monitor 

compartment 

measures 20" W x 18" D 

with adjustment settings at 

15, 20, 25 and 30 degrees 

for ergonomic viewing 

capabilities. Tinted, tempered, low 

glare glass covers the 

monitor compartment. 


Colour: Red Oak/Black. Wt. 58 lbs. 

Model No. OE420 


579


580 


KLETON ® MODU-BENCH 

The open and pedestal style Kleton ® Modu-Benches feature a modular design that enables 

you to create the right bench for your application. A wide range of top sizes are available 

from 24" x 60" up to 36" x 72", with overall working heights of 34" or adjustable to 35", 36", 

37", 38" or 39" when leg extensions are purchased. 

The 22" or 28" wide x 32 1/4" high bench legs are made of 14 gauge steel. A universal 

stringer will provide you with a secure and stable work surface. When only one leg and a 

pedestal are used, leg gussets are required for stability. 

Back & 

End Stops 

Universal 

Stringer 

MODU-BENCH TOPS 

STEEL: Heavy gauge steel top with a reinforced wood core and a polyurethane grey finish. 

Overall thickness 1 3/4". 

LAMINATED WOOD: This heavy duty hardwood top is made from solid maple laminations. 

Overall thickness 1 3/4". 

SHOP TOP: For medium duty applications a 3/8" double sealed resin custom board covers 

a solid 1" hardwood core. Overall thickness 1 3/4". 

PLASTIC LAMINATE: Light duty top has a smooth white leather plastic laminate face that 

covers a 45 lbs density particle board. Overall thickness 1 5/8". 

TOP TYPE 

Steel 

Laminated 

Wood 

Shop 

Top 

Plastic Laminate 

* Other sizes are available 

Bench Leg 


FF912 22" Bench leg (single) x 32 1/4" H 14 

FF913 28" Bench leg (single) x 32 1/4" H 15 

FF914 22" Kit incl.: bench legs (pr.) 

FF916 28" universal stringer. 35 

FF920 Bench leg gussets (pr.) 2 

FF915 22" Kit incl.: caster bench legs (pr.) 

FF917 28" casters, stringer 40 

FG732 Set of 4 adjustable leg extensions 8 

Riser Shelf 

Drawer 

Lower Shelves 


FF979 Universal stringer 1 

FF934 Lower Shelf, 9" x 44" 14 



FF956 Riser Shelf, 9" x 48" 19 



FF704 Back Stop, 3" x 48" 8 

Size" Model No. Wt. lbs. 

24 x 60 FD031 72 

30 x 60 FD033 92 

30 x 72 FD034 110 

36 x 60 FD035 108 

36 x 72 FD036 120 

24 x 60 FD016 70 

30 x 60 FD020 88 

30 x 72 FD021 105 

36 x 60 FD026 105 

36 x 72 FD027 126 

30 x 60 FD004 88 

30 x 72 FD005 105 

36 x 72 FD007 126 

30 x 60 FD011 72 

30 x 72 FD012 86 

36 x 72 FD014 126 

Modu-Bench Accessories 

• Camlock with key 

• Riser Shelf 9" deep x 12" high 

• Single Drawer 18" wide x 21" deep 

• Back Stop 3" high x 48", 60" or 72" long 

• End Stop 3" high x 24", 30" or 36" long 

• Lower Shelf 9" deep for half depth or use two for full depth 

* Note: Bench legs now come standard with electrical duplex "knockouts" 

PEDESTALS 

Newly designed and re-engineered pedestals 

are now available in 6 different designs. All 

pedestals are heavy gauge steel, 18" wide, 21" 

deep and 29 1/4" high. *Optional bases add 

height in increments of 3". A maximum of 2 

bases per pedestal is recommended. Simply 

select a pedestal style to create a custom built 

workstation. All drawers are mounted on full 

extension roller tracks. Large drawers measure 

14 1/2" wide, 20 1/2" deep and 4 1/4" 

high. Small drawers measure 14 1/2" wide, 20 

1/2" deep and 2 1/4" high. Doors and drawers 

feature full length, 1" projection lip handle. 

Doors are reversible and can be opened on 

either the right or left side. Each door closes on 

a metal catch. All pedestals are two tone baked 

polyester (blue and grey) and scratch resistant. 

All doors and drawers have knockouts for 

optional locks. Mounting hardware included. 

*Unless otherwise stated all bench configurations 

assume the installation of one base. Any 

bench using a leg/pedestal combination 

requires one base for the pedestal for equal 

height. 

Open Style MODU-BENCH 

(c/w Steel Top) 


FF705 Back Stop, 3" x 60" 10 

FF708 Back Stop, 3" x 72" 12 

FF792 End Stop, 3" x 24" 4 

FF793 End Stop, 3" x 30" 5 

FF794 End Stop, 3" x 36" 6 

FG080 Drawer, 18" x 21" 21 

FH046 Camlock w/pair of keys .5 

22" Bench legs fit tops 24" deep/28" Bench legs fit tops 30" and 36" deep 

Model No. 

FG076 

Model No. 

FG079 

Model No. 

FG082 


FG078 Single Door Pedestal c/w adjustable interior shelf 51 

FG081 Double Door Pedestal 52 

FG077 Double Drawer, Single Door Pedestal 75 

FG079 4 Drawer Pedestal 97 

FG082 4 Drawer, Single Door Pedestal 84 

FG076 6 Drawer Pedestal 98 

FG084 3" Base for Pedestal 4 

FH046 Camlock w/pair of keys* .5 

FH047 Set of 4 keyed alike camlocks 2 

* For sets of keys to be alike specify at time of order. No extra charge. 

® 

Model No. 

FG078 

®

BALANCERS & REELS 

BALANCERS 

Balancers provide support for a variety of applications from light to heavy duty. Designed to enhance productivity, comfort and 

safety, balancers also protect tools from being damaged accidentally. Models are available in a wide range of capacities, with aircraft 

(steel/nylon) cable and a standard 360° swivel hanger for easy mounting. Tension adjustable units have individual adjusters 

and require a very light force to extend the cable and position the load. No force is required to maintain the load and a very light 

force to retract the cable and position the load. Ratchet locking models provide extra safety when using heavier tools and equipment. 

All models can be installed easily in minutes. It is strongly recommended that a secondary support chain or cable be 

attached to equipment suspended overhead. 

Model Mfg. Locking Mfg. Capacity Cable 

No. No. Model No. No. lbs. Travel ft' Duty 

FA124 GM-31 - 1 - 12 4.8 Light 

FA125 RB2 - 1 - 2 5.2 Light 

FA126 RB4 - 2 - 4 5.2 Light 

FA127 RF6 FA128 RFL6 4 - 6 6.6 Light 

FA129 RF8 FA130 RFL8 6 - 8 6.6 Light 

FA131 BF9 FA132 BFL9 6 - 9 6.6 Light 



FA137 EB25000 FA138 EB2500R 18 - 25 6.6 Heavy 

FA139 EB45000 FA140 EB4500R 35 - 45 6.6 Heavy 

FA141 JB06000 - 45 - 60 6.6 Heavy 

FA142 JB08000 - 70 - 80 6.6 Heavy 

FA143 JB09000 - 80 - 90 6.6 Heavy 

FA144 JB10000 - 90 - 100 6.6 Heavy 

SECONDARY SAFETY SUPPORTS (Recommended for use with overhead balancers) 

Model No. Description For Use With Balancers Max. Length" 

FA036 Safety Chain FA125, FA126 15 

FA147 Safety Chain FA127, FA128, FA129, FA130 20 

FA145 Safety Cable FA131, FA132, FA133, FA134, FA135, FA136 20 

FA037 Safety Chain FA137, FA138, FA139, FA140, FA141, FA142, FA143, FA144 12 

HOSE REELS 

Hose reels can be positioned for wall, floor, ceiling or truck mounting. All reels are permanently lubricated (Factory), 

equipped with dual main bearings, nylon guide rollers to reduce drag and abrasion and banded guide springs which give 

smooth automatic hose retrieval. A full flow shaft and swivel connection assures maximum product delivery. It is required 

that a flexible hose connection be used between source hose and reel inlet to prevent binding or misalignment. Adjustable 

hose bumpers allow any desired length of hose to be maintained outside the reel, Pos-i-latch latching system will assure the 

desired working length of hose. Four bolt mounting base assures easy installation. Full mounting instructions are included 

with each reel. 

• Low pressure (300 PSI) models - small capacity reel for general air or water applications. Standard hose 

included maximum temperature 150°F 

• Medium pressure (2250 PSI) models - designed to handle air, water and oil under pressure. Equipped with 

SAE 100 R1 AT one wire braid hose. Maximum temperature 210°F 

• High pressure (4000 PSI) models - Heavy duty chassis lubrication applications. Hose is a standard SAE 100 

R2 AT two wire braid hose. Maximum temperature 210°F 

Model Mfg. Max Hose Hose Hose Reel Dimensions 

No. No. Series PSI Length' ID" Outlet" Inlet" L" x W" x H" 

TN315 4435-OLP 4000 300 35 1/4 1/4 3/8 12 1/2 x 5 1/2 x 13 

TN316 5635-OLP 5000 300 35 3/8 1/4 3/8 13 3/4 x 6 x 15 

TN317 4625-OLP 4000 300 25 3/8 1/4 3/8 12 1/2 x 5 1/2 x 13 

TN318 7650-OLP 7000 300 50 3/8 1/4 1/2 19 x 7 x 20 

TN319 7850-OLP 7000 300 50 1/2 3/8 1/2 19 x 7 x 20 

TN320 D9375-OLP 9000 300 75 3/4 3/4 1 26 x 12 x 26 

TN321* D9300-OLP 9000 500 75 3/4 - 1 26 x 12 x 26 

TN322 5625-OMP 5000 2250 25 3/8 3/8 3/8 13 3/4 x 6 x 15 

TN323 7850-OMP 7000 2000 50 1/2 3/8 1/2 19 x 7 x 20 

TN324 5430-OHP 5000 5000 30 1/4 1/4 3/8 13 3/4 x 6 x 15 

TN325 7650-OHP 7000 4000 50 3/8 1/4 1/2 19 x 7 x 20 

*Hose not included 

POLYPROPYLENE HOSE REELS 

Corrosion free reels have high impact, lightweight polypropylene housings. Wall or overhead mounts are included giving them 

a 270° swivel. Free running pull out at one meter latching intervals. Use in fixed or portable applications, weight with hose 

approx. 25 lbs. 

Model Description Hose Hose Working Inlet/Outlet 

No. Hose Type Length' ID" Pressure NPT" 

TN303 Air/PVC 50 3/8 230 PSI 3/8 / 1/4 

TN306 Hot Wash/PVC 40 1/2 200 PSI 3/8 / 3/8 

TW121 Air/Water/PVC 50 1/2 230 PSI 3/8 / 1/2 

LIGHT-DUTY HOSE REEL 

Improve the safety and efficiency of workers performing light duty assembly operations, and protect expensive tools from 

damage. Constructed of non-corrosive components and high impact plastic casing, protects spring and bearings. Hose stop 

sets hose while ratchet stops drum rotation at required length. Features swinging wall bracket and unique slot outlet which 

provides most suitable outlet angle. Ideal for pneumatic tools, workstations, compressed air cleaners and paint sprayers. 

Hose on the inlet side is not included. (3/8" hose should be fitted). 

Model No. Hose Length" Bore dia." PSI Wt. lbs 

TX675 26 1/4 150 8.4 

TX676 20 3/8 150 8.8 


Model No. 

FA131 

Model No. 

FA137 - 

FA144 

Model No. 

TN315 

Model No. 

TN318 

Model No. 

TX675 

Model No. 

FA124 

Model No. 

FA125 - 

FA130 

Model No. 

TN320 

Model No. TN303 


581


582 


KLETON ® INDUSTRIAL GRADE WORKBENCHES 

FG418 

2, 6 DRAWER PEDESTALS W/TOP 

Top Size" Wt. lbs. Model No. 

LAMINATED WOOD 

36 x 72 279 FG420 

36 x 60 257 FG419 

30 x 72 257 FG418 

30 x 60 239 FG417 

24 x 60 221 FG416 

STEEL TOP 

36 x 72 273 FG415 

36 x 60 260 FG414 

30 x 72 263 FG413 

30 x 60 244 FG412 

24 x 60 223 FG411 

SHOP TOP 

36 x 72 279 FG423 

30 x 72 237 FG422 

30 x 60 223 FG421 

PLASTIC LAMINATE 

36 x 72 279 FG426 

30 x 72 237 FG425 

30 x 60 223 FG424 

2 1/2 DOOR PEDESTALS W/TOP 



36 x 72 238 FG205 

36 x 60 217 FG204 

30 x 72 217 FG203 

30 x 60 200 FG202 

24 x 60 182 FG201 

STEEL TOP 

36 x 72 232 FG213 

36 x 60 220 FG212 

30 x 72 222 FG211 

30 x 60 204 FG210 

24 x 60 184 FG209 

SHOP TOP 

36 x 72 238 FG216 

30 x 72 217 FG215 

30 x 60 200 FG214 


36 x 72 238 FG208 

30 x 72 198 FG207 

30 x 60 184 FG206 

6 DRAWER & SINGLE DOOR PEDESTAL W/TOP 



36 x 72 261 FG475 

36 x 60 240 FG476 

30 x 72 240 FG477 

30 x 60 223 FG478 

24 x 60 205 FG479 

STEEL TOP 

36 x 72 255 FG480 

36 x 60 243 FG481 

30 x 72 245 FG482 

30 x 60 227 FG483 

24 x 60 207 FG484 

SHOP TOP 

36 x 72 261 FG485 

30 x 72 221 FG486 

30 x 60 207 FG487 


36 x 72 261 FG488 

30 x 72 221 FG489 

30 x 60 207 FG490 

FG493 

2, 4 DRAWER/1 DOOR PEDESTALS W/TOP 



36 x 72 275 FG491 

36 x 60 254 FG492 

30 x 72 254 FG493 

30 x 60 237 FG494 

24 x 60 219 FG495 

STEEL TOP 

36 x 72 269 FG496 

36 x 60 257 FG497 

30 x 72 259 FG498 

30 x 60 241 FG499 

24 x 60 221 FG500 

SHOP TOP 

36 x 72 275 FG501 

30 x 72 235 FG502 

30 x 60 221 FG503 


36 x 72 275 FG504 

30 x 72 235 FG505 

30 x 60 221 FG506 

FG203 FG685 

SINGLE DOOR PEDESTALS W/TOP 



36 x 72 182 FG683 

36 x 60 202 FG684 

30 x 72 220 FG685 

30 x 60 218 FG686 

24 x 60 230 FG687 

STEEL TOP 

36 x 72 180 FG688 

36 x 60 198 FG689 

30 x 72 215 FG690 

30 x 60 215 FG691 

24 x 60 236 FG692 

SHOP TOP 

36 x 72 198 FG693 

30 x 72 215 FG694 

30 x 60 236 FG695 


36 x 72 182 FG696 

30 x 72 196 FG697 

30 x 60 236 FG698 

FG477 FG637 

6 DRAWER & ONE LEG W/TOP 



36 x 72 210 FG635 

36 x 60 189 FG636 

30 x 72 189 FG637 

30 x 60 172 FG638 

24 x 60 154 FG639 

STEEL TOP 

36 x 72 204 FG640 

36 x 60 192 FG641 

30 x 72 194 FG642 

30 x 60 176 FG643 

24 x 60 156 FG644 

SHOP TOP 

36 x 72 210 FG645 

30 x 72 170 FG646 

30 x 60 156 FG647 


36 x 72 210 FG648 

30 x 72 170 FG649 

30 x 60 156 FG650 

2 FOUR DRAWER PEDESTALS W/TOP 



36 x 72 266 FG221 

36 x 60 245 FG220 

30 x 72 245 FG219 

30 x 60 228 FG218 

24 x 60 210 FG217 

STEEL TOP 

36 x 72 260 FG229 

36 x 60 248 FG228 

30 x 72 250 FG227 

30 x 60 232 FG226 

24 x 60 212 FG225 

SHOP TOP 

36 x 72 266 FG232 

30 x 72 226 FG231 

30 x 60 212 FG230 


36 x 72 266 FG224 

30 x 72 226 FG223 

30 x 60 212 FG222 

2 LEGS, DRAWER, SHELF W/TOP 



36 x 72 218 FG285 

36 x 60 193 FG284 

30 x 72 197 FG283 

30 x 60 176 FG282 

24 x 60 158 FG281 

STEEL TOP 

36 x 72 212 FG293 

36 x 60 196 FG292 

30 x 72 202 FG291 

30 x 60 180 FG290 

24 x 60 160 FG289 

SHOP TOP 

36 x 72 218 FG296 

30 x 72 193 FG295 

30 x 60 176 FG294 


36 x 72 218 FG288 

30 x 72 174 FG287 

30 x 60 160 FG286 

6 DRAWER & DOUBLE 

DOOR PEDESTAL W/TOP 



36 x 72 271 FG459 

36 x 60 250 FG460 

30 x 72 250 FG461 

30 x 60 233 FG462 

24 x 60 215 FG463 

STEEL TOP 

36 x 72 265 FG464 

36 x 60 253 FG465 

30 x 72 255 FG466 

30 x 60 237 FG467 

24 x 60 217 FG468 

SHOP TOP 

36 x 72 271 FG469 

30 x 72 231 FG470 

30 x 60 217 FG471 


36 x 72 271 FG472 

30 x 72 231 FG473 

30 x 60 217 FG474 

FG219 FG235 

FG283 

FG461 

2 1/2 DOOR, 2 DRAWER PEDESTALS W/TOP 



36 x 72 238 FG237 

36 x 60 217 FG236 

30 x 72 217 FG235 

30 x 60 200 FG234 

24 x 60 182 FG233 

STEEL TOP 

36 x 72 232 FG245 

36 x 60 220 FG244 

30 x 72 222 FG243 

30 x 60 204 FG242 

24 x 60 184 FG241 

SHOP TOP 

36 x 72 238 FG248 

30 x 72 217 FG247 

30 x 60 200 FG246 



30 x 72 198 FG239 

30 x 60 184 FG238 

FG434 

6 & 4 DRAWER/1 DOOR PEDESTAL W/TOP 



36 x 72 276 FG436 

36 x 60 255 FG435 

30 x 72 255 FG434 

30 x 60 238 FG433 

24 x 60 220 FG432 

STEEL TOP 

36 x 72 270 FG431 

36 x 60 258 FG430 

30 x 72 260 FG429 

30 x 60 242 FG428 

24 x 60 222 FG427 

SHOP TOP 

36 x 72 276 FG439 

30 x 72 236 FG438 

30 x 60 222 FG437 


36 x 72 276 FG442 

30 x 72 236 FG441 


FG251 

LEG AND SINGLE DOOR PEDESTAL W/TOP 



36 x 72 183 FG253 

36 x 60 162 FG252 

30 x 72 162 FG251 

30 x 60 145 FG250 

24 x 60 127 FG249 

STEEL TOP 

36 x 72 177 FG261 

36 x 60 165 FG260 

30 x 72 167 FG259 

30 x 60 149 FG258 

24 x 60 129 FG257 

SHOP TOP 

36 x 72 183 FG264 

30 x 72 162 FG263 

30 x 60 145 FG262 


36 x 72 183 FG256 

30 x 72 143 FG255 

30 x 60 129 FG254


INDUSTRIAL WORKBENCHES 

CABINET WORKBENCHES 

The versatile all welded cabinet workbench is suited for any industrial application 

that requires a work surface and secure tool and part storage. All cabinet 

benches are 33 3/4" high, with the cabinet itself measuring 30" W x 60" L. 

Cabinet colour is blue. 

Tops are available in steel wood core, laminated wood, plastic laminate 

or multi-laminated shop top versions, in 30" and 36" wide by 60" or 72" long 

sizes. Options include cyclinder locks to prevent unauthorized access, extra 

drawers and shelves. All components can be ordered 

individually. 

CABINET FORMATS (NO TOPS) 

Cabinet Wt. 

Format Includes lbs. 

FH393 Shell (FH165), 1 shelf (FH164), door set (FH163) 160 

FH165 Shell only 105 

FH394 Shell (FH165), 4 drawers 145 

FH395 Shell (FH165), 1 shelf (FH164) 120 

FH396 Shell (FH165), 1 shelf (FH164), 1 Drawer (FF369) 130 

FH397 Shell (FH165), 1 shelf (FH164), 2 Drawers (FF369) 140 

FH398 Shell (FH165), 2 shelves (FH164) 135 

Standard Formats: 

FH165 

TOPS (ADD TO CABINET TO COMPLETE UNIT) 

Top Size: 30" x 60" Size: 30" x 72" Size: 36" x 60" Size: 36" x 72" 

Type Material Model Wt. lbs. Model Wt. lbs. Model Wt. lbs. Model Wt. lbs. 

SW Steel/Wood FD033 88 FD034 106 FD035 108 FD036 120 

LW Laminated Wood FD020 80 FD021 126 FD026 105 FD027 126 

PL Plastic Laminate FD011 72 FD012 86 FD013 86 FD014 126 

ST Shop Top FD004 88 FD005 105 FD006 105 FD007 126 

CABINET WORKBENCHES (COMPLETE UNIT - INCL. CABINET AND TOP) 

FH394 

FH396 FH397 

ADD-ON COMPONENTS 

Model Wt. 


FH046 Camlock w/pair of keys 1 

FH163 Door set, lock included 40 

FH164 Extra shelf 27 3/4" x 58 3/4" 15 

FF369 Extra drawer 18 1/2" x 20 1/2" x 7 1/2" 10 

TOP TYPE 

CABINET STEEL/WOOD LAMINATED WOOD PLASTIC LAMINATE SHOP TOP 

FORMAT 30X60 30X72 36X60 36X72 30X60 30X72 36X60 36X72 30X60 30X72 36X60 36X72 30X60 30X72 36X60 36X72 

FH393 FH179 FH180 FH181 FH182 FH166 FH167 FH168 FH169 FH170 FH171 FH172 FH173 FH175 FH176 FH177 FH178 



FH395 FH263 FH264 FH265 FH266 FH238 FH239 FH240 FH241 FH242 FH243 FH244 FH245 FH259 FH260 FH261 FH262 




FH395 

FH398 

FH393 

® 


583


584 


INDUSTRIAL WORKBENCHES 

EXTRA HEAVY DUTY WORKBENCHES 

ALL WELDED BENCHES 

The most solid workbenches available, these all welded Kleton ® Workbenches feature a 

wood filled 3/16" steel top with 11 gauge steel legs and stringers for extra 

strength and rigidity. Bolt-down footplates are standard. Overall height is 34". 

Colour: Blue. 



FF494 72 x 30 x 34 290 

FF495 72 x 36 x 34 360 

These machine stands are designed for use as a 

machinery stand, or as a work table when a full 

sized workbench is not necessary. Features include: 

all welded 14 gauge steel; 2" lip-down shelves; bolt 

down footplates on each leg, and blue enamel finish. 

® 

5000 lbs. Capacity 

All-Welded Bench 

HEAVY-DUTY MACHINE STANDS 

® 

ECONOMY GRADE 

OPEN WORKBENCHES 

These workbenches meet virtually every strength requirement for light 

manufacturing, assembly operations, maintenance service etc... 

Features include: heavy gauge 

adjustable legs from 28" to 33"; 

front and back electrical 

knockouts; and a 12" wide lower 

shelf. Select either the 

Model No. FH214 

all purpose version, featuring a 1" 

presswood top, or the plastic top 

version, featuring a 1 1/2" grey laminated 

plastic surface, widely used in 

electronics, 

laboratories, and institutions. 

Optional drawer Model FH271 can be 

easily added to all models. 


No. Description W" x D" lbs. 

FH213 1" presswood top 48 x 24 70 





FF649 1 1/2" plastic top 48 x 24 77 



FH271 Optional drawer only 18 x 12 12 

Model Dimensions Cap. Wt. 

No. W" x D" x H" lbs. lbs. 

FH268 30 x 18 x 32 1500 60 

FH269 36 x 24 x 32 1500 70 

FH270 48 x 24 x 32 1000 85 

® 

PEDESTAL BENCHES 

Designed for workshop applications, these Kleton ® benches feature a 1 3/4" thick solid laminated 

hardwood top mounted on a pair of all-welded pedestals with 2 shelves, 18" W x 24" 

D x 32" H each. Overall height is 34". 

Pedestal colour is blue. 

2500 lbs. Capacity 

Pedestal Bench 


No. W" x D"* x H" lbs. 

FF120 60 x 30 x 34 158 

FF121 72 x 30 x 34 175 

FF122 84 x 30 x 34 192 

FF119 120 x 30 x 34 245 

*36" deep units available upon request. 


KNOCK DOWN, FOLD-UP, 

INDUSTRIAL WORKBENCH 

• Top shelves fold down 

• Can be set up by one person in 17 minutes 

(10 screws, 2 shelves to attach, two side bolts to tighten) 

• Wood tops on all three units, bordered by 1 1/4" steel tubing 

• 5 gallon paint can easily fits on bottom shelf 

• Expanded metal top shelf for convenient tool holding ( See Inset ) 


No. Description W" x H" 

FG733 Standard Duty 24 x 72 

FG734 Standard Duty 24 x 72 

FG735 Heavy Duty 24 x 72 

®

SHOP DESKS & CABINETS 

WALL MOUNTED 

SHOP DESK 

A space saver. The large 

34 1/2" W x 30" D desk top provides a 

convenient writing area without utilizing 

valuable floor space. 

Comes with three open storage compartments, and a 24" W 

x 28" D x 3 1/2" H locking drawer on quiet nylon rollers. 

Wall mounting brackets included. Long lasting grey enamel 

finish. Shipped knocked down. 

Model No. Wt. lbs. 

FH337 85 

DELUXE SHOP DESK 

4 drawers of filing/storage space and an 8 compartment 

sorter makes this an all-purpose desk for warehouses, 

shops and shipping and receiving departments. Comes 

with one tray drawer with cylinder lock, two double-deep 

file drawers with recessed handles, and one all purpose 

drawer. Desk top sorter keeps papers handy and organized. 

Use lower shelf for extra storage space or as a 

footrest. Overall dimensions: 39" W x 28 3/4" D x 55 1/2" 

H. Grey baked enamel finish. Shipped knocked down. 


FH392 163 

® 


FLOOR MODEL 

FOREMAN'S DESK 

Ideal for shipping and receiving clerks, 

watchmen and shop foremen. 

Comes with 3 open storage compartments and a 

24" W x 28" D x 3 1/2" H locking drawer that glides quietly 

on nylon rollers. Sloping writing top is 43" high at front. 

Overall dimensions: 34 1/2" W x 30" D x 53" H. Heavy gauge 

steel finished in grey baked enamel. Shipped knocked 

down. 


FH338 105 

OPEN STYLE 

SERVICE WRITER 

This unit provides a locking upper door cabinet with one 

shelf for added storage space. Comes with sloping writing 

top and large 25 3/8" W x 16 1/2" D x 3 3/4" H locking drawer 

with recessed pull that opens fully on smooth slides. Use 

lower shelf for extra storage or as a convenient footrest. 

Overall dimensions: 31 1/2" W x 21" D x 72 1/2" H. Tan baked 

enamel finish. Shipped knocked down. 


FH386 127 

CABINET STYLE 

SHOP DESK 

This solid unit offers the convenience of the floor model 

foreman's desk, with a locking cabinet for added storage 

space. Sloping top is a comfortable 

43" high at front. Large 24" W x 28" D x 3 1/2" H locking 

drawer and double door cabinet. Overall dimensions: 34 

1/2" W x 30" D x 53" H. Grey enamel finish. Shipped 

knocked down. 


FH336 150 

CLOSED STYLE 

SERVICE WRITER 

Same features as Model No. FH386 plus a locking lower 

door compartment with one shelf for storage of large/bulky 

items. Shipped assembled. 


FH385 171 


585


586 


MOBILE BENCHES & SHOP CABINETS 

MOBILE MAINTENANCE BENCHES 

Heavy Duty Mobile Maintenance 


Benches bring tools, parts and 

supplies to the work site. Provides a 

2400 lb. payload capacity. A strong 14 

gauge steel top with lip provides a 

tough work surface that keeps small 

items from rolling off. Equipped with 

heavy duty 5" polyolefin casters (2 

rigid, 2 swivel w/brake). Each drawer 

extends 100% on ball bearing slides 

for full access; both drawers and 

doors are lockable. Finished in tough 

baked enamel, blue cabinet with light 

grey drawers. 

Model No. FH350: 6 drawers in each end of this unit (12 total) give plenty of storage space 

for tools and small to medium sized items. All drawers are 18 1/8" W x 14 3/4" D with varying 

heights: (2) 2" H; (2) 2 1/4" H; (2) 2 5/8" H; (2) 3 5/8" H; (2) 4 3/4" H; (2) 6 3/4" H. 

• 100 lb. capacity per drawer 

• Door compartment with 2 shelves provides storage for larger, 

bulky items, 11 3/4" W x 23" D x 26" H 

• Overall Dimensions: 24" W x 45" L x 36" H 

MOBILE WORKBENCHES 

This mobile workbench station combines a workbench, security locker, service cart and 

safety cabinet. Allows you to keep the tools and supplies you need, at hand, where you need 

them. Mobile workbench is available in two heavy-duty models. Constructed of 12 gauge 

welded steel with a durable laminated work surface, 71 3/4" L x 31 1/2" D x 1" W. Large 

roller-bearing casters for smooth mobility with wide push/pull handle for easy control. Builtin 

floor lock secures workbench in place. Load capacity of over 2000 lbs. Removable 71 1/2" 

L x 10" D upper riser shelf provides additional work area. The 27 1/2" W x 27 1/2" D x 31" H 

security locker has locking handle with padlock hasp for additional security. Model FF990 

incorporates a flammable liquid storage cabinet in addition to the security locker, for the safe 

storage of flammable and combustible liquids at the worksite. Provides storage for two 5 

gal. cans or miscellaneous sized containers. Constructed of all-welded, reinforced 18 gauge 

steel. Leak-proof sill and 2" sump aid in spill containment. Bilingual warning label. 

Model Outside Dimensions Wt. 

No. DescriptionW" x D" x H" lbs. 

FF989 Mobile Workbench 73 x 57 1/2 x 32 3/4 504 

FF990 Mobile Workbench 

w/Flammable Storage Cabinet 

73 x 57 1/2 x 32 3/4 625 

Safety storage cabinet designed in accordance with NFPA and OSHA specifications. 

Shipped fully assembled and ready for work. Model No. FF990 

w/flammable 

liquid storage cabinet 

CABINET TABLES 

These sturdy combination storage cabinets and work tables provide safe locked-in storage of 

valuable tools and parts, while at the same time serving as all-around work tables. Ideal for 

mounting vises, grinders or small power tools. Heavy gauge steel. Cylinder lock built into 

handle on door for added security. Grey baked enamel finish. 

ONE SHELF CABINET 

24" x 24" work area with 2" lip. Comes with one full size centre shelf adjustable on 1 3/4" centres; 

12cu.ft. of storage space. 34" H. Shipped knocked down. Wt.: 80 lbs. 


LOCKING CABINET TABLE 

36" x 24" table top offers a large work area; 2" deep lip prevents supplies from falling off. 

Comes with one full-size centre shelf adjustable on 1 1/2" centres and 18 cu.ft. of storage 

space. Unit is 34" H. Shipped knocked down. Wt.: 110 lbs. 


THREE SHELF CABINET 

15 1/2" D x 21" W work surface can be mounted to form a 2" deep tray or reversed to provide 

a flat, rimless work area. Three adjustable shelves inside the 6.2 cu.ft. interior allow for 

concentrated storage. 32" working height; 34" overall height. Shipped knocked down. Wt.: 

46 lbs. 

Model No FF078 

Model No. FH351: 7 spacious drawers 

on the front side of this unit yield 

ample room for tools and smaller parts 


and accessories. Dra-wer sizes: (3) 25" 

W x 16" D x 2" H; (2) 25" x 16" D x 2 3/4" 

H; (2) 25" W x 22 1/2" D x 5 3/4" H (this 

drawer size only extends 63%). 

• Heavy Duty 160 lb. capacity per 

drawer 

• One door compartment in the front 

15 1/2" W x 17" D x 26" H and 

another flip-down door compartment 

in the rear 40" W x 5" D x 

14" H can hold almost any size or 

shaped item 

• Overall Dimensions: 

24" W x 45" L x 36" H 

Model No. FH352 - Optional Side 

Rider: Hook on the end of Model FH351 (above) for additional storage space. Features 8 

drawers and lockable door. 

Overall Dimensions: 13 5/8" W x 15 3/4" D x 26" H. 

Model No. 

FF076 

Model No. 

FF075 

Model No. 

FF989 

Model No. 

FF078


MOBILE BENCHES & TOOL CARTS 

TOOL TOTER CARTS 

For safe convenient storage of tools and 

equipment. An excellent addition to any tool 

centre. 

These efficient tool carriers are made for safe, convenient 

storage of tools and equipment. Don't waste time looking for 

your tools, jigs and other things that must be at hand. Each 

drawer in these units is 15 1/4" x 23 3/4" x 4 3/4" and has an 

individual padlocking hasp. Carrier is 18" W x 24" D x 34" H 

with 2 1/2" hard rubber swivel casters. 

Model Wt. 


FH210 2 Drawers 55 

FH211 4 Drawers 85 

FH212 2 Drawers & cabinet 93 

MOBILE SERVICE BENCHES 

Designed for moving heavy parts and tools to the job site. 

Provides a strong, maintenance free surface to 

work on. Choice of two series: 

Industrial Duty Benches (Kleton ® ) 

• All welded steel construction 

• 1000 lbs. capacity 

• 42" W x 24" D x 37" H 

• 5" x 1 1/2" resilex casters, swivel w/brake 

• No assembly required 

• 16 gauge welded steel construction 

• 18" W x 21" D x 4" H drawers 

Commercial Benches (Edsal) 

• Shipped knocked down 

• 800 lbs. capacity 

• 42" W x 24" D x 34" H 

• 5" x 1 1/4" polyolefin casters, swivel w/brake 

• Estimated 2 hour assembly time 

• 22 gauge steel construction 

• 18" W x 20" D x 5" H drawers 



INDUSTRIAL DUTY BENCHES 

FF980 2 Doors 235 

FF981 1 Drawer/1 Door 190 

FF982 4 Drawers/1 Door 275 

FF983 8 Drawers 300 

FH046 Cam lock w/pair of keys .5 

FH047 Set of 4 keyed alike cam locks 2 

COMMERCIAL BENCHES 

FF680 2 Doors 130 

FF681 1 Drawer w/lower shelf/1 Door 135 

FF682 5 Drawers/1 Door 174 

FF683 10 Drawers 218 

SINGLE PEDESTAL BENCH 

This rolling bench is similar to the Tool Toter but is available with 1" round 14 gauge welded 

tube handles for easy manoeuvring. Comes with non-skid rubber mat work surface for 

protection of equipment. Complete with 4, 18" W x 21" D x 4" H, drawers on ball bearing 

rollers. 4" grey rubber non-marking swivel casters with brakes. Overall size: 20" W x 21" D 

x 40" H. Cam locks for drawers available separately. Finished in blue enamel. 

Model Unit Wt. 


FF984 4 Drawer 98 

FH046 Cam lock w/pair of keys .5 

FH047 Set of 4 keyed alike cam locks 2 

® 




® 



Kleton ® Series shown. 



587


588 


WORKSTATIONS 

MAXI-BENCH WORKSTATIONS 

The Kleton ® Maxi-Bench 

mobile workstation 

allows you 

to bring your 

workstation 

to your work. 

These extremely 

practical units 

feature a sturdy 

30" x 60" wood 

filled steel top, 

and a heavy duty 

all-welded 

14 gauge steel 

frame, mounted 

on 2 rigid and 

2 swivel 5" 

phenolic casters 

(with brakes). 

Standard features 

include: 42" high peg board panel; double drawers; swivelout 

stool; lower shelf; and end stops. Model FF068 (shown) 

includes a fluorescent lamp; 25' incandescent drop light, 

and a 4 outlet power bar. Model FF069 does not include the 

electrical fixtures or wiring. Static benches (i.e. no casters) 

are also available. 

BENCHES COMPLETE WITH 

ONE ROTARY SHELF UNIT 



36 x 72 263 FG701 

36 x 60 242 FG702 

30 x 72 242 FG703 

30 x 60 225 FG704 

24 x 60 209 FG705 

STEEL TOP 

36 x 72 257 FG706 

36 x 60 245 FG707 

30 x 72 247 FG708 

30 x 60 229 FG709 

24 x 60 209 FG710 

SHOP TOP 

36 x 72 263 FG711 

30 x 72 242 FG712 

30 x 60 225 FG713 


36 x 72 263 FG714 

30 x 72 223 FG715 

30 x 60 209 FG716 

® 

Model No. 

FF068 

Model Overall Wt. 

No. Description Height" lbs. 

FF068 Mobile, Complete 76 435 

FF069 Mobile, no Electrical 76 415 

FF071 Static, Complete 70 425 

FF072 Static, no Electrical 70 405 

ROTARY SHELF UNIT 

Double (maybe even triple) the 

storage capacity of your pedestal 

with these rotary storage bins. 

Almost like having a shelving unit 

in your cabinet. Each shelf can 

handle 60 lbs. 17" diameter, steel 

shelf rotabin can be set up in any 

of the four configurations shown. 

You can double this by adding a 

second rotary shelf unit to the 

other single door pedestal on the 

benches illustrated. 


72" LOUVERED BENCH RACK 36" LOUVERED BENCH RACK 

Configuration #1 




Bench Rack 

Model CB364 all-welded louvered bench rack is designed to be 

permanently installed on a 72" wide workbench. It provides 

tool and storage for assembly or repair operations when combined 

with plastic parts bins. Racks may be purchased alone or 

in rack/bin combination. 

Dimensions are 72" W x 40" H. 

Bench rack weight: 95 lbs. 


CB364 Bench rack only 

RACK/BIN COMBINATIONS 

Red Blue Yellow Description 

CB173 CB172 CB174 Rack w/144 bins, 

Bin Size: 7 3/8" L x 4 1/8" W x 3" H 


Bin Size: 10 7/8" L x 5 1/2" W x 5" H 


Bin Size: 14 3/8" L x 8 1/4" W x 7" H 


Model No. 

FG703 

Model No. 

FG703 

Model No. 

FG703 


Bench Rack 

Model CB363 all-welded louvered bench rack is a self supporting 

workstation organizer. This unit may be placed on 

any flat surface near a worksite without the need for bolts 

or fasteners. Racks may be purchased alone or in rack/bin 

combination. 

Dimensions are 35 3/4" W x 22" H. 


CB363 Bench rack only 

RACK/BIN COMBINATIONS 

Red Blue Yellow Description 

CB146 CB145 CB147 Rack w/32 bins 

Bin Size: 5 3/8" L x 4 1/8" W x 3" H 


Bin Size: 7 3/8" L x 4 1/8" W x 3" H 


Bin Size: 10 7/8" L x 5 1/2" W x 5" H 

HEAVY-DUTY MECHANIC'S CART 


Model FF497 Heavy Duty Mechanic's Cart is a rugged 

workstation on wheels, featuring 12 gauge arc-welded construction. 

Consider it as a combination rolling tool box and 

workbench ideal for plant maintenance, set-up, repair or production 

operations. Standard features include: 1600 lbs. 

capacity 5" easy rolling casters w/toe brakes; tubular push 

handle; locking drawer; locking storage cabinet; 2" rim on 

three sides; 3 compartment middle shelf, and 10 steel stackbins 

w/bin hangers. Also available is Model FF496 which is 

identical, but excludes the steel stackbins. Blue enamel finish. 

Overall size 30" W x 20" D x 37 1/2" H. 

Model Wt. 


FF497 Mechanic's Cart, complete 147 

FF496 Mechanic's Cart, no bins 120

LOCKERS 

Rugged, all welded steel lockers will provide years of maintenance free service. 

Designed for use in industrial, commercial, mining, institutional, sports, educational and government 

facilities. Locker components are made from cold rolled steel and welded together, 

eliminating nuts, bolts and rivets. 

• Standard dimensions: 18" D x 12" W x 72" H 

• Scratch-proof recessed plastic pocket, with 10 gauge padlock hasp 

• Doors are completely flush to locker frame 

• Ventilation holes on frame cross piece 

• Single tier lockers include a hat shelf and three hooks 

• Double tier lockers have two hooks per opening 

• Frame is 16 gauge steel with three 90° bends for extra strength 

• Door frames are 20 gauge with full length 24 gauge double panel 

• Available in single, double or six tier configurations 

• Baked enamel light grey paint finish 

• Sloping top colour: light grey; recessed base colour: black 

• Standard in stock colour: light grey; beige also available for quick delivery 

Inquire about custom colours (subject to minimum quantities) 

TO ORDER: 

1. Select single, double or 

six tier locker. 

2. Select a basic locker with 

sloping top, recessed 

base or both. 

3. Determine the quantity 

of each bank (banks 

of 1, 2, 3 or 4). 

Note: 6 tier lockerette 

available in bank of 1 only. 


SINGLE TIER LOCKERS 

Bank of 1 Wt. Bank of 2 Wt. Bank of 3 Wt. Bank of 4 Wt. 

Type Model No. lbs. Model No. lbs. Model No. lbs. Model No. lbs. 

Basic style FC116 52 FC152 96 FC186 139 FC222 183 

w/Slope top FC125 56 FC161 104 FC195 151 FC231 199 

w/Recessed base FC119 56 FC155 104 FC189 151 FC225 199 

w/Recessed base & slope top FC122 60 FC158 112 FC192 163 FC228 215 

OPTIONAL FEATURES: 

Also available for all lockers 

• Cylinder Locks 

• Number Plates 

• Coat Rods 

• Chrome Pocket 

DOUBLE TIER LOCKERS 

Bank of 1 Wt. Bank of 2 Wt. Bank of 3 Wt. Bank of 4 Wt. 

Type Model No. lbs. Model No. lbs. Model No. lbs. Model No. lbs. 

Basic style FC246 53 FC270 98 FC294 141 FC318 187 

w/Slope tops FC255 57 FC279 106 FC303 153 FC327 203 

w/Recessed base FC249 57 FC273 106 FC297 153 FC321 203 

w/Recessed base & slope top FC252 61 FC276 114 FC300 165 FC324 219 

6 TIER LOCKERETTE 

Ideal locker unit for secure, private storage of personal 

effects and valuables where space is at a 

premium. Six vertical compartments, each is 12" W 

x 18" D x 12" H. 

Description Model No. Wt. lbs. 

Basic style FC330 56 

w/Slope top FC339 60 

w/Recessed base FC333 60 

w/Recessed base FC336 64 

& slope top 

Available in bank of one only. 

Sloping top prevents 

the collection of debris 

and is easier 

to maintain against the 

accumulation 

of dust. 

Recessed base raises 

locker 4" off the floor. 

® 

Scratch resistant plastic 

pocket. 

Optional features 

available: cylinder locks, 

number plates, coat rods 

and chrome pocket. 


589


590 


LOCKERS 

16 DOOR ARCHETTE 

An archette is ideal for areas where there is not much 

space. It will provide lockable storage for 16 people and a 

bar for hanging garments. Each compartment is 12" W x 

18" D x 12" H and includes a padlock hasp. Overall dimensions: 

72" W x 18" D x 72" H. 

Colour: light grey. Assembly required. 

Model No. Type Wt. lbs. 

FC347 w/Padlock hasp 123 

FC348 w/Cylinder lock 131 

CLOTHING 

EXCHANGE LOCKERS 

An efficient method to exchange dirty garments with clean 

ones. Each employee has access to their individual compartment 

and a key will open the master door for authorized 

access to all compartments. Made of 16 gauge steel frame 

and 20 gauge doors. Colour grey baked enamel. Available 

in 6 or 8 compartments. 

Overall Dimensions: 

Model FC009 & FC007: 26" W x 21 1/4" D x 84 1/2" H 

Model FC008: 32 5/8" W x 21 1/4" D x 84 1/2" H 

Model No. of Compartment Door 

No. Compartments W" x H" 

FC009 6 6 3/8 x 38 1/8 

FC007 8 4 3/4 x 38 1/8 

FC008 8 6 3/8 x 38 

Model No. 

FB001 

Model No. 

FB004 

LOCKER ROOM BENCHES 

A necessity for any locker room, these benches are available 

in a laminated hardwood bench featuring chrome steel 

legs that can be used freestanding, or bolted to the floor, or 

an all welded steel bench featuring angled legs for greater 

strength, with grey or beige enamel finish. 


No. Type Colour L" x W" x H" lbs. 

FB001 Steel Beige 72 x 12 x 17 35 

FB002 Steel Grey 72 x 12 x 17 35 

FB003 Wood - 48 x 10 x 16 1/2 23 

FB004 Wood - 72 x 10 x 16 1/2 31 

FB005 Wood - 96 x 10 x 16 1/2 39 

PERSONAL EFFECTS LOCKERS 

Standard 

colour: 

Grey 

One 

section, 

one frame 

wide 

(one locker 

opening) 

STARTER ADD-ON 

Model No. 

FC049/ FC052 

One 

section, two 

frames wide 

(two 

locker 

openings) 

Model No. 

FC050/ FC053 

EXPANDED METAL 

LOCKERS 

Diamond pattern steel mesh provides maximum air circulation, 

and permits visual inspection of contents. Standard 

lockers are finished in Dove Grey enamel, and include 6" 

legs to permit easy cleaning. Single tier lockers available in 

18" and 24" widths. Heights are 72", and depths are 21". 

Model Wt. 

No. Description Width" lbs. 

FC049 Starter 18 111 

FC050 Add-on 18 96 

FC052 Starter 24 135 

FC053 Add-on 24 118 

Model No. FC006 Model No. FC005 Model No. FC004 

Provide a highly effective security system for the storage of uniforms, linens, protective clothing, personal items, etc. Each 

of up to 16 persons can have the security of his own individual locker compartment, yet authorized personnel can open the 

large master door anytime uniform replacement or security problems arise using only one key. Compact design saves space 

and travel time; can be installed in convenient work areas. All models are finished in durable Dove Grey enamel. Model No. 

FC006 features vertical dividers in each compartment for separation of soiled/clean items. Shipped assembled 

Model No. of Compartment Door Overall Dimensions Wt. 

No. Compartments W" x H" W" x D" x H" lbs. 

FC006 9 19 1/2 x 9 24 x 16 x 80 3/4 122 

FC005 10 12 x 7 16 1/2 x 16 x 77 1/2 91 

FC004 16 12 x 4 1/2 16 1/2 x 16 x 77 1/2 106

VAN SHELVING UNITS 

TAPERED VAN SHELVING 

The highly efficient tapered design of these shelving units 

reduces the "dead space" between the van wall and the shelf 

unit. The useable aisle space is increased as a result. 

16 gauge steel construction on the end panels and shelves. 

Shelves have a 1" hemmed lip that provides additional 

strength and structural integrity. 

Crowns exclusive design allows the shelves to be mounted 

on a slant or straight. The shelf units are painted with a 

durable light grey powder coat finish, knock down design 

for maximum customization. 

Bolt on accessories create a multitude of varieties to meet 

any work need and storage requirement. Overall heights are 

38" for mini-vans, or 48" for full-size vans. 

All standard units feature 15" deep shelves. Choose from 42" 

or 54" width units for full size vans or from 30" or 42" width 

units for mini-vans. 

FULL-SIZE VAN SHELVING UNITS 48" HIGH 

A. Model VA035 B. Model VA058 C. Model VA061 

D. Model VA037 E. Model VA062 F. Model VA064 

A. Model VA035 42" wide basic shelving unit. 

B. Model VA058 42" wide unit w/4" bin fronts, plastic dividers. 

C. Model VA061 42" wide unit w/bolted bin dividers, bin fronts and 

dividers, 2 & 4 drawer cabinets, horizontal door. 

D. Model VA037 54" wide basic shelving unit. 

E. Model VA062 54" wide unit w/4" bin fronts, plastic dividers. 

F. Model VA064 54" wide unit w/bolted bin dividers, bin fronts & 

dividers, 2 & 4 drawer cabinets, horizontal door. 

BIN RACKS 

Bin racks are easily bolted-in to your service vehicle providing a 

unique storage system for parts and tools. Bin racks are available in 

stationary or slide-out types in 36", 54", 72", 90" sizes. Stationary in 36", 54" 

only. Slide-out racks eliminate the need to constantly be in and out of your service 

van hunting for parts and tools. Loaded racks easily 

slide out of the vehicle for convenient and instantaneous access to 

organized inventories. 

Slide-out racks can be accessed from the rear door street side, rear door curb 

side or side door. Racks may be ordered complete with bins as per formats or as 

racks only. Please specify plastic bin colours when ordering: Blue, Red or Yellow. 

Custom plastic bin configurations may be easily created for your specific application. 



Key No. L" x W" x H" 

FULL-SIZE VANS 

A. VA035 42 x 15 x 48 

B. VA058 42 x 15 x 48 

C. VA061 42 x 15 x 48 

D. VA037 54 x 15 x 48 

E. VA062 54 x 15 x 48 

F. VA064 54 x 15 x 48 

MINI-VAN 

G. VA040 30 x 15 x 38 

H. VA060 30 x 15 x 38 

I. VA066 30 x 15 x 38 

J. VA028 42 x 15 x 38 

K. VA063 42 x 15 x 38 

L. VA059 42 x 15 x 38 

MINI-VAN SHELVING UNITS 38" HIGH 

G. Model VA040 H. Model VA060 I. Model VA066 

J. Model VA028 K. Model VA063 L. Model VA059 

G. Model VA040 30" wide basic shelving unit. 

H. Model VA060 30" wide unit w/4" bin fronts, plastic dividers. 

I. Model VA066 30" wide unit w/bolted bin dividers, 2 drawer 

cabinet, horizontal door. 

J. Model VA028 42" wide basic shelving. 

K. Model VA063 42" wide unit w/4" bin fronts, plastic dividers. 

L. Model VA059 42" wide unit w/bolted bin dividers, 2 & 4 drawer 

cabinets, horizontal door. 

36" 

PLASTIC BIN CONFIGURATIONS 

54" 

72" 

90" 

For Dimensions Model Rack Only Model Rack w/ Bins 

Description Vehicles L" x H" x D" No. Wt. lbs. No. Wt. lbs. 

36" Stationary Rack Full sized vans 36 x 36 x 4 VA050 38 VA036 63 

36" Stationary Rack Mini vans 36 x 36 x 4 VA089 38 VA033 63 

54" Stationary Rack Full sized vans 54 x 36 x 4 VA045 60 VA032 97 

54" Stationary Rack Mini vans 54 x 36 x 4 VA096 60 VA029 97 

Slide Out Racks 

54" Street-side Rack Full sized vans 54 x 42 x 4 VA123 140 VA057 177 

54" Street-side Rack Mini vans 54 x 42 x 4 VA092 140 VA055 177 

72" Street-side Rack Full sized vans 72 x 42 x 4 VA118 195 VA051 244 

72" Street-side Rack Mini vans 72 x 42 x 4 VA117 195 VA048 244 

90" Street-side Rack Full sized vans 90 x 42 x 4 VA116 200 VA046 261 

54" Curb-side RackFull sized vans 54 x 42 x 4 VA121 140 VA052 177 

54" Side door RackFull sized vans 54 x 42 x 4 VA113 147 VA044 184 

54" Side door RackMini vans 54 x 42 x 4 VA110 147 VA042 184 

36" Rack Units 

includes: 

16-#30-220 Bins 

12-#30-230 Bins 

4- #30-240 Bins 

2- #30-250 Bins 


includes: 

24-#30-220 Bins 

18-#30-230 Bins 


3- #30-250 Bins 


includes: 

32-#30-220 Bins 

24-#30-230 Bins 


4- #30-250 Bins 


includes: 

40-#30-220 Bins 

30-#30-230 Bins 

10-#30-240 Bins 

5- #30-250 Bins 


591


592 


VAN EQUIPMENT 

HEAVY DUTY VAN RACKS 

The cross-bow type heavy duty steel 

rack system features a basic twinbow 

kit that includes ladder guides 

and tie-downs to accommodate two 

ladders, one each on both the street 

side and the curb side of the van. 

The basic bow kit may be upgraded 

by adding upgrade kits onto one or 

both si-des of the van. Basic and 

upgrade kits feature all required 

hardware to bolt-down or mount to 

drip mouldings. Lengths and widths 

are adjustable. All hardware is zinc 

clad and all metal surfaces are powder-coated 

with a durable exterior 

white finish. 

SIDE RAIL KIT 

Option kit makes storing ladders 

easier. Kits include a 

powder coated guide rail which 

guides ladders into position as 

they are pushed from below. 

Once in place a 180° locking 

handle snaps between ladder 

rungs holding it securely. May 

be installed on curb side or 

street side of van. 

SLIDE-DOWN KIT 

Add to basic bow kit, slide down option makes loading and unloading ladders extremely easy, 

no need to lift ladder above head which reduces injuries and damage. Special hold-downs 

keep ladder in place at all times. Installs on either curb or street side. 

Model For Wt. 

No. Description Vehicles lbs. 

VA269 Basic Twin-Bow Kit All Full-Sized GM & Ford Vans 40 

VA072 Basic Twin-Bow Kit All Full-Sized Vans 40 

VA156 Basic Twin-Bow Kit Ford Mini Vans 40 

VA069 Basic Twin-Bow Kit Chev. Mini Vans 40 

VA183 Basic Twin-Bow Kit Dodge Mini Vans 40 

VA071 Side Rail Kit All 25 

VA067* Slide Down Kit All 70 

VA161 Rack Extension Full-Sized Vans 10 

VA148 Rack Extension Mini Vans 8 

* For extension ladders over 29' 

PVC CONDUIT 

CARRIER KITS 

Create your own conduit carrier by 

using 4 1/2" or 6 5/8" O.D. PVC pipe with 

these easily assembled kits. Each lot 

includes 2 mounting brackets, 1 end 

cap, 1 door and all necessary hardware. 

Aluminum components. PVC pipe not 

included. 


VA155 4" diameter kit 

VA068 6" diameter kit 

MINI VAN PARTITIONS 

16 gauge, heavy-duty steel construction. Precision-formed wing panels reduce installation 

time by eliminating needless assembly and adjustment. Partitions contour to the vehicle creating 

a finished appearance. Powder-coated finish for durability. Mesh top panels are used for 

optimum visibility. 

GM Astro/ Wt. Ford Wt. 

Section Safari lbs. Windstar lbs. 

3 Part mesh top partition section 

LH (Steet side) VA280 31 - - 

Centre Door VA281 23 - - 

RH (Curb Side) VA282 22 - - 

2 part mesh top partition section 

VA283 62 VA288 74 

3 part plexiglass partition section 

LH (Street Side) VA284 3 - - 

Centre door VA285 2 - - 

RH (Curb Side) VA286 4 - - 

2 part plexiglass partition section 

VA287 9 VA289 9 

FULL-SIZE VAN PARTITIONS 

Full-size van partitions protect occupants 

against injury, prevent damage 

and provide extra security for van contents 

with steel partitions for your fullsize 

van. Modular design includes three 

sections (street side, centre and curb 

side) which may be solid steel, or steel 

mesh top for better visibility. 

Order sections individually. Constructed 

of heavy duty 14 gauge steel 

with a powder-coat finish for 

a smooth durable surface. 

Ford GM GM 

Dodge Wt. 92 & Wt. 95 & Wt. 96 & Wt. 

Section All lbs. after lbs. prior lbs. after lbs. 

SOLID STEEL PARTITION SECTION 

LH (Street Side) VA127 45 VA086 45 VA015 45 VA259 45 

Centre Fixed VA012 28 VA012 28 VA012 28 VA012 28 

Centre Door VA003 30 VA003 30 VA003 30 VA003 30 

RH (Curb Side) VA126 31 VA119 31 VA013 31 VA263 31 

MESH TOP PARTITION SECTION 

LH (Street Side) VA097 38 VA024 38 VA025 38 VA261 45 

Centre Fixed VA016 23 VA016 23 VA016 23 VA016 28 

Centre Door VA017 25 VA017 25 VA017 25 VA017 30 

RH (Curb Side) VA038 28 VA001 28 VA014 28 VA265 31 

LOUVERED PANEL FOR POLY BIN 

Centre Fixed VA077 28 VA077 28 VA077 28 VA077 28


STEP STOOLS, STANDS & LADDERS 

STEP STOOLS 

KIK-STEP Extra heavy duty steel Kik-Step comes with a 

double platform with non-slip rubber tread. Springloaded 

casters retract under slight pressure, forcing 

base to the floor. 11" diameter upper plat-form, 13 1/2" 

diameter lower platform. 15 5/8" diameter base has an 

all-around protective bumper. 

14" overall height. Wt. 10 lbs. Colour: Black. 

Model No. 

OC664 

LOAD STANDS 

STANDARD SINGLE 

STEP LOAD STAND 

• Ideal for use in top loading trucks 

• Provides positive gripping and stability 

• Durable and lightweight 

• Good in low temperature environments 

• Constructed of yellow high density, 

high molecular weight polyethylene 

• Dimensions: 24" W x 24" D x 15 1/2" H 

• Weight: 10 lbs. 

Model No. MF604 

LOAD/UNLOAD STAND 

• Large top step provides extreme stability 

• Non-skid abrasive tape on top surface 

• Six rubber bumpers on bottom 

• Non-corrosive, and non-conductive 

• Chemical resistant 

• Constructed of yellow high density, 

high molecular weight polyethylene 

• Dimensions: 26" W x 32" D x 20" H 


Model No. MF605 

INDUSTRIAL WOOD TWIN 

FRONT STEP STOOL 

ANSI Approved Type 1 - 250 lbs. Load Rating 

LIGHT-DUTY PLATFORM STANDS 

Tubular aluminum framing; hand rail for climbing. Ideal for 8 

ft. ceilings. Model No. MA619 comes with pail/rag holder, tool 

holder. Folds to 3 1/2" wide. Non-marring vinyl feet resist 

movement. 200 lbs. capacity. 

Model No. 

MA618 

Model No. 

MA619 

Model Overall Platform Wt. 

No. Height" Height" lbs. 

MA618 46 22 6 

MA619 54 22 8 

STEP STOOL 16" diameter base provides added stability. Tough one 

piece poly construction with anti-skid bottom. Glides easily on 

retractable rubber casters. Threaded top and expanded step. 

Capacity 300 lbs. 13" overall height. Wt. 7 lbs. 

Model No. Mfg. No. Colour 

OA299 2523BL Black 

OA300 2523BE Beige 

TWO STEP STAND 

• Safety yellow, high molecular weight polyethylene 

• Ideal for loading or unloading trucks/]trailers, 

warehouse order picking and general-purpose 

manufacturing use 

• Non-skid rubber bumper under base 

• Dimensions: 24" W x 30" L x 24" H 


Model No. MH080 

WORK STEP STAND 

• High molecular weight polyethylene 

construction 

• Large platform area 

• Rubber bottom bumpers 

• Dimensions: 35" W x 35" L x 16" H 


Model No. MH081 

Features: 

• Designed for 2 people - 250 lbs. capacity per side 

• Outside heavy duty hinges 

• Steel braces underneath steps 

• All steps fully rodded with steel truss blocks 

• Internal Pinch-Proof plated steel spreaders 

• 15 1/2" inside width at top steps 

• High quality finished rails with eased edges, angle cut bottoms 

• Ladder height to top step is 22" 

Model Base Cu. ft. Wt. 

No. Height' Width" Spread" Per unit lbs. 

MF486 2 19 1/2 22 3/4 2 12.5 

DOCK & MEZZANINE 

LADDERS 

One piece welded steel construction provides safe access to docks and 

mezzanines. 1" schedule 40 pipe with 3/4" diameter non-slip round 

rungs. Rungs are 18" wide, spaced on 12" centres. Wall stand-off is 

10". Pre-drilled mounting plates welded to frame, fasteners not included. 

Grey enamel finish. Choice of two styles: Walk-Thru models have 

handrails extending 42" above top rung. Side-Step models have step 

rungs plus 4 additional hand-hold rungs. Should be mounted with exit 

rung matching dock height. 

Number of Walk-Thru Side-Step* 

Climbing Rungs Model No. Wt. lbs Model No. Wt. lbs 

2 MA769 53 MA768 38 

3 MA771 59 MA770 44 

4 MA773 65 MA772 50 

5 MA775 71 MA774 56 

6 MA777 77 MA776 62 

7 MA779 83 MA778 68 

8 MA781 89 MA780 74 

9 MA783 95 MA782 80 

10 MA767 101 MA766 90 

*Side-Step models include four hand-hold rungs 

MA773 

Model No. 

OA300 

MA772 


593


594 


LADDERS & WORK PLATFORMS 

ALUMINUM ROLLING LADDERS 

Widely used in hospitals, banks and offices, as well as in pharmaceutical and food processing applications. Corrosion 

resistant, easy to clean. Non-magnetic. Slip-resistant steps provide sure footing. 4 spring-loaded swivel casters. Under 

operator's weight the casters retract and rubber-tipped feet drop down. All welded, one piece construction; ladders are 

supplied with unpainted aluminum mill finish. 300 lbs. load rating. Structural framework is 1/2" schedule 40 high strength 

aluminum tubing. 

Model No. Model No. 

# of Platform Overall Base 20"W Base Wt. 30"W Base Wt. 

Steps Height" Height" Depth" 18"W Steps lbs. 24"W Steps lbs. 

WITHOUT HANDRAILS 

2 19 - 19 MA702 15 MF599 22 

3 28 1/2 - 25 MA703 20 MF600 28 

4 38 - 31 MA705 29 MF601 35 

WITH 30" HANDRAILS 

3 28 1/2 58 1/2 25 MA704 27 MF602 34 

4 38 68 31 MA706 34 MF603 41 

5 47 1/2 77 1/2 37 - - MA707 49 

6 57 87 43 - - MA708 60 

7 66 1/2 96 1/2 49 - - MA709 67 

Model No. 

MA703 

STOP-STEP LADDERS 

It rolls when and where you push it, stops still when you step on it, and gives you 18" to 54" of firm, solid footing. One inch 

square high tensile aluminum struts, frames and braces. Heavy gauge extruded aluminum 16" x 8" cross steps with 9" raise. 

Long lasting 1 5/8" retractable casters allow the rubber base cups to grip floor. Comes complete with a ten-year limited warranty. 

Colour: Beige. Other colours available. Download rating: 300 lbs. OSHA compliant. 

STOP-STEP 

Model Number Top Step Overall Dimensions Wt. 

No. of steps Height" W" x D" x H" lbs. 

MD623 2 18 21 x 19 3/4 x 22 3/4 16 

MD624 3 27 21 x 26 3/4 x 31 3/4 22 

MD625 4 36 22 3/4 x 33 1/2 x 40 3/4 34 

STOP-STEP W/DOUBLE HANDRAIL 

MD626 3 27 21 x 26 3/4 x 56 1/2 32 

MD627 4 36 23 3/4 x 33 1/2 x 65 1/2 39 

MD628 5 45 25 1/4 x 40 1/2 x 74 1/2 50 

MD629 6 54 26 1/4 x 47 1/4 x 83 1/2 64 

MECHANICS/MAINTENANCE ROLLING LADDERS 

Convenient, double-straddle base puts worker in close proximity for hard-to-reach jobs. Tilt and roll wheelbarrow mobility 

allows for easy movement over rough surfaces. Oversize 24" D x 24" W top step for easier worker movement. Features 

removable 10" D x 24" W tool tray that fits on front or side railing and two 4" casters. 300 lbs. load rating. Blue enamel finish. 

Model Number Platform Overall Base Wt. 

No. of Steps Height" Height" W" x D"* lbs. 

MH212 3 28 1/2 58 1/2 25 x 44 85 

MH213 4 38 68 25 x 50 98 

MH214 5 47 1/2 77 1/2 25 x 56 112 

MH215 6 57 87 25 x 62 125 

*Includes casters. 

PORTABLE WORK PLATFORM 

Designed for lighter-duty maintenance work. Painted, slip-resistant 

work surface measures approximately 10 square feet. Legs foldaway 

for easy transport. Carrying handle. Maximum load capacity 

of 75 lbs./sq.ft. 

Overall dimensions 60" L x 21" W x 21" H. Wt. 27 lbs. 

Model No. MB121 

ROLLING STEP STANDS 

For use in record storage rooms, offices and warehouses. 

Rolls into position and locks firmly to the floor for maximum 

safety. Casters retract under operator's weight, rubber tipped feet 

drop down. 

Model Number Platform Base Wt. 

No. of Steps Height" W" x D" lbs. 

XX001 3 28 20 x 30 40 

XX002 4 37 20 x 41 46 

® 

Model No. 

MB121 

Model No. 

XX002 

Model No. 

MD624 

Tool Tray 

Model No. 

MA707 

Model No. 

MD627 

SAWHORSES 

Heavy duty aluminum construction, insures a stable work 

platform. Takes a maximum load of 1,000 lbs. per step. 

Slip-resistant feet. Available 

in 3 different heights. 

Sawhorses are 

sold individually. 

Board not included. 

Model Top No. of Wt. 

No. width" Height" steps lbs. 

MD293 30 24 2 10 

MD294 30 36 3 15 

MD295 30 48 4 20


WORK PLATFORMS & ROLLING LADDERS 

HIGH WORK MAINTENANCE PLATFORM 

Convert any forklift truck into a safe, 

efficient work platform. Take care of 

overhead maintenance problems without 

setting up ladders or scaffolds. 

Non-skid platform. 72" safety mesh 

backscreen on forklift side keeps operator 

and equipment away from lift 

mechanism. Simply slip forks into 

pockets and attach safety chains. Load 

capacity: 600 lbs. 

Model No. MD444 features an all welded 

construction; no assembly required. 

36" x 36" platform. 40" H railing. 

NOTE: Kleton Maintenance Platform 

meets or exceeds ASME B56.1 safety 

standard when a safety belt and lanyard 

are worn. 

ROLLING SAFETY LADDERS 

Ideal for use in warehouses and record-storage rooms; 

wherever there is a need to reach bulky materials. Ladders 

roll easily into position and lock firmly to the floor for maximum 

safety. 2 to 6 step ladders operate on spring loaded 

casters. Under operator’s weight, the casters retract and 

rubber feet drop down. Step off and the ladder is again 

moveable. The first step on all 8 to 16 step ladders activates 

the floor locking mechanism. Step off and kick release bottom 

step to again make the ladder mobile. Non-clogging 

slip-resistant steel steps on all models. Frame is constructed 

of rugged, welded 1" round steel tubing. 8 to 16 step 

ladders are shipped knocked down; easily assembled. 

® 

Model No. 

MD444 

Certified as per 

ANSI A14.7 

Model No. MA615 

Model No. 

MD948 

Model Wt. 


MD444 High Work Platform - standard 120 

MD338 Optional 6" caster kit 10 

MD948** Light Bulb Caddy 15" W x 15" D x 43" H 25 

** Mounts on Model MD444 platform. 

SAFETY BELT LANYARD 

EMERGENCY STOP SWITCH 

Safety kill switch for the person 

on work platform to instantly cut 

power to the forklift in case of an 

emergency. Consists of one control 

box for platform and one 

Plug-in box to be installed on 

forklift, and a wire that extends 

from 6 ft to 20 ft. Switch is easy to 

install, recommended for maintenance 

platform model MD444. 


Model No. SA018 

Used as a restraint and positioning 

device only, not for 

fall arrest. 


Model No. SA037 

Compatible with all belts and 

harnesses. 

Model 

No. Description 

MD328 Emergency Stop Switch 

SA019* Safety Belt w/single D-ring, Med. for waist 36" - 44" 

SA018* Safety Belt w/single D-ring, Large for waist 40" - 48" 

SA037 5' Web Lanyard w/locking snaps 

* Other Safety Belt sizes available from XS to XL. 

Model No. 

MA622 

Model No. 

MD328 

Number Model Platform Overall Platform Base Wt. 

of Steps No. Height" Height" Size" W" x D" lbs. 

WITHOUT HANDRAILS 

2 MA612 19 19 22 x 16 24 x 26 46 

3 MA613 28 28 22 x 16 24 x 30 49 

5 MA615 46 46 22 x 16 24 x 41 61 

WITH HANDRAILS 

4 MA614 37 78 22 x 16 24 x 36 78 

5 MA616* 46 87 22 x 16 24 x 46 89 

6 MA617* 55 95 22 x 16 24 x 51 100 

8 MA622 72 113 30 x 16 36 x 60 180 

10 MA623 89 130 30 x 16 36 x 72 230 

12 MA624 109 149 30 x 16 36 x 80 250 

14 MA625 128 167 30 x 16 36 x 93 275 

16 MA626 144 185 30 x 16 36 x 104 305 

* Only rear casters are spring loaded. 

® 


595


596 


SCAFFOLDING A. 

A. ROLLING SCAFFOLD 

Adjustable every 4 inches with a maximum platform height of 6 feet, this versatile mobile scaffold 

allows workers to safely reach a variety of heights. This compact unit can pass through 

standard doorways and down narrow aisles. 5" swivel casters with brakes. 700 lbs. static 

capacity. Overall dimensions: 6' W x 28" D x 6' H. 


B. MINI-MOBILE SCAFFOLD 

This sturdy, lightweight unit is easy to assemble and take down; compact for 

storage. Adjustable platform height up to 4 feet. Steel frame; two 9 5/8" x 45" steel platforms. 

Frame is painted using a polyester powder coating. 4" swivel casters with brakes. 500 lbs. static 

capacity. Comes with utility shelf: 23 1/2" x 8 1/2", 3/4" lip and holes for tools. O.D.: 45 1/2" 

W x 22" D x 50" H. Shipped knocked down. 

C. MAXI-FOLD SCAFFOLD 

This foldable scaffold has a platform adjustable at 4" increments. Comes standard with 1 piece 

frame assembly, three 8 1/8" x 75" steel platforms, and four 5" casters 

with brakes. Frame is painted using a polyester powder coating. 700 lbs. static capacity. 

Overall dimensions: 75.5" W x 29" D x 78" H. 3 ft. and 6 ft. vertical extensions available. 



A. MB035 Rolling Scaffold 150 

B. MB090 Mini-Mobile 51 

C. MB086 Maxi-Fold 129 

MB087 3 ft. Vertical Extension 40 

MB088 6 ft. Vertical Extension 49 

MINI-FORTRUSS ® MOBILE WORK PLATFORM (SM Series) 

The Mini-Fortruss ® from Louisville is a new concept in mobile work platforms. Weighing only 60 lbs., the Mini-Fortruss ® folds into a compact 6 1/4" x 24 

1/4" x 51" for transport. Unit can easily be carried and erected with no tools by one person. The working height can be adjusted to 12", 24" 36" and 48". 

Provides a stable 17" x 43" work surface along with 500 lbs. distributed load work capacity. Employs a spring-loaded, locking pin which automatically locks 

centre hinge tubes in place. Two-way positive locking casters provide a stable base by locking both the wheel and caster rotation. Includes 2 planks: 8.5" 

W (ea.) x 46 5/16" L. 

Model No. of O.A. Length" O.A. Height" O.A. Folded Wt. 

No. Casters w/casters w/casters Width" Width" lbs. 

MF422 2 46 1/2 50 3/4 22 1/2 6 1/4 58 

MF423 4 47 1/2 50 3/4 22 1/2 6 1/4 60 

FORTRUSS ® STEEL ROLLING TOWER SCAFFOLD (SS Series) 

Fortruss ® scaffolds offer four exclusive features unlike any you've ever seen on a scaffold. 

The scaffolds, including their guard-rail system are easily assembled or adjusted by just one 

person. Fortruss ® may be stacked, utilizing up to 3 units to a maximum of 15'. Outriggers 

are required when stacking over 6'. 

Features: 

Dual-pin adjustment mechanism - pistol grip for easy one-man height adjustment. Caster 

stem snaps into frame securely with no chance of caster drop-out. Expanded end frame 

tube ends with locking tab makes it easier to lock stacked sections or casters into place. 

Tightening 'L' knob for a better connection between the truss and end frame reduces wobble 

and increases stability. Dual-lock casters: 5" x 1 3/8". Rectangular steel tubing end 

frame with round rungs. Exterior grade plywood platform: 5/8" thick x 29" W x 65 3/8" or 

89 3/8" L 

Model Size End Truss No. Plywood No. of Wt. 

No. L' x H' Frames Assembly Platform(s) Casters lbs. 

MF424 6 x 3 2 x 3' 2 x 6' 1 - 112 

MF425 8 x 3 2 x 3' 2 x 8' 1 - 127 

MF426 6 x 6 2 x 6' 2 x 6' 1 4 154 

MF427 8 x 6 2 x 6' 2 x 8' 1 4 171 

MF428 6 x 12 4 x 6' 4 x 6' 2 8 418 

MF429 8 x 12 4 x 8' 4 x 8' 2 8 463 

MF430 6 x 15 4 x 6', 2 x 3' 6 x 6' 3 8 530 

MF431 8 x 15 4 x 6', 2 x 3' 6 x 8' 3 8 590 

SNAP-UP TM FOLDING ALUMINUM SCAFFOLD 

This mobile scaffold is made of durable lightweight aluminum. Simply fold and store when not required. Available in 

6' or 8' lengths. Includes 22" deck, cross braces, horizontal brace, end frames and four 5" casters with brakes. 

Capacity: 25 lbs./sq. ft. of platform area or one person per platform. 

Model Extended Size Folded Size Wt. 

No. L" x W" x H" L" x W" x H" lbs. 

MD291 72 x 29 x 80 1/4 10 x 29 x 80 1/4 116 

MD292 96 x 29 x 80 1/4 10 x 29 x 80 1/4 128 

B. 

Specifications: 

End frames - full height unit 29" W x 68" H (w/o casters) 

- half unit 29" W x 39" H (w/o casters). 

Width (assembled) - 29 1/2" (w/o casters). 

Platform height max. (w/casters) 6' unit: 6' 3"; 

12' unit: 11' 8"; 

15' unit: 14' 10". 

Load capacity - 6' L unit: 655 lbs. (50 lbs./sq. ft.) 

- 8' L unit: 450 lbs. (25 lbs./sq. ft.) 

Please Note: Do not stack higher than 3 units totalling 15 ft. 

Each set of end frames requires one pair of trusses and platform 

(incl. w/shipment). 

Outrigger kit and guard-rail/toeboard kit shipped with unit when 

platform is more than 10' above floor surface. 

Model No. 

MF424 

C. 

Model No. MF431

Low friction 

bearings with guide rollers 

ensure smooth operation. 


TURNTABLES & PALLET TRUCKS 

REEL DISPENSER 

The ideal method for winding or dispensing cable, chain, 

wire, rope and hose. Turns reel handling 

into a one person operation. Accommodates unlimited 

reel widths and all reel diameters 

with flanges up to 5 1/2" thick; 

rear roller adjusts to 6 positions. 

Heavy duty side rollers eliminate 

slipping or wedging between 

rollers and reel. Inclined 

ramp permits easy loading 

and unloading. 

Each unit measures 

28" L x 9 1/4" W x 4" H. 

3000 lbs. capacity 

in pairs. 

Weight: 

58 lbs/pair. 

Model No. 

MD166 

HYDRAULIC PALLET TRUCKS 

All purpose rugged pallet trucks. 

Quality engineered and easily 

manoeuvrable for quiet, 

smooth operation. 

5500 lbs. capacity. 

SPECIFICATIONS: 

Fork width: 7" 

Fork height lowered: 2.9" 

Fork height raised: 7 1/2" 

Overall length: Fork length plus 14" 

Roller diameter: 3" 

Wheel diameter: 8" 

Steering radius: 200˚ 

STANDARD DUTY HEAVY DUTY 

Nylon Wheels & Rollers Polyurethane Wheels 

Standard Frame Reinforced Yoke & Forks 

Colour: Orange Colour: Blue 

Model No. Fork Width" Fork Length" Wt. lbs. Model No. Fork Width" Fork Length" Wt. lbs. 

MA933 20 1/2 36 155 MA942 20 1/2 36 160 

MA934 20 1/2 42 160 MA943 20 1/2 42 165 

MA935 20 1/2 48 165 MA944 20 1/2 48 170 

MA939 27 36 170 MA945 27 36 175 

MA940 27 42 175 MA946 27 42 180 

MA941 27 48 180 MA947 27 48 185 

Other sizes and capacities available upon request. 

Warranty covers faulty materials and workmanship. 

1 year 

warranty 

® 

• 3 position hand control... 

lower, pump & neutral 

• Leakproof hydraulic unit with 

polyurethane seals 

• Heavy duty wheels and rollers run on 

precision bearings to move maximum loads 

with a minimum effort 

• Spring loaded handle 

CAROUSEL PALLET TURNTABLES 

Uses the Lazy Susan concept to rotate heavy pallets easily and safely. 

Loading and unloading operations that originally required a large amount of 

time can be done more efficiently with less fatigue and risk of back injury. The 

carousel may be added to an existing work bench, scissors table or simply 

placed on the floor. This Lazy Susan concept is constructed from two pieces 

of rolled structural angle. A series of roller bearings transfer the load smoothly 

and evenly to the supporting surface. Overall height is 2 1/4". 

Model Outside Capacity Wt. 

No. Diameter" lbs. lbs. 

MH204 40 2000 40 

MH205 40 4000 44 

MH206 40 6000 48 

LOW PROFILE TRUCKS 

These models have the same features as the standard duty trucks but with a lowered 

fork height of 2" and a raised fork height of 5 1/4". Designed for use with 

low clearance or disposable pallets. 

Available with steel rollers only. 


Capacity: 3000 lbs. 

Fork Width: 7" 

Fork Height: Lowered: 2" 

Raised: 5 1/4" 

Overall Height: 45" 

Front Load Rollers: 2" x 3 1/2" Steel 

Rear Steering Wheels: 6" x 2" Nylon 

Steering Radius: 200° 

Model No. Width O.D." Fork Length" Length O.D." Wt. lbs. 

MD681 20 1/2 36 50 155 

MD682 20 1/2 42 56 160 

MD683 20 1/2 48 62 165 

MD684 27 36 50 170 

MD685 27 42 56 175 

MD686 27 48 62 180 

4 WAY ENTRY LOW PROFILE TRUCK 

MD687 33 62 48 180 

2 year 

warranty 


597


598 


ALUMINUM DOCKPLATES 

Width 

Length 

Skid resistant safety tread deck. Bevelled edges allow smooth access from either end. Bend 

at upper end permits both ends of plate to lie flat. Steel legs fit between dock and truck; prevent 

movement when in use. High tensile aluminum alloy construction; no welds to break. 

HOW TO ORDER: 

1. SELECT DOCKPLATE WIDTH; 

add 12" to width of equipment to be used on dockplate. 

2. DETERMINE HEIGHT DIFFERENTIAL; 

the vertical distance from dock floor to truck floor. 

The height differential decides the necessary plate length. 

3. SELECT THE NECESSARY CAPACITY. 

Light Duty Regular Duty Heavy Duty Extra Heavy Duty 

Size Height Model Cap. Wt. Model Cap. Wt. Model Cap. Wt. Model Cap. Wt. 

W" x L" Diff." No. lbs. lbs. No. lbs. lbs. No. lbs. lbs. No. lbs. lbs. 

36 x 48 7 KH206 700 53 KH148 1700 71 KH193 3000 97 

42 x 48 7 KH207 800 60 KH153 2000 82 KH194 3500 110 

48 x 24 3 KH208 1800 36 KH154 4500 48 

48 x 30 4 KH209 1450 44 KH155 3600 60 

48 x 36 5 KH210 1250 52 KH156 3000 70 KH195 5400 94 

48 x 42 6 KH211 1050 60 KH157 2600 82 KH196 4600 110 

48 x 48 7 KH212 900 67 KH158 2200 92 KH197 4000 124 

48 x 54 8 KH213 760 76 

48 x 60 9 KH214 600 83 KH159 1500 114 KH198 2700 155 

48 x 72 11 KH215 400 100 KH160 1100 136 KH199 2000 184 

60 x 24 3 KH216 2200 43 KH170 5600 59 KH200 10000 79 KH328 15600 98 

60 x 30 4 KH217 1800 54 

60 x 36 5 KH218 1500 63 KH171 3700 86 KH201 6700 114 KH329 10500 141 

60 x 42 6 KH219 1300 73 

60 x 48 7 KH220 1100 83 KH172 2800 113 KH202 5000 151 KH330 7800 186 

60 x 60 9 KH221 880 102 KH173 2200 140 

72 x 24 3 KH222 2600 51 KH174 6700 76 KH203 12000 94 KH331 18700 115 

72 x 30 4 KH223 1950 63 

72 x 36 5 KH224 1650 74 KH175 4500 105 KH204 8000 135 KH332 12600 166 

72 x 48 7 KH225 1300 97 KH176 3300 135 KH205 6000 178 KH333 9400 220 

72 x 60 9 KH226 900 121 

DOCKRAMP 

COMBINATION 

For height differential 

exceeding 11", use ramp in 

combination with dockplate 

(above). 

1. Choose a ramp which, when 

combined with dockplate, 

will provide the required 

height difference. 

2. For maximum versatility be sure 

that ramp is shorter than, or equal 

to, the length of dockplate. 

Bevelled 

Edges 

ABOVE DOCK LEVEL 

Height 

Differential 

BELOW DOCK LEVEL 

Height 

Differential 

Regular Duty Heavy Duty 

Size Height Model Cap. Wt. Model Cap. Wt. 

W" x L" Diff." No. lbs. lbs. No. lbs. lbs. 

48 x 36 6 KH230 2000 57 KH240 8000 83 

48 x 48 8 KH231 2000 76 KH241 8000 108 

48 x 60 10 KH232 2000 96 KH242 8000 134 

60 x 36 6 KH234 2000 79 KH243 8000 112 

60 x 48 8 KH235 2000 112 KH244 8000 160 

60 x 60 10 KH236 2000 146 KH245 8000 203 

72 x 36 6 KH237 2000 96 KH246 8000 134 

72 x 48 8 KH238 2000 132 KH247 8000 186 

72 x 60 10 KH239 2000 173

ALUMINUM DOCKBOARDS 

Ideal for truck or rail applications. Curb design adds strength and prevents 

equipment run-off. Skid resistant safety tread deck. Bevelled edges allow smooth access 

from either end. Bend at upper end permits both ends of plate to lie flat. Steel legs fit 

between dock and truck or railcar, prevent movement when in use. High tensile aluminum 

alloy construction. 

Model Cap. Inside Width Height Wt. 

No. lbs. curbs" Overall" Length" Diff." lbs. 

KH149 4000 51 54 60 9 164 




KH161 6000 51 54 48 7 143 

KH162 6000 50 54 60 9 177 

KH163 6000 50 54 72 11 225 

KH164 6000 57 60 48 7 153 

KH165 6000 56 60 72 11 240 

KH166 6000 63 66 36 5 123 

KH167 6000 63 66 48 7 163 

KH168 6000 62 66 60 9 203 

KH169 6000 69 72 48 7 174 

KH177 8000 51 54 36 5 106 

KH178 8000 50 54 48 7 149 

KH179 8000 50 54 60 9 188 

KH180 8000 50 54 72 11 236 

KH181 8000 57 60 36 5 115 

KH182 8000 56 60 48 7 160 

KH183 8000 56 60 60 9 201 

KH184 8000 56 60 72 11 251 

KH185 8000 69 72 30 4 110 

KH186 8000 68 72 48 7 181 

KH187 8000 68 72 60 9 227 

KH188 8000 68 72 72 11 282 


KH105 10000 51 54 36 5 127 

KH106 10000 50 54 48 7 176 

KH107 10000 50 54 60 9 222 

KH108 10000 50 54 72 11 276 

KH109 10000 56 60 60 9 239 

KH110 10000 56 60 72 11 297 

KH111 10000 63 66 36 5 148 

KH112 10000 62 66 48 7 197 

KH113 10000 62 66 60 9 256 

KH115 10000 69 72 48 7 210 

KH116 10000 68 72 60 9 273 

KH117 10000 68 72 72 11 337 

KH118 10000 68 72 84 13 403 

KH119 12000 57 60 36 5 137 

KH120 12000 56 60 48 7 190 

KH121 12000 56 60 60 9 249 

KH122 12000 69 72 36 5 158 

KH123 12000 68 72 48 7 217 

KH125 12000 68 72 84 13 192 

KH126 14000 56 60 36 5 143 













KH139 16000 68 72 60 9 330 

KH140 16000 68 72 72 11 412 


KH142 18000 69 72 36 5 187 

KH143 20000 68 72 36 5 187 

KH144 20000 68 72 48 7 267 

KH145 20000 68 72 60 9 344 

KH146 20000 68 72 72 11 412 

KH147 20000 67 72 84 13 564 

Wheel Riser capacity: 

25,000 lbs per pair 


OPTIONS: 

RAIL 

DOCKBOARDS 

Fixed Spanlocks 

provide quick and safe 

access between dock and 

railcar, or between railcars. 

Sold in pairs. 

Model No. KH192 

Adjustable Spanlocks 

permit use of the same 

board on truck or rail 

docks. Easily adjusted for 

various spans. 



FORKLIFT 

HANDLES 

Makes movement of 

heavy boards and plates 

easy and safe. 

Recommended for boards 

and plates over 140 lbs. 



HOW TO ORDER: 

1. Determine required capacity: 

90% of gross weight for forklift trucks; 

67% of gross weight for powered pallet trucks. 

Example: 

Wt. of Forklift + Wt. of Heaviest Load = 

Gross Weight x .90 = Required Capacity 

5500 lbs. + 10,000 lbs. = 15,500 x .90 = 13,500 lbs. 

2. Select dockboard width: add 12" to width of equipment 

to be used on dockboard. 

3. Determine height differential: the vertical distance 

from dock floor to truck floor. 

Optional 

Forklift Handles 

DOCKBOARD/RAMP COMBINATION 

For a height differential exceeding 11", use a ramp in combination with dockboard. Each 

board can be converted to an equivalent-size ramp. 

Call us with your requirements. 

ALUMINUM WHEEL RISERS 

Ideal for use when the loading dock is higher than the trailer bed. 

Levels out trailer with dock; facilitates loading and unloading. 

24" wide. 25,000 lbs. capacity per pair. 

Bevelled Edges 

Model Deck Approach Overall Wt. lbs 

No. Height" Length" Length" Length" per pair 

KH061 6 24 21 45 124 

KH062 8 24 28 52 150 

KH064 10 24 35 59 178 

KH066 12 24 42 66 210 

KH063 6 36 21 57 164 

KH065 8 36 28 64 194 

KH068 10 36 35 71 226 

KH070 12 36 42 78 263 

KH067 6 48 21 69 204 

KH069 8 48 28 76 238 

KH071 10 48 35 83 274 

KH072 12 48 42 90 316 


599


600 


DOCK EQUIPMENT 

TRAILER 

STABILIZING JACK 

Keeps tractorless trailers level while being loaded 

or unloaded. Prevents accidents if wheel support 

collapses; stabilizes vehicle against load shifts. 


• 4" top plate with grease nipple 

• Lowered height: 36" 

• Raised height: 51 1/2" 

• 7 1/2" casters 

100,000 lbs. supporting capacity each. 

Lifting capacity 50,000 lbs. each. 

Recommended use in pairs. 

CARGO BAR AND HOOPS 

Prevent cargo from shifting and damage. No permanent 

installation or adaptation required. Quick installation and 

removal. Replace expensive shoring or bulkheads. 

One Piece Cargo Bar is all aluminum 1 1/2" square 14 gauge 

tubing that will not bend or give. Easy-to-operate mechanical 

ratchet will not slip or vibrate loose and works well in freezing 

and wet conditions. 4" square rubber protected end pads 

keep bar in place. Adjusts from 89" to 105". 

Cargo Hoops are constructed from galvanized steel and measures 

24" W x 29" L. Expands the retention area to secure a 

large area of smaller boxes or cartons. Installation hardware 

is included. Comes in pairs. 

MOULDED DOCK BUMPERS 

• Protects building and dock areas 

• Shockproof, tear and freeze resistant 

• Designed and produced by professionals . . . for professionals 

• Years of experience in dock bumper design 

• You supply the dock . . . we supply the Shockproof bumper 

Easy to position 

Easy to Operate 

One piece Cargo Bar adjusts 

from 89" to 105" long 

Model Face size Overall Wt. 

No. Type W" x H" Projection" Material lbs. 

KH005 Rectangular 11 x 8 4 Rubber with 16 

KH009 Rectangular 26 x 8 4 minimum 35% fibre 32 

KH007 Rectangular c/w frame 11 x 8 6 As above but 46 

KH010 Rectangular c/w frame 26 x 8 6 includes 2" steel 92 

backup frame 

PALLET PULLER 

The efficient way to unload pallets from 

trucks. Just insert... and pull. 

Safe: Used with chain and hook or cable and hook. 

Positive: Special replaceable hardened teeth give 

positive grip in any pallet with soft or hardwood. 

Lightweight: Under 16 lbs., small enough to 

leave on fork lift or van. 

Fast: One man operation. Pulls pallets straight or 

sideways to get pallets out of tight spots. 

Inexpensive: Pays for itself in a short time. 

Guaranteed: To pull any type of soft wood 

pallets loaded up to 5,000 lbs. 

Size: 12" x 16" 

Weight: 16 lbs. 

Model Wt. 


KH574 Bar 17 

KH575 Hoops (pair) 15 


Model No. 

KH586 

Hoops come complete with 

installation hardware 

Model No. 

KH005 

Unload vans 

and trucks 

in minutes! 

Model No. 

KH009 

Replacement teeth 

available. Ask for 

Model No. 

KH580

DOCK LOADING LIGHTS 

DOCK LIGHTS 

Flood trucks with light or spotlight work areas. Swings inside trailers or rail cars. On/Off switch. 

Bronze bearings at all rotating points. 3 conductor No. 18SJT cord. All docklights are UL listed and CSA approved. 

SWING ARMS 

Two piece wide footprint steel mounting 

bracket assures strong wall mount. 

Flexible, single strut light allows hori-zontal 

and vertical positioning; protects reflector 

head from damaging blows. 1 1/2", 14 

gauge square steel tubing. 

Baked on safety yellow finish. Uses PAR38 

or R40 bulb (not included). 

SWING AWAY 

DOCK LIGHT 

25" swivel hanger and base allows light to swing 

out of the way when struck: minimizes damage. 

The elastomer gently returns the light head to its 

proper position without abruptly "snapping back" 

the fixture. Reflector head swivels 140° horizontally 

in addition to normal vertical adjustment. 

Uses PAR38 or R40 bulb (not included). 

Model Wt. 


XA958 Dock light 27 

Accessories 

XA346 Lamp guard 2 

Model No. 

XA209 

Wire 

Lamp Guard 


XA213 Extends 40" 16 

XA208 Extends 60" 21 

ACCESSORIES 

XA209 Wire lamp guard 0.1 

POLYCARBONATE HIGH PRESSURE SODI- 

UM LAMP HEADS 

Energy savings. Double strut construction 

These lights use a 50W High Pressure Sodium bulb (Model XA339, not included) which 

offers a 63% energy savings over 150 watt incandescent PAR floodlights. 

Model No. Description Wt. lbs. Model No. Description Wt. lbs. 

XA615 Extends 24" 14 XA617 Extends 60" 21 

XA616 Extends 40" 17 XA618 Extends 90" 29 

ACCESSORIES 

XA339 50 Watt High Pressure Sodium Bulb 1 

HALOGEN DOCKLIGHT 

Halogen docklight features 40" extension arm jointed in the middle to provide easy positioning. 

Rugged 500 W quartz halogen light fixture has a tempered glass lens that is protected 

by a wire guard. Two adjustment knobs allow 

light fixture to pivot up and down. Includes 2 

bulbs (1 spare) and a spare bulb holder attached 

to the extension arm. Ideal for mounting next to 

loading docks and workstations to improve conditions 

when inspecting, unloading or assembling. 

Also, suitable for wet areas. Grounded 6' 

three wire cord. Safety orange. 

Model No. Arm Length" Wt. lbs. 

XA673 40 15 


ADJUSTABLE DOUBLE STRUT LIGHTS 

Adjustable dock lights have a knuckle joint 

which allows horizontal and vertical 

positioning. Constructed of 1 1/2" 14 gauge 

square steel tubing, two piece wall mounting 

bracket provides superior support. Comes 

with either metal head or polycarbonate head 

which will not dent, bend or break, and stay 

cool to the touch for easy positioning. Uses 

PAR 38 or R40 bulbs (not included). 

Model No. Arm Length" Head Type Wt. lbs. 

XA619 40 Metal 18 

XA620 60 Metal 21 

XA621 90 Metal 31 

XA622 114 Metal 35 

XA623 40 Polycarbonate 17 

XA624 60 Polycarbonate 20 



DOUBLE STRUT LIGHTS 

Rugged dock lights withstand rough treatment. Double strut construction won't sag: maintains 

horizontal position. 1 1/2" 14 gauge square steel tubing construction resists damage 

from impact. Baked-on safety yellow finish. Uses PAR38 or R40 bulb (not included). 

Model No. XA349, XA350 

Construction 

Shown with optional 

lamp guard 



XA211 Extends 40" 18 




ACCESSORIES 

XA209 Wire lamp guard 0.1 

STOP AND GO LIGHTS 

Loading Dock Stop & Go Light is a safety signaling device that 

alerts truck driver and loading dock personnel to the safety status 

of docked or docking trucks. 

• A simple, reliable and cost effective warning system that reduces 

the risk of accidents around the loading dock 

• Yellow polypropylene housing will not rust, 

pit or corrode like similar metal units 

• Shallow depth of unit (less than most dock bumpers) 

prevents damage to Stop & Go Light 

• Standard automotive bulbs are long lasting and 

inexpensive to replace 

• Integral eyebrow-type sun visors for tended visibility 

• Mounting holes conform to standard building specifications 

• Units can be used indoor or outdoor 

• Dimensions: 11 3/8" H x 6 3/8" W x 3 3/4" D 

• Lens diameter: 4 1/4" 

• CUL approved 


Model No. 

12VDC 24VDC 115VAC Description 

XA945 XA948 XA951 Stop & Go 

XA946 XA949 XA952 Stop & Go Light with On-Off-On push button 

switch and electronic solid state flasher 

XA947 XA950 XA953 Indoor/Outdoor application, set consisting of 

one of each of the above 


601


602 


WHEEL & RAIL CHOCKS 

RUBBER WHEEL CHOCK 

Highly resistant to abrasion, impacts, corrosion, 

sun, salt, ozone and oil. Steel ring on back. 

6 1/2" W x 9 1/2" L x 8 1/2" H. 

Wt: 10 lbs. 


IRON WHEEL CHOCKS 

Suited for your toughest jobs. 

ALUMINUM WHEEL CHOCKS 

High in strength but lightweight. Resists the effects of oil, salt, 

corrosion and weather. Non-sparking. 

Model No. 

KH023 

Model No. 

KH028 

Model No. 

KH587 

Model No. 

KH029 

Model No. 

KH022 

Model No 

KH017 

Model Chock Dimensions Wt. 

No. Material Colour W" x L" x H" lbs. 

KH029 Ductile Iron Blue 8 x 12 x 9 19 

KH587 Ductile Iron Safety Yellow 9 1/8 x 8 x 8 1/2 15 

KH017 Ductile Iron Safety Yellow 10 x 10 1/2 x 10 3/4 23 


No. W" x L" x H" lbs. 

KH023 6 x 7 x 6 4 

KH022 7 x 10.75 x 8 7 

KH031 6 x 9 x 7 4 

KH028 8 x 11.5 x 9 9 

URETHANE WHEEL CHOCKS 

Safety orange for greater visibility. Moulded-in hole 

through width of chock for attaching security chain - 

sold separately. 

Model No. KH024 Trailers. 

7.75" W x 11" L x 8" H. Wt.: 4.5 lbs. 

Model No. KH025 Off road vehicles only. 

14" W x 17" L x 14" H. Wt.: 25 lbs. 

Model Approx. Size Wt. 

No. Construction W" x L" x H" lbs. 

KH603 Laminated 8 x 8 x 8 14 

KH604 Laminated Jumbo 12 x 12 x 9 1/2 32 

WHEEL CHOCK ACCESSORIES 

SECURITY CHAIN 

18 ft. steel chain attaches chock to dock; 

prevents misplacement, theft. Comes with hook. 

Wt: 4 lbs. 


CAUTION SIGN 

10" x 14". Black letters 

on yellow field. 

Wt: 6 oz. 


RAIL CAR MOVER 

Spots railcars. Ideal for heavy service, especially where two loaded cars are moved together. 

Provides maximum power by means of a saddle-like shoe that engages the car wheel in a 

rolling knee action. V Grip spurs grip the soft outside edges of the rail; provide bite for 

powerful leverage. Hardwood handle. 70" overall length. Wt: 20 lbs. 


RAIL CHOCKS 

These rugged steel rail chocks provide an effective means of blocking railcars for safe loading and unloading. Steel points on chock heads bite into rail to prevent sliding. Standard finish in 

railroad maintenance yellow. Integral 7 1/2" x 9 1/2" sign reads chock. Single rail chock for stoppage in one direction; double rail chock for stoppage in both directions with rubber strap and 

hooks for greater tension. Choice of exposed (above ground) or flush (level with ground) chocks. 

Model Wt. 


FOR EXPOSED RAIL 

KH016 Single Chock 12 

KH021 Double Chock 16 

Model No. 

KH031 

Model Wt. 


FOR FLUSH RAIL 

KH015 Single Chock 12 

KH020 Double Chock 16 

LAMINATED RUBBER CHOCKS 

Designed to fit curvature of tire for a strong grip. Extra heavy duty laminated rubber and 

steel construction for use with heavy utility trucks and equipment. 


Model 

No. 

KH021 


Model 

No. 

KH015


DRUM WRENCHES & DEHEADERS 

BUNG NUT 

WRENCHES 

Opens almost any metal or plastic, male 

or female bung nuts or plugs. 13" overall 

length. Offset handle. 

Wt: 4 lbs. 

Model No. DA638 

Annealed ductile iron 


Non-sparking, manganese 

bronze alloy 

UNIVERSAL 

PLUG WRENCHES 

Fits virtually all steel, plastic and fibre 

drum plugs. 15 1/2" long for extra 

leverage and hand clearance. 


Solid ductile iron 


Non-sparking, zinc 

aluminum alloy 

DRUM WRENCHES 

Model DA641 is a dual head, hexagon 

socket wrench that fits over both 3/4" and 

2" drum plugs. Model DA642 is nonsparking. 

Model DA643 has a socket head 

which fits over 3/4" plugs and prongs that 

fit the crossbar of 2" plugs. Also fits other 

type closures. 

Model No. DA641 - 2.5 lbs. 

Model No. DA642 - 2.5 lbs. 

Model No. DA643 - 2.0 lbs 

DELUXE PLUG 

WRENCH 

Non-sparking bronze alloy wrench fits 

virtually all industrial drums including 

those with square or hex plugs, male or 

female bung nuts or plugs and fittings 

with lugs and crossbars. Features a builtin 

1 1/4" wrench for tightening faucets 

into drums; eliminates the need for extra 

tools. Wt: 2 lbs. 


DRUM STACKER 

Allows for the safe stacking of up to 

five 45 gallon steel drums. 

1 1/2" x 1 1/2" rolled angle, 1 3/4"H retaining clips 

24 1/2" outside diameter. Colour: Safety Yellow. 

Wt: 19 lbs. 



PREMIUM DRUM DEHEADER 

This premium deheader ZIPS off drum heads easier than any other hand tool. Simple 

design. Nothing to adjust or break down; only two moving parts. Works on 25 and 

45 gallon steel drums. 


Manual deheader Wt: 5 lbs. 


Repl. alloy blade Wt: 0.5 lbs. 

DRUM UPENDER 

This 40" long upender provides the necessary 

leverage for moving horizontal drums to a standing 

position. 

2 1/2" wide toe plate prevents denting 

of drum; 1 1/2" hook fits over most drum 

heads. Wt: 10 lbs. 


PLASTIC 

PAIL OPENER 

Use to open plastic buckets and pails. 

Unique leverage point ends cover distortion and 

cutting. Holds pail down while it lifts lid evenly; lid lifts 

off in seconds. Aluminum construction, 16" long. Wt: 

0.5 lbs. 


CAN TIPPER 

Handles 5 gallon round cans. 

Safety lock holds container. Dispensing 

height of 10". Folds for storage. Ring can be 

bent to accept square cans. 

Wt: 9 lbs. 


DRUM DEHEADER 

Opens any standard size and gauge drum in minutes. Contoured 

to drum radius; fast, one-hand operation. Leaves edge smooth. Constructed 

of fine forged steel with a precision quality steel blade. Wt: 6 lbs. 

Model No. DA312 - Drum deheader 

Model No. DA299 - Replacement blade 


603


604 


SPECIALTY BENCHES 

PACKAGING BENCHES 

These ergonomically designed workbenches will help increase productivity in your packaging area. They include a 

combination of various components. Select the bench best suited for your application. Shipped knocked down. 

Model No. 

FF431 

Consists of: 

1 - Standard Workbench FF338 (68" x 33") or 

PA812 (83" x 33") 

1 - FF341 Drawer 

2 - FF342 Roll Bars 

1 - FF343 Carton Shelf 

1 - FF344 Document Shelf 

1 - PA219 39" Cutter Bar 

Model No. Dimensions Wt. lbs. 

FF431 68" x 33" 225 

PA813 83" x 33" 243 

Model No. 

FH174 

Consists of: 

1 - Standard Workbench FF338 (68" x 33") or 

PA812 (83" x 33") 

1 - FF352 Straight Upright (set of 2) 

1 - FF342 Roll Bar 

1 - FF345 Sorter 

10 - FF346 Shelf for Sorter 

1 - FF347 Bracket for Sorter (set of 2) 

1 - FF348 Slot Wall 

2 - FF351 Literature Trays 

1 - FF343 Carton Shelf 

2 - FF350 Parts Bin 

1 - FF349 Slot Wall Hook 

PACKAGING STATION KITS 

A Work Wizard kit pre-engineered for optimum performance in your packaging operations. 

30" x 60" plastic-laminate tabletop is height-adjustable for maximum worker comfort. 

Single-bay slotted uprights provide support for tools and other modules. Spool holder and 

carton divider provide easy access to tape and shipping cartons. Power bar provides 8 

outlets; 6 front, 2 back. 

Model No. FG401 

ACCESSORIES 


FF662 30" x 60" Plastic laminated top 

adjustable-leg table 

FG301 Single bay bench mount overhead 

FG324 Small adj. Shelf 

FG329 Spool support 

FG341 Document holder 

FG322 Horizontal power bar 

FG334 Carton divider 

WORK 

WIZARD 

Model No. Dimensions Wt. lbs. 

FH174 68" x 33" 270 

PA814 83" x 33" 288 


30" x 60" Plastic laminate top 


Model No. 

FG341 

Document holder 

Model No. FG324 

Small adjustable shelf 

Model No. 

FG301 

Single 

bay bench 

mount 

overhead 

Model No. FG329 

Spool support 

Model No. 

FG322 

Horizontal 

power bar 

Model No. 

FG334 

Carton 

Divider 

QC/INSPECTION 

STATION KITS 

Pre-engineered for efficiency in your 

quality control and inspection applications. 

Includes a height- adjustable 

workbench with 30" x 60" plastic-laminated 

tabletop, single-bay bench 

mounted slotted uprights, overhead 

lighting, power bar with 8 outlets (6 

front, 2 back), and a video display 

platform with a keyboard tray. 

Complete Bench Model No. 

FG404 

Model No. 

FG342 

Keyboard tray 

Model No. 

FG352 

General 

lighting 

Model No. 

FG301 

Single-bay 

bench mount 

overhead 

SMALL TROLLEY 

WITH SHELVES 

Increases productivity by placing 

work material where you need it. 

Includes a small 36" tall by 30" 

wide trolley with casters, small 

shelf, and adjustable shelf 

which can accept 

loads weighing up 

to 100 lbs. (45.4 kg). 

Model No 

FG315 

Model No. 

FG340 

Articulating 

platform VDT 

holder 

Model No. 

FG322 

Horizontal 

power bar 


30" x 60" 

Plastic laminate top, 


BUILD YOUR OWN, FROM THESE PARTS 


FG342 Keyboard tray 

FG352 General lighting 

FG301 Single-bay bench mount overhead 

FG340 Articulating platform VDT holder 

FG322 Horizontal power bar 

FF662 30" x 60" Plastic laminate 

top adjustable-leg table

INDUSTRIAL SEATING 

DELUXE SWIVEL STOOLS 

These padded stools will provide workers 

with maximum comfort and support. The 

360° swivel motion is ideal for workers 

who have repetitive side to side movement. 

The seat easily adjusts to your selected 

height. Just raise or lower the steel rod and 

lock securely in place. All welded frame is 

constructed of 1" diameter 16 gauge steel. 

With a 3/4" circular tube footrest. The four 

leg cluster design has a 22" spread giving 

them optimum stability. Optional casters 

available. 

Model No. FC668 has a 2" thick foam 

padded seat over a 5/8" plywood base and 

a 1" foam backrest. Model No. FC670 has 

the same 2" foam but over a 1/2" plywood 

base and 1/2" foamed backrest. The colour 

is a black vinyl upholstery with Royal Grey 

frame. 

Model No. 

FC668 

Model No. 

FC670 

Model Adjustable Seat Wt. 

No. Height" Dimensions" lbs. 

FC668 25-31 16 x 17 33 

FC670 25-31 16 x 17 33 

FC675 set of 4 casters 2 

STATIONARY AND ADJUSTABLE HEIGHT STOOLS 

Stationary 

SWIVEL STOOLS 

For efficiency, comfort and durability select one of 

our economical swivel stools. With or without backrest 

these stools reduce worker fatigue and increase 

productivity. The seats are made of a 19 gauge 

embossed steel with 1/8" tempered hardboard inlay. 

The frame’s all welded tubing is 1" diameter 16 gauge 

steel. The circular 18 gauge footrest guarantees 

comfort and stability. Heavy duty rubber cushioned 

steel glides protect floors. All 

units have a 1" x 14 1/2" long 

steel adjustment stem for 

easy height selection. The 

backrest is 9 1/2" x 15 3/4" 

and is 4 way adjustable. 

Optional casters 

available. 

Model No. 

FC658 

Model No. 

FC661 

Adjustable 

A. B. C. D. E. 

Model No. 

FC665 

Model No. Adjustable Height" Seat Dimensions" Wt. lbs. 

FC658 22-28 14 19 

FC661 22-28 14 28 

FC665 17-23 14 1/2 x 15 27 

FC675 set of 4 casters 2 


SPECIALTY STOOLS 

Designed specifically for laboratories, 

medical offices and clean rooms. These 

stools are available with 14" diameter 3" 

high vinyl covered seat, pneumatic mechanism 

to adjust the height, and available 

with casters or glides. A full foot ring is 

standard on stools with a 23" - 33" 

adjustable height, optional on the other 

stools. 

Ruggedly built for long lasting service in a warehouse, factory, or office. Your choice of stationary or adjustable stools, with or without 

backrest. The all welded frame is a 7/8" diameter steel tube. The legs are braced with a 3/4" 18 gauge circular footrest for 

increased strength and stability. The 14" diameter embossed steel seat has a 1/8" tempered hardboard inlay. The Model No. FC656 

has a 14 1/2" x 15" sq. seat and is reinforced by steel bars. 

Model No. 

OC786 

FOOTREST 

Fixed at a comfortable 8 degree angle to relieve muscle 

strain. Removable 14 gauge platform has nine elevation 

positions which lock into place with a double 

locking pin. Finished with a black powder coat paint 

and textured anti-slip covering on the platform. 

20" W x 13" D x 21" H. 

Model No. 

FC684 

SCOOTER STOOL 

All steel construction and soft rubber casters with ball 

bearing movement allow the Scooter Stool to give 

rugged and versatile service. Features a tray shelf for 

tools or papers and a 300 lbs. download capacity. 


Ten year warranty. 

Model No. 

OC790 

Model No Adjustable Wt. 

W/CASTERS W/GLIDES Height" lbs. 

OC785 OC788 16 - 22 14 

OC786 OC789 21 - 28 18 

OC787 OC790 23 - 33 20 

Model No. OC819 (optional footring) for heights 16"-22" and 21"-28" only 

BIRCH STOOL 

Model No. 

OC860 

Can be used for applications where the use of metal is not recommended. 

100% all wood natural finish. Available in 2 heights. 

Model No. Height" Wt. lbs. 

OC859 18 11 

OC860 24 13 

The contoured back rest is constructed of 19 

gauge steel. On the adjustable models the telescopic 

legs have screw locks that adjust on 1" 

increments. All stools have four chrome floor 

glides that won’t damage floors. Colour is Royal 

Grey. 

STATIONARY HEIGHT 

Model Seat Wt. 

No. Height" Dimensions" lbs. 

A. FC649 24 14 20 

B. FC647 24 14 12 

ADJUSTABLE HEIGHT 

C. FC653 25-33 14 12 

D. FC655 25-33 14 20 

E. FC656 18-26 14 1/2 x 15 18 

Model Tray Seat Wt. 

No. Diameter" Diameter" Height" lbs. 

PA801 15 13 14.5 10 


605


606 




The high range series of industrial seating features a full 8" of pneumatic lift while seated. 

Exclusive new extension tube provides an adjustable height range of 17" to 35". Seats and 

backs are microcellular self skinning polyurethane foam which inhibits punctures, tears and 

moisture absorption. Large 26" diameter 5 leg steel base with 2 1/2" diameter glides ensure 

stability and safety even at the highest levels. Large wide angle footrests make it easy to step 

up into seat. 

Model FC680 

Features 20 degree 

back angle and 8 

degree seat tilt 

adjustment 

w/double paddle 

handles. 

HOW WAVE TUBE TECHNOLOGY WORKS 

Open Tapered 

Collet Drop 

into 

Lift 

base 

out Adjusts to any 

position up to 10'' 

ERGONOMIC SEATING 

Designed specifically for the industrial workplace, food industry, or any application. It provides 

workers with dynamic seating necessary for the maintenance of health and 

productivity. 

The ergo stool offers a black self-skinned integral 

moulded polyurethane foam seat and back for durability 

and ease of maintenance. The stool features proper 

lumbar support, swivel and waterfall seat and three 

pneumatic height adjustments. 

Model Adjustable 

No. Description Height" 

FC677 (No footring) 

2" Swivel Carpet Casters 16 - 22 

FC678 2" Swivel Carpet Casters 20 - 29 

FC679 2" Swivel Carpet Casters 23 - 33 

OD513 (No footring) 

w/ Glides 16 - 22 

OD514 w/ Glides 20 - 29 

OD515 w/ Glides 23 - 33 

FC677 

Model FC681 

Features 3" back 

rest height and 3" 

back rest depth 

adjustment. 


Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 

Model Dimensions" 

No. Seat Backrest Footrests 

FC680 18 1/2 x 17 15 3/4 x 9 3 

FC681 16 1/4 x 16 1/4 14 1/2 x 9 1 

SHOPTECH ERGONOMIC 

INDUSTRIAL STOOLS 

Industrial seating that brings ergonomic comfort and 

productivity to the shop floor, the laboratory or the shipping 

office. Durable, easy to clean, moulded polyurethane 

seating is the perfect solution for clean rooms or wipe 

down applications. 

Model No. OE088 has an overall height of 16- 

21" with a 19" wide by 14" deep seat. 

Model No. OE089 Sit/Stand has an overall 

height of 26-36", seat is 13.5" W x 9.5" D with 

a 5" H x 6" W back. 

Model Wt. No. 

Description lbs. 

OE088 Stool 20 

OE089 Sit/Stand 19 

SIT/STAND STOOLS 

Sit/stand stools dramatically reduce fatigue for 

workers unable to sit down on the job. Can be 

positioned for up close work. Model FC683 heavy 

gauge triangular glides provide safety, features a 

built-in footrest, a 15" wide x 13 7/8" high self 

skinning polyurethane seat mounted to an 

adjustable spring suspension frame that automatically 

tilts forward up to 15 degrees while in use. 

Removable seat attaches to frame with a double 

pin locking system which easily adjusts to 12 

positions from 21" to 35". Model FC685 features a 

sturdy, tip proof 5 leg base with a padded comfortable 

"Bicycle style" seat. Pneumatic height 

adjustment from 23 1/2" to 33 1/2". 

FC683 FC685 

Model No. Description Model No. Description 

FC683 Manual Adjustment FC685 Pneumatic Adjustment 

PNEUMATIC SWIVEL STOOLS 

MODEL OD846 MODEL OD847 

• 5" gas lift • 10" gas lift 

• Height adj. 18" to 23" • Height adj. 23" to 33" 

• Black select fabric • Options: Model OC822 

• Weight: 10 lbs./ stool kit 

2 cu. ft. • Weight: 12 lbs. / 

2 cu. ft. 

ERGONOMIC INDUSTRIAL 

SHOP SEATING 

These industrial chairs feature cleanable, comfortable, supportive 

seating. The seats are made of a soft moulded polyurethane material 

and the backs are formed to support the body for greater comfort and 

less fatigue. Pneumatic height adjustment of 15" to 20.5". Adjustable 

back rest. 5-prong poly on steel base with dual 

wheel carpet casters. Optional chrome foot ring 

adds 10" to height. Glides recommended with 

footring. Model OC816 and OC821 task chairs have 

adjustable backrest height, depth and angle. 

Model Wt. 


W/CASTERS 

OC815 Operator's Chair 25 

OC816 Task Chair 26.5 

W/GLIDES 

OC820 Operator’s Chair 25 

OC821 Task Chair 26.5 

OPTIONAL STOOL KIT 

OC822 Chrome footring 5 

OE088 

OC815 

OC816 

OE089

OFFICE SEATING 

SUPPORTECH 

ERGONOMIC CHAIRS 


• Multi-tilt control for custom adjustment 

• Gas lift height adjustment 

• Tension adjustable swivel/tilt with 

locking free float 

• Height adjustable contoured backrest 

• Height adjustable armrests 

• 5 prong plastic (glass reinforced) base 

• Dual wheel carpet casters 

• Seat Dimensions: 20" W x 18 /12" D x 19-24" 

• Back Dimensions: 19" W x 21" H 

Model No. 

Black Grey Burgundy Blue 

OC359 OC360 OD839 OD840 

HI-BACK 

MULTI-FUNCTION 

OPERATORS CHAIRS 

• Moulded plastic seat and 

back with lumbar support 

• Injection moulded 2 1/2" 

foam that retains its shape 

and has a better resilience 

to daily use 

• Spring backrest 

angle adjustment 

• Manual backrest 

height adjustment 

• Pneumatic height 

seat adjustment 19"-24" 

• Seat angle adjustment 

Seat dimensions: 

19" W x 19" D, 

back 18" W x 21" D 

PLASTIC SEAT 

SWIVEL STOOL 

• Made of 1" diameter 

16 gauge tubular steel base 

• Sturdy plastic seat 

• Seat is manually 

adjustable from 

22" to 28" high 

Just raise or lower the 

steel rod and lock 

securely in place 

• 360° swivel 

• Colour: black seat with 

grey epoxy base 


Standard 

Model No Wt. 

Grey Black Burgundy Blue Description lbs. 

OA226 OA235 OA245 OA265 Operator Chair 44 

OA236 OA238 OA239 OA240 Operator Chair w/loop arms 48 

OA228 OA230 OA232 OA233 Operator Chair w/adj. T-arms 47 


w/loop arms 

FOLDING CHAIRS 

• Heavy duty and 

lightweight tubular steel 

construction 

• Folds flat to 2 3/4" 

thick and nests for 

convenient storage 

• Double welded rear 

leg brace 

• Exclusive hinge sets 

legs at wide angle for 

improved 

stability and support 

• Comfortable extra wide 

16" seat 

& back rest 

w/adjustable 

T-arms 

Model No. 

Grey Green Black Chestnut Beige 

OA273 OD915 OD916 OD917 OD918 

STENO CHAIR 

• Heavy duty industrial chair 

• Economical price 

• Comfortable 2 1/2" foam upholstered seat 

• Full 360° rotation 

• Padded backrest 

• Floating spring action back hinge 

• Standard black vinyl upholstery 

• Powder coated black epoxy finish 

• Constructed of 1" diameter 

all welded steel 

• Five prong base for increased stability 

• Height adjustment from 17" to 22" 

• Four swivel black nylon, 

twin wheel casters 

Model No. 

OA276 

MULTI-TILT EXECUTIVE 

HIGH BACK 

• Pneumatic height adjustment 

• Tension adjustable infinite tilt-lock 

• Independent back angle & backrest 

height adjustment 

• Contoured moulded foam 

• Seat Dimensions: 

20" x 19.5" x 18" - 22" 

• Weight: 38 lbs/9.5 cu. ft. 

• Available as standard or with 

VISO Elastic "Memory" 

foam seat 

• Back Dimensions: 

19" x 29" 

• Shown with optional 

arms 

Model No. 

Grey Black Burgundy Blue 

OE109 OC108 OE110 OE111 

W/VISO ELASTIC FOAM SEAT 

OD842 OD843 OD844 OD845 

OPTIONAL ARMS 

OE112 Adjustable arms 

PADDED SWIVEL STOOLS 

• Deluxe swivel stool with 

a 14" diameter seat 

• Padded with 2 1/2" thick foam 

and covered by a 

black vinyl fabric 

• Full 360° rotation 

• One inch diameter all 

welded steel frame 

• 3/4" x 17" diameter footring on 

four tubular legs 

• Grey oven baked powder 

coated epoxy finish 

• Rubber cushion metal floor 

glides protects 

floor surfaces 

• Two adjustable heights available, 

22" to 28" and 27" to 33" 

Model No. FC673 - 22" - 28" 

Model No. FC674 - 27" - 33" 


607


608 


OFFICE SEATING 

SERIES 4000 & 5000 TASK & OPERATOR CHAIRS 

• Pneumatic height adjustment 

• Tilt seat and articulating 

backrest adjustment, 5000 Series 

• Backrest height adjustment 

• Injection moulded foam cushions 

• Five prong poly on steel base 

Model No Seat Dimensions Back Dimensions 

Black Grey Description W" x D" x H" W" x H" 

OC319 OC320 Series 4000 chair 18.5 x 18 x 17-22 17 x 15.5 

OA247 OA244 Series 4000 w/stool kit 18.5 x 18 x 22-27 17 x 15.5 

OC321 OC322 Series 5000 multi functional chair 18.5 x 18 x 17-22 17 x 19 

OE090 OE091 Series 5000 w/stool kit 18.5 x 18 x 22-27 17 x 19 

• Pneumatic height adjustments 

• Backrest height adjustments 

• Five prong poly on steel base 


Model No Seat Dimensions Back Dimensions Wt. 

Black Grey Description W" x D" x H" W" x H" lbs. 

ECONOMICAL STENO CHAIRS 

OC309 OC310 w/o arms 18 x 17 x 17-22 16.5 x 11.5 30 

OC311 OC312 w/fixed arms 18 x 17 x 17-22 16.5 x 11.5 32 

OE092 OE093 w/stool kit 18 x 17 x 22-27 16.5 x 11.5 35 

TASK CHAIRS 

OA246 OA224 w/loop arms 18 x 17 x 17-22 16.5 x 13.5 32 

OA281 OA283 w/o arms 18 x 17 x 17-22 16.5 x 13.5 30 

OE094 OE095 w/stool kit 18 x 17 x 22-27 16.5 x 13.5 35 


Loop Arm Kit 

(width adjustable) 

Model No. OD848 

Fixed Arms 

EXECUTIVE CHAIRS 

An elegant and durable line of office chairs. The hi-back 

and mid-back swivel chairs are manufactured with a five 

star steel base for strength and stability. Black epoxy 

frame with a moulded fabric protection on seat and back 

edges for longer fabric life. Thick contoured seat and back 

with lumbar supports and padded armrests. Swivel tilt 

with locking mechanism. The pneumatic lift adjusts from 

a height of 18" to 22". The guest chair is an excellent addition 

for any office. It has the same excellent construction 

on an epoxy coated steel sled base. 


• Optional arms available 

• Optional stool kit 

• Optional Glides (recommended with stool 

kit), models OA244 & OA247 come 

standard w/glides 

TASK CHAIRS & ECONOMICAL STENO CHAIRS 

OPTIONS FOR TASK/OPERATOR CHAIRS 

Model No. OC822 

Chrome 

Foot Ring 


Stool Kit 

• Stool kit available 

• Optional arms 

• Optional glides (recommended 

with stool kit) 


T-Arm Kit (width & 

height adjustable) 

Side Chair 

Model No. Wt. 

Grey Black Description lbs. 

OC683 OC684 Hi-Back Executive chair 50 

OC685 OC686 Low Back Executive Chair 46 

OC687 OC688 Guest Side Chair 41 

Model No. OD849 

Deluxe Loop Arms 

(width adjustable) 

Low-Back 

Model No. 

OC321 

Model No. 

OC321 

w/arm kit 

OC323 

Model No. 

OC311 

w/stool kit (OA269) 

Hi-Back 

Model No. 

OC319 

Model No. 

OC319 

w/arm kit 

OC323 

Model No. 

OA246

CHAIRS & CADDIES 

STACKING CHAIRS 

C. 

A. 

B. 

A. Polypropylene chairs stack easily. Made of one piece moulded polypropylene shell and 

sturdy chrome frame. Armchair has wood armrests in a walnut finish. Available in 6 standard 

colours. 

Model No. 

Black Blue Beige Brown Green Grey Description 

OA275 OA279 OA285 OA268 OD215 OA272 Stack chair no arms 

OA873 OA875 OA871 OA876 OD216 OA837 Stack chair w/arms 

B. Upholstered chairs are easy to stack for compact storage. Vinyl covering over a 

chrome frame protects against water and mildew. Armchair includes black plastic 

rests. 

Model No. 

Black Blue Beige Brown Red Description 

OA278 OA886 OA833 OA832 OA842 Stacking chairs, no arms 

OA274 OA852 OA848 OA856 OA864 Stacking chairs, w/arms 

C. Birch plywood stacking chair assembled to a beige enamel steel frame. Seat and back are 

1/4" thick overall. The most economical chair available. 

Model No. 0A282 

D. Stacking chairs weighing only seven pounds, this lightweight chair is surprisingly 

strong. The 7/8" tubular steel frame is of X underseat construction giving rigidity and 

strength to the unit. The moulded polypropylene seat and back is of high strength polymer 

with a texture finish. Glides are insert type and will not mark floors. This chair will 

stack with all plywood stacking chairs. 18" seat height. Colours: Frame is beige; Seat 

and back: Orange, grey or navy. 

Model No. OD919, Navy 

Model No. OD920, Grey 

Model No. OD921, Orange 

D. 


HORIZON CHAIRS 

They have an incredibly strong and 

durable thermoplastic shell which 

assures correct posture and provides 

maximum comfort for 

sustained periods of sitting. An 

arched back with sculptured cutout 

provides excellent ventilation. The 

four vibrant shell colours are black, 

blue, green and grey. Frame is 

black. The heavy duty welded, unitized 

chassis has been designed to 

enable stacking yet avoids protruding 

legs. Legs are of 16 gauge 

tubular steel. Heavy 14 gauge channel 

crossbraces provide anchor 

points for the shell. 

Model No. Seat 

Blue Grey Black Green Height" 

OD922 OD926 OD930 OD934 14 

OD923 OD927 OD931 OD935 15 

OD924 OD928 OD932 OD936 16 

OD925 OD929 OD933 OD937 18 

HANGING 

CHAIR CADDY 

This unique double tier design caddy can hold 

up to 84 chairs while occupying only half the 

floor space of other conventional models. Ideal 

in applications where space is limited. 

Portable and easy to manoeuvre yet sturdy 

with a 14 gauge steel frame construction and 

16 gauge rungs. 

Overall dimensions 

64" L x 30" W x 74" H. 

Shipping Weight: 95 lbs. 


FLAT STACKING 

CADDIES 

Can stack a capacity of 10-12 tables. It 

speeds up and eases set-up or storage 

of all sizes and types of folding tables. 

Choose the 72" or 96" long caddy with 

4" diameter 

swivel casters. 


76 L" x 38 W" x 31 H" 

Wt.: 67 lbs. 


100 L" x 38 W" x 31 H" 

Wt.: 87 lbs. 

EDGE STACKING 

CADDIES 

For rectangular or round tables these caddies are 

good for tables of all widths especially those 

wider than 30" that must fit through a narrow 

doorway. 14 gauge steel tubing with a brown 

finish. Shipping weight: 65 lbs. 

Model Dimensions Table 

No. Used with L" x W" x H" Capacity 

OA524 Rectangular 31 1/4 x 49 x 32 1/4 10 

OA525 Round 31 1/4 x 49 x 40 1/4 8 


609


610 


SEATING, TABLES & ACCESSORIES 

CASTERBOOT TM 

Easily move anything with legs: tables, shelving, chairs and 

all types of equipment. The CasterbootTM TABLE MOVER 

MAKES TABLE MOVING A ONE PERSON JOB! 

is a solid metal 

boot with a urethane wheel that slides effortlessly around 

furniture or equipment legs and secures with one quick turn 

of the wrist. Fits over existing levelers, glides or protective 

caps. Choose the nearest size that fits within the inner 

dimensions. 

Set includes 4 Casterboots (2 locking). 

Model No. Leg Size (diameter) Wheel Size" Cap. lbs. 

OE228 1" Tubular 2 300 

OE229 1" Tubular Wire Shelving 3 1⁄2 1200 

OE230 up to 1.320" Tubular 2 300 

OE231 up to 1.5"Tubular 2 300 

OE232 1" Square 3 500 

OE233 1.25" Square 3 500 

WORK AND FOLDING TABLES 

Walnut finish laminated top with 1 1/4" square chrome legs. A 1 

1/8" metal skirt is all around for stability. 

Overall height 30". 

Model Wt. 

No. Size" lbs. 

OA928 24 x 60 80 

OA307 30 x 48 52 

OA308 30 x 60 64 

Model Wt. 

No. Size" lbs. 

OA941 30 x 72 76 

OA926 36 x 72 90 

OA934 36 x 96 122 

A very popular and versatile stacking table. Lightweight yet 

rugged construction makes for easy handling. Because of their 

stacking ability, they require a minimum amount of space when 

not in use. Available in 3 different sizes. Their overall height is 

30" and the tops are 3/8" thick. Tops are able to join flush for conferences 

or banquets. Sturdy 16 gauge 1" diameter steel frames 

are electrically welded and finished in brown baked enamel paint. 

Plastic feet and bumpers won't mark floors. 

Model No. Size" Table Top 

OA919 30 x 30 Laminated walnut plastic 



CLUSTER SEATING 

The perfect lunchroom or cafeteria seating. Choose the cluster arrangement that maximizes 

your space. The frame is a heavy duty 2" black steel tube. A 1 1/8" walnut top is standard. 

Other table top colours available. Except for the round top models all tops are 24" wide. Two 

chair styles; the polypropylene DS or the padded vinyl DC series. They are available in six 

colours: Beige (BE), Black (BL) Brown (BR), Blue (BU), Burgundy (BG), Grey (GR) and 

Hunter Green (HG). 

Specify colour when ordering. 

Style DS Style DC 

STANDARD WALNUT TOP 

Other table top colours available upon request. 

Tubular 

Casterboots 

Model No. 

OA928 

Model No. 

OA925 

OE230 

OE231 

Easily transports folding tables by supporting one 

end in its cradle between two wheels. The opposite 

end of the table is held and steered by the user. 

Accommodates folding tables up to 12' long and 4' 

wide with table tops up to 7⁄8" thick. Non scuffing 

wheels are safe for all surfaces. Symmetric design 

allows tables to be loaded in either direction. 

Capacity: 150 lbs. 

Ship Wt. 3 lbs. 

Model No. 

OE227 

Tops for folding tables are 5/8" 

thick and finished in a durable walnut 

colour plastic laminate. The 

folding legs and perimeter metal 

frame is constructed of 16 gauge 

brown enamel steel. Table height 

29". 

Model Top Size" 

No. W" x L" 

OA306 30 x 60 

OA305 30 x 72 

OA302 30 x 96 

OA948 36 x 72 

OA946 3 x 96 

OA304 60" Diameter 

Overall Dim. Model Wt. Model Wt. 

Description W" x L" x H" No. lbs. No. lbs. 

Two Seat Wall Unit 24 x 60 x 29 DS2W 55 DC2W 65 

Four Seat Floor Unit 24 x 48 x 29 DS4F 108 DC4F 130 

Four Seat Round Unit 66 Round x 29 DS4R 108 DC4R 130 

Four Seat Double Top 50 x 60 x 29 DS4FDT 108 DC4FDT 130 

Six Seat Floor Unit 76 x 60 x 29 DS6F 158 DC6F 195 

Six Seat Round Unit 80 Round x 29 DS6R 170 DC6R 195 

Eight Seat Floor Unit 104 x 60 x 29 DS8F 170 DC8F 170 

Add suffix: BE, Beige BL, Black BR, Brown BU, Blue 

BG, Burgundy HG, Hunter Green GR, Grey 

Model No. 

OA304 

Model No. 

OA306

COMPUTER CABINETS 

ALL WELDED DESK TOP CABINET 

Includes locking slide-in pocket doors with inner compartments for storage of 

files or manuals. Pull out keyboard shelf has ample storage space for diskettes 

and supplies. Sliding tray may be used for mouse pad or as a writing surface. 

Vented back for air circulation. Ships fully assembled in blue and grey baked 

enamel finish. 


OPEN PEDESTAL STAND 

32" high and is designed to support the desk top unit for stand up operation. 

Features include a convenient storage shelf and adjustable leg levelers for 

uneven work surfaces. Shipped knocked-down. Blue baked enamel finish. 


ENCLOSED BASE/PRINTER STAND 

Features a roll in/roll out hideaway printer stand which locks inside the enclosure 

when not in use. The printer stand has two adjustable, one bottom 28" W x 25" 

D shelves for printers or peripherals and paper. 30" high enclosure may be 

oriented for left or right hand access. Shipped knocked-down. Blue and grey 

baked enamel finish. 




No. Description W" x D" x H" lbs. 

OC533 Desktop Computer Cabinet 30 27 3/4 30 122 

OC534 Computer Cabinet Open Pedestal Base 30 27 3/4 32 66 

OC535 Computer Cabinet Enclosed Base w/Printer Stand 30 27 3/4 33 142 

MOBILE COMPUTER CABINET 

Cabinet provides heavy duty storage for valuable electronic equipment. Features 

include all steel welded construction. Top monitor compartment is 22 1/2" W x 

23" D x 18 3/4" H and includes a slide-out keyboard shelf. It locks independently 

of bottom section which includes 2 adjustable shelves. Unit is fully mobile with 

5" polyolefin casters 2 rigid, and 2 swivel w/brake. Includes vented back for air 

circulation and a 6 outlet power strip with built-in surge suppression. Shipped 

fully assembled with a durable blue and light grey baked enamel finish. 

Total dimensions: 26" W x 24" D x 64" H. 

Wt.: 149 lbs. 


MOBILE COMPUTER CABINET 

Mobile cabinet allows you to house your terminal, 

keyboard, printer and paper all in one place. Lower 

cabinet, 24 5/8" W x 22 7/8" D x 22 5/8" H, is lockable. 

The two position shelf can be located for desk top 

style or up to 18"H tower style CPU’s. The fixed shelf 

at 24/ 5/8" W x 22 7/8" D x 11 1/2" H provides ample 

room for any sheet fed style or continuous form style 

printer. Slide-out keyboard tray has a comfortable 

wrist rest area to reduce fatigue. Top features back 

and end stops to hold supplies while in transit. 

Cabinet rolls easily on 5" polyolefin casters (2 swivel 

w/brakes, 2 rigid). Rear cabinet access holes for 

paper feed, cables and ventilation fan (not included) 

are also provided. Plastic wire ties and mounting 

holes are provided for tidy cable management. All 

steel construction. Shipped knocked down, assembly 

required with simple hand tools. 

Total dimensions 27" W x 24" D x 49 1/4" H. 

Wt. 125 lbs. 

Colour: Blue. 


Desk top cabinet with enclosed 

base/printer stand 

Model No. 

OC533 


Desk top cabinet 

with open 

pedestal stand 


FREEDOM SERIES SECURITY STATIONS 

9400 SECURITY STATION 

Functional and sturdy. Rolls easily from room to room with 4" wheels. 

• Locking tambour doors protects computer, 

keyboard, monitor and printer 

• Keyboard shelf (36 1/4" W x 14" D x 27" H) 

extends forward on smooth rolling slides 

• Monitor/Printer shelf is adjustable 

• Disc drive adjusts side-to-side to 

accommodate different size units 

• Portable acrylic printer paper holder 

attaches easily to shelf rail 

• Unit is quality built with high density 

3/4" substrate laminated with a durable 

scratch resistant melamine 

• Matching woodgrain edge-banding 

for a finishing touch 

• Tubular steel base finished with baked-on-enamel 

provides sturdy support to cabinet 

• Unit is 38" W x 24" D x 51 1/2" H 

with 4" wheels 

Model No. Wt. 

Light Oak Walnut Description lbs. 

OD871 OD873 W/Glides 185 

OD875 OD877 W/Wheels 185 

Model No. 

OD871 


611


612 


AUDIO-VISUAL EQUIPMENT 

AUDIO-VISUAL CARTS 

ADJUSTABLE CARTS 

All welded steel carts with 4" casters (2 lock). Can adjust to five heights from 26" to 42". 

Overall dimensions: 24" W x 18" D x 26 - 42" H. Recommended for use with 20" diagonal 

monitors. Available with lockable lower storage cabinet. Cabinet dimensions (interior): 23 

1/2" W x 17 1/2" D x 15 1/2" H. Units available with two-outlet electrical assembly. Colour: 

Black. 

Model Wt. 


OA530 Adjustable Cart 42 

OA052 Adjustable Cart w/electrical outlet 44 

PA744 Adjustable Cabinet Cart 55 

PA730 Adjustable Cabinet Cart w/electrical outlet 57 

WIDE BODY CARTS 

Pyramid design for maximum support. Solid steel construction with black powder finish. 4" 

casters (2 lock) and spacious, locking cabinet also included on models OB116, OB117, 

OB118 and OB119. Electrical unit includes two-outlet electrical unit with a 20' extension 

cord and cord winder. 

Model Description Wt. 


OA533 32 x 27 1/2 x 48 63 

OA049 same as OA533 - c/w elec. outlets 65 

OA045 32 x 27 1/2 x 44 59 

OA051 same as OA045 - c/w elec. outlets 61 

OVERHEAD PROJECTORS 

APOLLO HORIZON 

Durable and economical, these projectors feature user-friendly controls and an automatic 

thermostat that shuts down power if the unit overheats. Projection stage is 10" x 10" (254 

mm x 254 mm) and illumination is 2000 lumens. Up to 3500 lumens can be provided for 

projectors with a built-in light booster mechanism. Standard Horizon projectors come with 

either an open or dust-free closed head. All Horizon projectors carry a 2 year limited 

warranty. 

Power Source: 120 V, 60 Hz standard - UL/CSA 

Projection Lamp: 82 V, 360 W EYB 

Lumens: 2,000 (Light booster models: 3,500) 

Closed dimensions: 13 3/4" W x 14" D x 9 1/2" H 



OD064 Overhead projector w/open head 

OD065 Overhead projector w/closed head 

OD066 O/H projector w/open head & light booster 

OD069 Vinyl dust cover 

OD070 Replacement lamp 

OVERHEAD PROJECTOR TABLES 

Adapts to stand up or sit down presentations. Work surface 

adjusts from 27" to 41" H and projector well adjusts from 5" to 

11". Convenient storage space below projector well holds papers 

and viewprints. Model PA715 includes a two outlet electrical 

assembly. Overall dimensions: 37" W x 22 1/2" D x 27" - 41" H. 

Projector Well: 17 1/2" W x 20 1/2" D. Includes 4" hard rubber 

casters, two with locking brakes. 


PA714 Table 64 

PA715 Table w/Electrical Assembly 67 

8.5" X 11" LETTER SIZE TRANSPARENCY FILMS 

A. INK JET - Clear film specially coated for smudge/bleed-free colour or 

black ink jet imaging. 

B. COLOUR LASER - High quality transparencies 

for full colour and graphics laser 

printers. Unique coating 

controls absorption. 

C. COPIER/LASER - 

For plain paper copier. Low haze 

levels and bleed/smudge-free 

film produces crisp, clear 

graphics. Also compatible 

with all laser printers. 

Model Qty/ 

Key No. Description Pkg. 

A. OD772 w/o stripe 50 

B. OD773 w/ stripe 50 

B. OD774 w/o stripe 50 

C. OD775 w/ stripe 100 

C. OD776 w/o stripe 100 

Model No. 

PA744 

Model No. 

OA530 

PLATFORM STYLE TELEVISION MOUNT 

For small to mid-size monitors. Offers 10° tilt and a 360° swivel 

capability. Anti-theft device secures monitor to platform. Optional 

VCR bracket features anti-theft device and 180° swivel 

independent of the mount. Used for 19" - 20" or 25" -27" monitors. 

Model No. Dimensions 

OB123 19-20" Monitor 

OB124 25-27" Monitor 

OA044 VCR Bracket 

CEILING-YOKE TELEVISION MOUNT 

Support tray and arms of yoke are both adjustable. Used for 19" - 20" 

or 25" - 27" monitors. Ceiling flange and pipe 4", 10", 18" are required 

for mounting. Optional VCR bracket available. 


OA534 19 - 20" Monitor 

OA046 25 - 27" Monitor 

OA044 VCR Bracket 

OA050 Ceiling Flange 

OA054 4" black pipe 



PROJECTION SCREENS 

Durable steel slat runs along the base 

of the screens. Includes steel case 

with painted end caps. Screen colour - 

matte white. Tripod screens feature 

steel magnetic legs. 

Model Wt. 

No. Desciption" lbs. 

OA053 Wall 60 x 60 13 

OA529 Wall 70 x 70 15 

OA532 Tripod 60 x 60 23 

OA531 Tripod 70 x 70 26 

Model No. 

OB118 

STEEL LECTERN 

All steel electrically welded lectern with black silicone paint finish.Tilts 

back on rear wheels for easy mobility. 

Ships assembled. Weight: 43 lbs. 

Model No. 

OD267 

Model No. 

OA533 

WITH CABINET 

Model Description Wt. 


OB116 32 x 27 1/2 x 54 90 

OB117 same as OB116 - c/w elec. outlets 92 

OB118 32 x 27 1/2 x 48 88 

OB119 same as OB118 - c/w elec. outlets 90 

OB122 Optional TV Safety Belt 1


DESK ACCESSORIES, SAFES & CABINETS 

HEAVY DUTY 

KEYBOARD DRAWERS 

HEAVY DUTY SLIDE OUT TRAYS 

• Adjustable mounting brackets 

• Smooth action ball bearing slides 

• Available with or without extendible mouse platform 

• Tray size: 11" x 23" w/o mouse platform 


OB536 Keyboard Tray 

OB537 Keyboard Tray w/mouse platform 

HEAVY DUTY ARTICULATING 

KEYBOARD TRAYS 

• Fully articulating swing arm is height/depth adjustable 

• Swivel mount with tilt tray feature 

• Includes anti-skid surface 

• Keyboard stores under work surface 

• Tray size: 11" x 23" w/o mouse platform 

11 1/2" x 21 1/2" w/mouse platform 


OB538 Articulating Keyboard Tray 

OB539 Articulating Keyboard Tray 

w/mouse platform 

SAFES 

GRAND PRIX LINE CABINETS 

Keep documents intact for one full hour despite 

exterior temperatures as high as 927°C 

(1700°F). 


• Heavy gauge satin coat steel with 

antirust treatment 

• Insulated with moisture pockets 

between the walls 

• Heavy duty hinges 

• 6" continuous fixed locking bar 

• Key changing combination lock 

• Adjustable shelf 

• Heavy duty caster base 

Model No. OB536 



LEDGER CABINET 

Full size ledger safe ensures document security 

despite ambient temperatures reaching 1000 °C 

(1850°F) for a full two hours. 


• Three heavy duty hinges 

• Three adjustable shelves 

• Key changing combination lock 

• Caster base 

COMPUTER DUST COVERS 

All dust covers are anti-static and 

water repellent Available in 

translucent vinyl. 

Model No. Description W" x H" x D" 

OB848 Keyboard Cover 19 x 2 x 8.5 

OB849 Keyboard Cover Enhanced 22.5 x 2 x 9.5 

OB850 Monitor Cover 12-15" 16 x 14 x 17 

OB851 Monitor Cover 16-17" 17 x 16 x 19 

OB852 Monitor Cover, 19-21" 20 x 19 x 22 

OB853 CPU Tower Cover (Small) 9 x 15 x 19 

OB854 CPU Tower Covers (Large) 9 x 27 x 20 

OB855 Printer Cover (Ink Jet) 18 x 7 x 15 

OB858 Printer Cover (Bubble Jet) 16 x 8.5 x 9.5 

Model No. Mfg. Outside Dimensions Inside Dimensions Cap. Wt. 

Black Beige No. H" x W" x D" H" x W" x D" Cu. in. Shelves lbs. 

ULC listed 177°C (350°F) for 1 hour 

OC750 OA690 GX-1 24 x 18 1/2 x 18 1/2 17 1/2 x 15 1/2 x 13 1/2 3662 1 175 

OC751 OA691 GX-2 29 x 21 1/2 x 21 1/2 22 3/8 x 18 1/2 x 16 3/8 6778 1 250 

OC752 OA692 GX-3 39 x 26 1/2 x 26 1/2 32 1/4 x 23 1/2 x 21 3/8 16200 2 455 

OC753 OA686 GX-4 50 x 26 1/2 x 26 1/2 42 1/4 x 23 1/2 x 21 3/8 21222 3 575 

Ledger Cabinet Manufacturers Certified 177°C (350°F) for 2 hours (Class B) 

OC749 OC736 GX-5020 60 x 26 1/2 x 26 1/2 50 x 20 x 20 20000 3 910 

VERTICAL & LATERAL FILE CABINETS 

Lateral 

Vertical 

VERTICAL FILES 

Cabinets 27" deep. These rugged, durable 

legal size cabinets are designed for years of 

dependable service in the office or 

warehouse. Full suspension; each drawer 

rolls smoothly on 10 roller bearings. Flush 

handles. Cabinet lock is standard. 

LATERAL FILE CABINETS 

Ledger Cabinet 

Choose from two to five drawer varieties to 

suit your filing needs in the office or 

warehouse. Adjustable for legal or letter 

size documents. Bottom drawer on all 

cabinets has a fixed front; all other drawers 

have a "Flip-up" receding front. Top quality 

heavy gauge extension arms. Locks are 

standard on all cabinets. Hanging file bars 

included. 

Model No. Dimensions Wt. 

Black Beige Drawers W" x D" x H" lbs. 

VERTICAL 

OA521 OA042 2 18 x 27 x 29 1/2 60 

OA522 OA511 3 18 x 27 x 40 80 

OA523 OA041 4 18 x 27 x 52 100 

LATERAL 

OA498 OA506 2 36 x 18 x 28 100 

OA503 OA512 3 36 x 18 x 40 137 

OA500 OA501 4 36 x 18 x 53 1/2 178 

OA497 OA504 5 36 x 18 x 65 1/2 217 


613


614 


CABINETS & BOOKCASES 

A. B. 

C. 

Model No. 

OA040 

A. ALL-IN-ONE 

FILING SYSTEM 

The most versatile filing and storage system on the market 

today! 

All The Storage You Will Ever Need In One 

Compact Unit! 

• 2 models 

• Full size filing cabinets 

• 2 or 3 shelf storage cabinet 

• Box storage drawer 

Ideal for Office or Industrial Use. 

ALL-IN-ONE Filing System combines storage with filing and 

locking security in one unit. Letter size file drawers have 

flush front and recessed handles. Drawer slides are roll 

formed for strength and straightness. Allows drawers to 

move smoothly and easily when fully loaded. Box drawer is 

great for storing all your small items. Fully welded lockable 

cabinet pedestal includes adjustable shelf. Attractive putty 

baked-on enamel finish. Shipped fully assembled ready for 

use. 

CHOOSE FROM 4 MODELS 

Models OC379 & OA040 

Gives you two full size file drawers, a convenient box storage 

drawer and a 35 5/8" high storage cabinet with one 

adjustable shelf. 

Models OC380 & OA499 

Comes with three full size drawers and 42" high storage cabinet 

with two adjustable shelves. 

Model No. Drawer 

Black Beige Description Style 

OC379 OA040 Overall Size: 1 Box Drawer 

35 5/8"Hx18"Dx36"W 

Cabinet size: 2 File Drawers 

35 5/8"Hx18"Dx17 1/8"W 

OC380 OA499 Overall Size: 3 File Drawers 

42"Hx18"Dx36"W 

Cabinet Size: 

42"Hx18"Dx17 1/8"W 

Box Drawer 4"Hx18"Dx12 5/8"W 

File Drawer 11 1/2"Hx18"Dx12 5/8"W 

D. 

Model No. 

OA032 

B. CONTROL CENTER 

CABINET 

Cash Drawer 

Lock Up For Cashiers 

Machine Shop Security Cabinet 

Special Tools 

Control Center Cabinet Provides 5 Individually Locked 

Compartments Plus Master Door Access. 

Cash drawer control, tool security, storage of valuable supplies... 

whenever you want to provide individual workers with a 

secure storage area and yet maintain supervisory access and 

control of the entire storage cabinet... the Control Center 

Cabinet is what you need. Rugged construction for secure storage. 

Space age powder coat finish will not chip or crack under 

normal use. 

Specifications: 

Construction: 16 gauge mild annealed cold rolled sheet steel, 

free from surface imperfections. Welded frame, body assembled 

with aircraft quality aluminum rivets. All exposed edges 

are edge rolled to eliminate burrs. 

Finish: Solvent-free powder coat finish. 

Hardware: All zinc plated. 

Model No. 

OA499 

Model No. 

OA033 

Model No. 

OA035 

Size: Outside 39 1/2"H x 15 1/2"D x 21 1/2"W; 

inside shelf 6 1/8"H x 13 1/2"D x 16 5/8"W. 

Weight: 100 lbs. Shipped assembled. 

Anchoring note: manufacturer suggests that the cabinets be 

floor and/or wall mounted and joined together when used in 

multiples. (For secure storage use: not a safe) 

Single master door access for efficient auditing. 

100 lb. shelf capacity. 

Finished smooth inside and out. 


E. 

Model No. 

FB018 

FB007 

C. ALL STEEL BOOKCASES 

Welded Steel Bookcases arrive set-up and ready to use in a 

variety of office, plant, home, or warehouse environ-ments. 

Heavy gauge shelves are adjustable on 2" increments allowing 

numerous configurations for storage of books, binder, catalogs, 

and other reference materials. Units are all 12" deep by 

36" wide. Available in 3 colours. 

Model No. Description No. of Wt. 

Black Grey Putty H" x D" x W" Openings lbs. 

OA487 OA488 OA489 29 x 13 x 36 2 46 

OA490 OA491 OA486 40 x 13 x 36 3 58 

OA484 OA485 OA037 52 1/2 x 13 x 36 4 76 

OA492 OA493 OA034 66 x 13 x 36 5 89 

OA036 OA481 OA483 78 x 13 x 36 6 102 

D. WOODEN BOOKCASES 

Ideal for your office setting, these attractive bookcases have 

adjustable shelves. The 72" high unit has a fixed centre shelf for 

support. Made of laminated particle board with a plastic laminated 

finish. Top and bottom are 1" thick. Side and shelves are 11/16" 

thick. Walnut finish. 

Model Dimensions Wt. Cu. 

No. H" x D" x W" lbs. ft. 

OA035 32 x 12 x 36 57 10 

OA033 48 x 12 x 36 72 13 

OA032 72 x 12 x 36 98 21 

E. 48" WIDE COUNTER-HIGH 

CABINET 

The only waist-high industrial cabinet providing a storage capacity 

of 24 cubic feet, 34% more room than the largest 36" wide 

cabinet can offer. Ideal for storage where vertical space is limited, 

this cabinet features 2 shelves adjustable on 2" centres; a chrome 

handle with built-in lock; a three point locking device for security; 

and reinforced double doors featuring the "quiet-door" design for 

quieter operating cabinet. Available in grey or beige. Shipped 

Knocked-Down. 


No. Description H" x D" x W" lbs. 

FB007 Grey Cabinet 42 x 24 x 48 128 

FB006 Beige Cabinet 42 x 24 x 48 128 

FB009 Grey Extra Shelf 1 x 24 x 48 16 

FB008 Beige Extra Shelf 1 x 24 x 48 16

FILING SYSTEMS 

STEEL PLAN FILES 

• Welded steel construction, wrap 

around corners and sturdy inner frame 

• Front supports add stacking strength 

• Files are modular so they can be used 

individually or in a space saving stack 

• Up to five high on a Closed Base 

• Reinforced top offers additional 

work and storage space 

• 5 and 10 drawer files can be 

mixed or matched for customized 

high volume storage 

• Choice of 6" Closed Base or 

20" High Base 

• Baked enamel finish in 

Tropic Sand, White, Grey or Black 


Model No. Inside Drawer Cabinet Wt. 

Black Grey Tropic Sand White Description H" x W" x D" H" x W" x D" lbs. 

OB144 OB146 OA651 OB145 5 Drawer 2 1/8 x 37 x 26 16 1/2 x 40 3/8 x 29 3/8 177 

OB147 OB148 OA186 OB149 5 Drawer 2 1/8 x 43 x 32 16 1/2 x 46 3/8 x 35 3/8 222 



OPTIONAL BASES FOR STEEL PLAN FILES 

Closed Bases 

• Holds up to five files 

• Raises files 6" off ground 

• Recessed 2 3/4" 

R 

5 DRAWER 

• Versatile file stores up to 500 sheets per 

unit active filing, 750 sheets of semiactive, 

or 1,000 sheets of 

inactive material 

• Five large capacity 2" deep 

drawers in three cabinet sizes 

Model No.TropicI Wt. 

Black Grey Sand White Description lbs. 

OB172 OB173 OA653 OB174 Closed Base for OB144, OB146, 22 

OA651 and OB145 Cabinets 

OB175 OB176 OA204 OB177 Closed Base for OB147, OB148, OA186, 26 

OB149 and 10 Drawer Cabinets 

OB178 OB179 OA187 OB180 Closed Base for OB150, OB151, 30 

OA220 and OB152 Cabinets 

GIANT STACKING TRAYS 

Create durable and efficient flat filing at a fraction of the cost of other systems. Easily accommodates 

most prints, artwork and drawings. Constructed of steel reinforced, high density 

polyethylene; stackable up to 5 feet high with a 40 lb per tray load capacity. Opposing direction 

stackability allows access from two sides. Optional wood-core vinyl laminate tops have 

a light oak finish. 2/Pkg. 

Model Inside Outside Qty/ Wt./ 

No. H" x W" x D" H" x W" x D" Carton Carton lbs. 

Stacking Trays 

OA667 2 x 36 3/8 x 24 1/4 3 x 39 x 26 2 28 

OA215 2 x 42 1/2 x 32 1/2 3 x 45 1/4 x 34 2 21 

Optional Tops 

OA650 Top for OA667 3/4 x 45 1/4 x 34 

OA668 Top for OA215 3/4 x 45 1/4 x 34 

High Bases 

• Raises files 20" off the floor and raises top of 

file to a 36" level to provide work space 

• Enclosed back and sides and open front 

provide extra bookshelf space 

Model No.Tropic Wt. 

Black Grey Sand White Description lbs. 

OB160 OB161 OB162 OB163 High Base for OB144, OB146, OA651 39 

and OB145 Cabinets 

OB164 OB165 OB166 OB167 High Base for OB147, OB148, OA186, OB149 43 

and 10 Drawer cabinets 

OB168 OB169 OB170 OB171 High base for OB150, OB151, OA220 and 48 

OB152 Cabinets 

Use with 

existing filing 

systems for extra 

storage space. 

10 DRAWER 

• Ideal for high traffic project 

storage areas 

• Ten 1" deep drawers allow 

the easiest retrieval of materials 

from the file and minimize 

material damage 


615


616 



VERTICAL FILING SYSTEMS 

Ideal for filing blueprints, charts, artwork and other oversized documents. Cuts filing and retrieving time; saves on floor space. Exclusive suspension 

system allows clamps to slip easily in and out of storage racks. Clamps open to 1" to hold up to 100 individual sheets (20 lbs. maximum 

weight per clamp). 

MOBILE VERTICAL FILE 

• All steel construction with four 

ball bearing swivel casters (2 lock) 

• Fits 24" to 36" clamps (order separately) 

• Holds up to 12 clamps that simply 

drop in and lift out 

• Maximum capacity is 1200 sheets or 240 lbs. 

• Compact economy 

• Width adjusts from 27 1/2" to 39 1/4" 

• Depth is 16" overall 

• Height adjusts from 40" to 52" 

• Easy assembly 



HEAVY DUTY MOBILE STAND 

• Steel construction with four 

3" ball bearing swivel casters (2 lock) 

• Holds 12 hanging clamps in pivot brackets that swing 

open for easy access to contents 

• Tropic sand finish 

• Height adjusts from 43 5/8" to 61 5/8" for 

sheets up to 54" long 

• 27" overall width 

• Easy set-up 

• Base extends 27 1/2" to 37 1/2" 


OE129 Mobile Stand only 25 

OA195 Mobile Stand c/w 12-24" Clamps 52 




PRINT-LOCK ® HANGING CLAMPS 

• Clamps hold up to 100 sheets or 20 lbs. 

• Green plastic label holders included 

• Available in natural aluminum with polished chrome 

plated cast alloy wing knobs and black end caps 

Model Clamp Wt. 

No. Description pkg. lbs. 

OE135 18" long Hanging 6 6 





LITERATURE DRAWER CABINET 

Ideal for organizing and filing literature, forms and stationery. 

High impact plastic drawers come complete with labels, 

drawer stops, and grooved bottoms, allowing for easy access 

to contents. Constructed from steel and have a beige enamel 

finish. 

PIVOT WALL RACKS 

Mounts directly to wall for space saving storage. 12 

pivot clamps hold any length sheet depending on 

mounting height. 

Dimensions: 9 1/2" H x 24" W. 

Steel construction. 

Mounting hardware included. 

DROP/LIFT WALL RACKS 

Hanging clamps simply drop in and out of rack 

for easy, economical filing. Comes with 12 

clamps. Entire rack extends less than 12" from 

wall. Steel construction. 

Includes mounting hardware. 

VERTICAL FILING CABINETS 

All steel construction provides secure, high density, 

bulk storage of reproductions. Cabinet holds up to 

12 hanging clamps (clamps not included). Doors can 

mount for left or right hand operation and comes 

with locking handle. 

• Small cabinet holds 18" to 24" clamps 

• Large cabinet holds up to 36" clamps 

• Colour: Tropic Sand 

Model CA888 table top unit comes with 20 drawers measuring 

9" W x 12.6" D x 1.5" H. 

Overall cabinet measures 20.75" W x 13.3" D x 19" H. 



OA216 Wall Rack only 8 

OA663 Pivot Brackets 12/pkg 6 

OA192 Pivot Wall Rack c/w 12-24" clamps 21 





OA188 Drop Lift Wall Rack only 2 

OA203 Drop Lift Wall Rack c/w 12-24" clamps 16 





OB142 Small Vertical File Cabinet 42" H x 16" W x 27" D 78 

OB143 Large Vertical File Cabinet 54 1/2" H x 16" W x 39" D 127 


19" H


RACKS 

STARTER SETS 

Hinged rack collapses for transport. Base is positioned at a 

45° angle for easy viewing. Ring or post sections are 

removable and units can be expanded to any length by adding 

extensions. Available in black or grey. 

STARTER KIT 

Complete with one 6" capacity rack, two support wings and 

six 1" ring sections OD499. 


OD490 Starter Kit, Black 6 

OD491 Starter Kit, Grey 6 

RING OR POST SECTIONS 


OD499 3 Ring Section 1" capacity 

OD500 3 Ring Section 2" capacity 

OD501 3 Post Section 1" capacity 

OD502 3 Post Section 2" capacity 

REFERENCE RACK INCLUDING WINGS/(RING OR POST SECTIONS NOT INCLUDED) 


OD493 Rack Section, 6" Filling Capacity, Black 4 

OD494 Rack Section,12" Filling Capacity, Black 5 

OD495 Rack Section, 6" Filling Capacity, Grey 4 

OD496 Rack Section,12" Filling Capacity, Grey 5 

EXTENSION RACKS 

OD503 Extension, 6" Filling Capacity, Black 

OD504 Extension, 6" Filling Capacity, Grey 

PORTABLE PAPERWORK ORGANIZERS 

Portafiles keep you organized, even when your schedule keeps 

you running. Portafiles make it easy to take important papers 

with you. Preprinted bilingual headings on pockets from A to 

Z or combination of A to Z and quick referencing headings. 

Durable plastic twist closure keeps filed contents safely inside. 

Closure latch is metal reinforced to provide extra strength and 

durability. Holds letter, legal or metric size papers. 

A-Z A-Z WITH QUICK REFERENCING HEADINGS 

Model No. Colour Model No. Colour 

OD632 Amethyst OD639 Almond 

OD633 Black OD640 Black 

OD634 Burgundy OD641 Burgundy 

OD635 Grey OD642 Amethyst 

OD636 Jade OD643 Jade 

OD637 Almond OD644 Sapphire 

OD638 Sapphire OD645 Green 

OD646 Hunter Green 

ART RACK 

Vertical storage for layouts, keylines and other oversize 

materials. Solid wood-core construction, solid fibreboard back 

and tempered hardwood dividers. Weight.: 97 lbs. 

Overall dimensions: 29" H x 36" W x 24 1/4" D. 

Each compartment measures 

27 3/8" H x 4 1/4" W x 23 1/2" D. 

Model No. OA654; Shown 2 stacked 

MOBILE ROLL FILES 

The ideal form of active filing for engineers, draftsmen, 

surveyors and designers. Materials store upright in 

square fibreboard tubes; grandstand design allows different 

size rolls to be stored in one file. Sturdy, 

wood-core construction with laminated beige vinyl covering. 

Swivel casters. 


Model Tube No. of Overall Wt. 

No. Size" Tubes H" x W" x D" lbs. 

OA655 3 3/4 x 3 3/8 12 23 1/2 x 15 1/4 x 13 1/8 21 

OA677 3 3/4 x 4 1/2 21 28 7/8 x 29 5/8 x 15 3/4 52 

OA673 2 3/4 x 2 3/4 20 23 1/2 x 15 1/4 x 13 1/8 22 

OA207 2 3/4 x 2 3/4 50 28 7/8 x 29 5/8 x 15 3/4 53 

OE131 7 x 7 8 28 7/8 x 29 5/8 x 15 3/4 46 


REFERENCE 

RACK INDEXES 

Available in pressboard or polyethylene, 

these 11" x 8 1/2" sheets allow indexing 

of the catalogue racks. Comes in sets of 

24 alphabetical or sets of 6 with a blank 

window for inserting card tabs. 

Index Set 

Model Wt. 


OC371 Pressboard Alphabetical 1.5 

OC372 Polyethylene Alphabetical 1.5 

OC373 Pressboard Insertable 1.5 

OC374 Polyethylene Insertable 1.5 

DELUXE CATALOG RACKS 

Base is angled at 30 degrees for counter 

top use. A vertical barrier provides privacy. 

24" filling capacity. 

Model No. Colour 

OD506 Black 

OD507 Grey 

OD508 Putty 

CORRUGATED ROLL FILES 

Safe storage of charts and blueprints up to 43" long. 

Corrugated fibreboard shell with reinforced steel 

frame for added strength. Square tube compartments 

allow easy insertion and removal of contents. Dust 

resistant door with metal latch keeps materials clean. 

Index grid for easy identification of contents. 

Cabinets are 15 3/4" square; depth is 3/4" more than 

tube length shown below. 

Model Tube Tube Wt. 

No. Tubes Size" Length" lbs. 

OA676 16 3 3/4 25 12 

OA191 25 3 25 13 

OA210 36 2 1/2 25 14 

OA211 16 3 3/4 37 15 

OA658 25 3 37 16 

OA661 36 2 1/2 37 17 

OA656 16 3 3/4 43 17 

OA194 25 3 43 18 

OA205 36 2 1/2 43 19 

STEEL ROLL FILES 

High volume storage of materials too large to 

store flat. Modular design allows files to be 

used individually or stacked for space-saving 

storage. Steel constructed cabinets with compartments 

formed of tough fibreboard, 

reinforced in front with aluminum moulding; 

protects materials and increases durability. 

Index grid on inside of door. 

Cabinet dimensions: 

15 1/4" L x 15 1/4" W x 38" D. 

Model Tube Tube Wt. 

No. Tubes Size" Length" lbs. 

OA669 16 3 1/4 37 42 

OA670 36 2 1/4 37 42 


617


618 


LITERATURE STORAGE RACKS 

Mfg. No. 

31 

Mfg. No. 

20-12 

Optional legs 

to permit 

free standing 

as illustrated are 

available for all 

Literature Racks. 

Mfg. No. 

32 

Rotating Literature Racks 

Mfg. No. 

32-12 

Mfg. No. 

4032R 

Mfg. No. 

33 

Mfg. No. 

34-12 

Model No. Mfg. Overall Openings Paper No. of Wt. 

Putty Grey Tan Black No. H" x W" x D" W" x D" x H" Width" Pockets lbs. 

OC540 OA152 OA130 OC536 31 65 1/2 x 9 3/4 x 4 1/8 8 5/8 x 3/4 x 8 1/2 8 1/2 23 32 

OC559 OA166 OA156 OA607 20-12 58 1/2 x 13 1/8 x 4 7/8 12 1/8 x 1 x 8 3/4 12 20 38 

OC541 OA161 OA155 OC537 32 36 x 9 3/4 x 4 1/8 8 5/8 x 3/4 x 8 1/2 8 1/2 11 18 

OC558 OA148 OA162 OA125 32-12 36 x 13 1/8 x 4 7/8 12 1/8 x 1 x 8 3/4 12 11 24 

OC543 OA169 OA165 OC539 33 21 x 9 3/4 x 4 1/8 8 5/8 x 3/4 x 8 1/2 8 1/2 5 9 

OC557 OA163 OA144 OA609 34-12 26 1/4 x 13 1/8 x 2 12 1/8 x 5/16 x 5 5/8 12 10 13 

OC545 OA171 OA624 OC544 Optional legs for 9 3/4" wide models (sold in pairs) 

OC556 OA164 OA167 OC555 Optional legs for 13 1/8" wide models (sold in pairs) 

ROTATING LITERATURE RACKS 

OC553 OA149 OA179 OC552 8831R 66 x 14 1/8 x 14 1/8 8 5/8 x 3/4 x 8 1/2 8 1/2 88 136 

OC549 OA134 OA158 OC548 4032R 48 1/2 x 14 1/8 x 14 1/8 8 5/8 x 3/4 x 8 1/2 8 1/2 40 92 

OC547 OA145 OA128 OC546 2033R 21 1/4 x 14 1/8 x 14 1/8 8 5/8 x 3/4 x 8 1/2 8 1/2 20 47 

WRITE-ON MAGNETIC TAGS 

A fast, simple and inexpensive means of 

labelling high volume applications, primary 

uses in warehouses and other storage 

areas. The newly formulated write-on/wet 

erase tags come with an aggressive 

magnetic backing. The vinyl top coating 

makes marking with any standard wet 

erase marker a snap. The special wet erase 

feature will keep tags clear and clean for 

extended periods. Mark with a standard 

wet erase marker, erase with a damp cloth 

and remark. 3 standard widths available. 

Custom widths and lengths available too. 

Standard product thickness is 1/32". Sold 

25 per box, or in 50' rolls. 

Model Dimensions Qty/ 

No. L" x W" Box 

RH687 3 x 1 25 

RH688 4 x 1 25 

RH689 6 x 1 25 

RH690 8 x 1 25 

RH691 3 x 2 25 

RH692 4 x 2 25 

RH693 6 x 2 25 

Other sizes available. 

D 

W 

Literature Racks provide a 

convenient and compact way 

to store literature. Keyhole 

slots are provided for wall 

mounting. Most models 

accommodate 150 standard 8 

1/2" x 11" sheets, while others 

are wider to hold magazines 

and special forms. 

Construction is of sturdy 

heavy gauge steel. Standard 

finishes are Office Grey, 

Desert Tan, Satin Black and 

Putty. 

H 

Model Dimensions Qty/ 

No. L" x W" Box 

RH694 8 x 2 25 

RH695 4 x 3 25 

RH696 6 x 3 25 

RH697 8 x 3 25 

RH698 1" W 50' Roll 

RH699 2" W 50' Roll 

RH700 3" W 50' Roll 

Mfg. No. 

2033R 

LABEL HOLDERS 

Label Holders are self-adhesive, transparent, non-glare plastic 

with release-paper backing and including insert cards. 

• Quicker • More Visible 

• Easier • Changeable 

Will adhere permanently to 

any clean, flat surface. 

1. Write or type your message on 

white cards provided. 

2. Insert card into holder. 

3. Cut to exact length. 

4. Peel off backing paper and put in place. 

Card inserted here 

Model Sizes 

No. W" x L" 

OA467 1/2 x 12 

OA468 1 x 12 

Sold in packages of 100-12" lengths. 

Note: Beaded edge 

to provide grip 

for card 

Cut to 

any length 

you need 

Mfg. No. 

8831R


LITERATURE STORAGE CENTRES 

Economical and efficient storage and organization for 

product sheets, catalogues, magazines, and miscellaneous 

literature. New design and 50% less hardware 

makes assembly fast and easy! 

• New vacuum formed inner side panels, 

reinforced bottom shelf for extra strength 

• Shelves simply flex and snap into place 

inside panels for quick assembly 

• Durable steel cabinet with solid fibreboard 

back and heavy-gauge corrugated 

fibreboard compartments 

• I.D. tabs slide into black plastic shelf 

edging for a built-in labeling system 

• Cabinet available in Tropic Sand or 

Black baked enamel 

• Shipped knocked-down 

DATA ORGANIZERS 

A complete line for the horizontal storage of computer printouts, 

literature directories and printed material of all kinds. 

Steel modular, horizontal racks finished in tan enamel that 

can be grouped for floor or table mounted storage. Print-out 

racks can house six or eight computer print-outs up to 

three inches thick. Literature racks, also with the capacity 

for literature or directories up to three inches thick, are 

25 3/4" Height 

Model 

No. OA175 


Model 

No. OA178 

Model No. No. of Overall Unit Each Bin Wt. 

Tropic Sand Black Bins H" x W" x D" H" x W" x D" lbs. 

Letter Size Storage Centres 

OA175 OA172 32 25 3/4 x 37 1/2 x 12 3/4 2 1/2 x 9 x 12 1/4 34 

OA178 OA176 48 36 1/2 x 37 1/2 x 12 3/4 2 1/2 x 9 x 12 1/4 46 

OA614 OA625 80 60 x 37 1/2 x 12 3/4 2 1/2 x 9 x 11 12 1/4 69 

OA173 OA177 96 71 x 37 1/2 x 12 3/4 2 1/2 x 9 x 11 12 1/4 78 

Letter Size Storage Centres 

Model No. No. of Overall Unit Each Bin Wt. 

Black Grey Bins H" x W" x D" H" x W" x D" lbs. 

OA135 OA132 24 25 3/4 x 32 1/4 x 13 1/2 2 1/2 x 9 3/4 x 12 1/2 40 

OA129 OA126 36 38 x 32 1/4 x 13 1/2 2 1/2 x 9 3/4 x 12 1/2 53 

OA139 OA141 72 75 x 32 1/4 x 13 1/2 2 1/2 x 9 3/4 x 12 1/2 85 

available with nine and twelve openings. 8" legs (Model 

CA159) are available to raise unit off the floor. All racks easily 

bolt together with fasteners provided and Literature 

Racks are fully interchangeable with Print-Out Racks. 

Horizontal Print-Out Rack Horizontal Literature Racks 

Specifications Model No. OA613 Model No. OA159 Model No. OA157 Model No. OA168 

Height " 10 3/4 14 1/4 10 3/4 14 1/4 

Width " 33 3/4 33 3/4 33 3/4 33 3/4 

Depth " 11 5/8 11 5/8 11 5/8 11 5/8 

Opening Width " 16 1/2 16 1/2 11 11 

Opening Depth " 11 /12 11 1/2 11 1/2 11 1/2 

Opening Height " 3 3 3 3 

No. of Openings 6 8 9 12 

Paper Width " 14 14 8 1/2 8 1/2 

MAIL CENTRES 

This steel mail centre features 

welded, interlocking construction. 

The unit measures 33 3/4" 

wide, 19" high and 12" deep and 

has 18 spacious compartments, 

each with an area for identification. 

Units may be stacked 

vertically or side by side and are 

furnished with mounting holes and spring clips to 

secure them firmly into position. A base with removable 

legs is available which allows the user the 

option of raising the sorter either 4" or 8". Rubber 

feet are fitted at the bottom of each sorter to avoid 

scratching. 

Available in tan baked enamel finish. 

Two mail centres stacked 

vertically, on the optional 

4" base with legs. 


No. Description H” x W” x D” Colour lbs. 

OA182 Mail Centre 19 x 33 3/4 x 12 Tan 38 

CA159 Optional Base 5 3/4 x 34 1/8 x 12 1/4 Tan 13 

60" Height 

Model 

No. OA614 

Horizontal Print-Out 

Racks 

VERTICAL BINS 

Specially-designed to fit your open-plan systems! All 

feature a furniture-quality steel shell that's sturdy and 

attractive, just perfect for front-office areas. The units 

are 60" tall, and fit flush with most open-plan dividers. 

Sturdy woodgrain-look corrugated fibreboard inserts 

divide the units into functional sorting/storage bins. 

Rigid bracing adds support. Black plastic moulding 

with built-in label holders protect shelf edges, shipped 

unassembled. Baked on enamel finish in Tropic Sand. 



Model 

No. OA173 

Horizontal Literature 

Racks 

Model No. No. Overall Unit Bin Size Wt. 

Tropic Sand of Bins H" x W" x D" H" x W" x D" lbs. 

OA626 42 71 x 37 1/2 x 12 3/4 10 1/4 x 5 x 11 3/4 68 


619


620 


WORK CENTRES 

WOOD DESK TOP ORGANIZERS 

Furniture grade compressed woodgrain melamine cabinetry with smooth radius 

corners and solid wood laminate back. Cord cutouts in back panel allow easy and 

discreet routing of power cords. All shown with optional top. 

Units are 57 1/2" W x 12" D. 

HIGH CAPACITY 

Provides maximum 

storage and organizing 

space with two full width 

shelves. Includes three big 11 

1/4" x 16" literature trays and 

eight 3 3/4" shelf dividers. 18" 

high. 

Model No. Wt. 

Mahogany Grey Med. Oak Description lbs. 

OE199 OD695 OD696 High Capacity 61 

HIGH CLEARANCE 

Features single full-width shelf with 

a 12 3/4" clearance underneath to 

store books, binders and accessories. 

Three 9" x 11 1/4" literature 

trays and five 3 3/4" shelf dividers. 

Shown with optional CD storage. 18" 

high. 

Model No. Wt. 


OE200 OD698 OD699 High Clearance 45 

OE201 OE202 OE204 CD Storage Rack 4 

LOW PROFILE 

This popular style is only 

12" high and features 

a single full width 

shelf, two 9" x 11 1/4" 

literature trays and 

five 3 3/4" dividers. 

Model No. Wt. 


OE205 OD701 OD702 Low Profile 36 

OPTIONAL WOOD TOP 

Instantly add storage and organizing space. Fits all models. 

Model No. Wt. 


OE206 OD704 OD705 Wood Top 13 

E-Z SORT MAILROOM EQUIPMENT 

• Sorting table supports up to 500 lbs. on extra-thick 1 1/2" steel legs and 

a 1 1/8" thick wood laminate top with tough T-mould edges 

• Table surface adjusts from 28 to 36" high to place users at 

the best working height 

• Riser supports one or more modules or can be used on a table for 

additional workspace to accommodate scales, postage meters and 

off surface computer storage 

• Sorter Module features extra-wide 11" mail trays that form any combination 

of up to 25 compartments, also includes 20 compartment trays which 

feature a finger cut-out and label holders 

• Wire Keyboard Holder holds the keyboard off the surface when 

a riser is used for a manifesting, metering or weighing table 

• All components feature a grey baked enamel finish 


No. Description W" x D" x H" 

OD938* Table base w/shelf 60 x 30 x 28 to 36 

OD939* Table top 60 x 30 

OD940 Sorter module 58 1/8 x 12 1/2 x 14 

OD941 Riser 58 1/8 x 12 1/2 x 14 

OD942 5 add. Mail trays 12 1/2 x 11 x 7/16 

OD943 Wire keyboard holder 12 1/2 x 11 1/2 x 5 

* Table top and table base shipped separately - order both 

DESK ORGANIZERS 

47" LONG 

Utility double shelf steel unit designed to 

fit at the back of your desk. Includes 8 

clear plastic shelf dividers. Attractive 

radius corners. Units are a full 13 1/2" 

deep and 18 1/4" high with two shelves 

plus a top. 

Model No. Wt. 

Black Grey Med. Oak Description lbs. 

OE166 OE167 OE169 47" Utility 27 

29" LONG 

Double shelf compact steel unit fits 

nicely next to your computer. Unit has 

two shelves, a top, 4 clear plas-tic 

dividers and radius corners. Full 13 

1/2" deep and 18 1/4" high. 

Model No. Wt. 

Black Grey Med. Oak Description lbs. 

OE170 OE171 OE173 29" Compact 18 

MOBILE SHELF TRUCK 

This library book truck or video tape storage truck 

features a heavy gauge construction with baked-on 

powder coat paint finish. Quiet and easy rolling antishimmy 

4" casters. 8" big wheel models also available 

on request. Most models ship knocked-down for 

economical, damage-free shipping. Tool for assembly 

supplied with each unit. Flat shelves may be inverted 

to assemble as trays. Double slanted shelves provide 

a 6 1/2" deep shelf on each side. Assembly required. 

Colour: Putty. 

Dimensions: 28 W" x 17 D" x 36 H". 



Wire Keyboard Holder 

(OD943) for use with 

Riser (OD941) 

Sorting Table (OD938 and 

OD939), Riser (OD941), 

and Sorter Module (OD940) 

Sorting Table, Riser and 2 Sorter Modules


OFFICE STORAGE PRODUCTS 

SPEEDI-BILT ® 

RECORD STORAGE UNITS 

These storage units will aid in records management by providing an organized solution to 

high density archive storage. A rigid, boltless connection between beams and posts (see 

inset) provides structural integrity while allowing for easy assembly without special tools - 

all you need is a rubber mallet. Order complete units - including shelving, deck and boxes - 

or shelving with deck only. Add-on units utilize a common T-post between units to save 

assembly time and cost. Standard unit width: 69". Shelf capacity: 525 lbs. ea. 

No. of Unit Size No. of Model Wt. 

Shelves Type D" x H" Boxes No. lbs. 

COMPLETE UNITS (INCLUDES SHELVING, DECK & BOXES) 

4 Starter 15 x 84 40 RA629 167 

4 Add-on 15 x 84 40 RA627 166 

4 Starter 30 x 84 80 RA633 281 

4 Add-on 30 x 84 80 RA631 279 

5 Starter 15 x 108 50 RA637 209 

5 Add-on 15 x 108 50 RA635 207 

5 Starter 30 x 108 100 RA641 351 

5 Add-on 30 x 108 100 RA639 349 

6 Starter 15 x 144 60 RA645 305 

6 Add-on 15 x 144 60 RA643 304 

6 Starter 30 x 144 120 RA649 504 

6 Add-on 30 x 144 120 RA647 503 

SHELVING & DECK ONLY (NO BOXES) 

4 Starter 15 x 84 0 RA628 135 

4 Add-on 15 x 84 0 RA626 134 

4 Starter 30 x 84 0 RA632 217 

4 Add-on 30 x 84 0 RA630 215 

5 Starter 15 x 108 0 RA636 169 

5 Add-on 15 x 108 0 RA634 167 

5 Starter 30 x 108 0 RA640 271 

5 Add-on 30 x 108 0 RA638 269 

6 Starter 15 x 144 0 RA644 249 

6 Add-on 15 x 144 0 RA642 248 

6 Starter 30 x 144 0 RA648 392 

6 Add-on 30 x 144 0 RA646 391 

Model No. OA075 Archive Box (12" L x 15" D x 9 1/2" H) 0.08 

STAXONSTEEL ® BOXES 

Made for frequent referencing. This drawer has a double 

thick fibreboard and hardboard reinforced ends to provide 

exceptional strength and durability. The all black drawer 

includes a permanent pull handle that doubles as a label card 

holder. A heavy duty interlocking steel framework can stack 

up to 10 high. 

Model Record Inside Drawer Dimensions Qty/ 

No. Size W" x D" x H" Carton 

OA085 Cheque 9 x 24 x 4 1/2 6 

OA084 Letter 12 x 24 x 10 1/2 6 

OA083 Legal 15 x 24 x 10 1/2 6 

R-KIVE ® BOXES 

These top quality storage boxes are constructed 

of rugged, corrugated fibreboard. The sides and 

bottom are double layered and the front and back are 

triple thick. Versatile box can hold either letter or 

legal size files. Size 12" W x 15" D x 10" H. Colour: 

woodgrain. Removable top. 12 boxes/ctn. 


BANKERS BOX ® ENVIRO 

STOR TM ATTACHED 

LID BOX FILE 

Letter/Legal. 

Overall Dimensions: 12" x 10" x 15". 

25 per case. 


ENVIRASTOR ® 

STOR/DRAWER ® 

Recommended for use on steel shelving. A sturdy internal 

liner in the outer shell provides long lasting strength. 

RECOMMENDED STACKING 2-HIGH ON METAL SHELVING 

100% recycled material and a minimum of 67% postconsumer 

waste. 



OA077 Cheque 9 x 24 x 4 1/2 12 

OA086 Letter 12 x 24 x 10 1/2 6 

OA078 Legal 15 x 24 x 10 1/2 6 

BANKERS BOXES ® 

High Stak ® The corrugated box has a heavy duty 

steel framework to support and distribute weight 

so drawers open and close smoothly. 

Interlocking files stock up to 10 high. Drawer 

has a retractable plastic and a large labeling area. 



OA074 Letter 12 x 24 x 10 1/2 6 

OA076 Legal 15 x 24 x 10 1/2 6 

ECONO/STOR ® BOXES 

The perfect choice for economical storage of semiactive 

or dead records. White corrugated fibreboard 

construction features smooth rolled edges that 

provides a clean finish and avoids paper cuts. 

For extra boxes 

Model No. 

OA075 



OA082 Letter 12 x 24 x 10 12 

OA079 Legal 15 x 24 x 10 12 

OA081 Letter or Legal 12 x 15 x 10 25 


621


622 


PRESENTATION BOARDS & FASTENERS 

COLOURED CORKBOARDS 

Coloured corkboards, black plastic mouldings, square corners. 

(not shown) 

WHITEBOARDS 

Clean, colourful marker boards get attention fast. Nonmagnetic, 

white writing surface wipes clean with cloth, felt 

brush or tissue; dustless, effortless erasing. Natural aluminum 

frame; square corners. 

CORKBOARD 

ACCESSORIES 

PUSH PINS 

Plastic head, assorted 

colours 100/pkg. 





OA029 18 x 24 3.5 

OA021 24 x 36 7.0 

OA027 36 x 48 12.5 

OA023 48 x 72 23 

OA024 48 x 96 30 

CHALKBOARD ACCESSORIES 


OC381 Chalk, White Box of 12 

OC383 Chalk Eraser 

OC384 Aluminum Chalk Holder 

THUMB TACKS 

3/8" steel point. Available in assorted P.V.C. coated 

colours or brass finish. 100/pkg. 


OC388 Thumb tacks, 

PVC coated, assorted colours 

OC389 Thumb tacks, brass finish 

CORKBOARDS 

These natural cork boards are ideal for the office or warehouse. 

Natural aluminum frame; square corners. 

Model Wt. 

No. Dimensions" lbs. 

OA030 18 x 24 3 

OA025 24 x 36 6 

OA026 36 x 48 12 

OA028 48 x 72 23 

OA022 48 x 96 30 

Model No. Wt. 

Green Grey Blue Dimensions" lbs. 

OD792 OD795 OD798 18 x 24 3 

OD793 OD796 OD799 24 x 36 6 

OD794 OD797 OD800 36 x 48 12 

CHALKBOARDS 

Smooth surface guarantees clear, legible writing and easy 

erasing. Natural aluminum frame; square corners. Green 

writing surface. 


OA478 18 x 24 3.5 

OA479 24 x 36 7.0 

OA031 36 x 48 12.5 

OA477 48 x 72 23 

OA480 48 x 96 30 


COVERED DIRECTORY BOARD 

Locking glass door on hinges provides a professional 

appearance, deters unauthorized access to messages. Felt 

grooved black surface. 1/4" plexiglass in alumi-num frame. 


No. H" x W" lbs. 

OA471 36 x 24 34 

OPTIONAL: 300 assorted letters and numbers. Quick 

change design, white plastic. Size: 3/4". 


WHITEBOARD 

MARKERS 

Expo ® dry erase markers allow for vivid 

and expressive communication on practically any whiteboard. Marks with a smooth, 

consistent line that retains its colour and erases easily with a dry cloth or eraser. Available 

in eight individual colours or a four and eight pen set. 

Model No. Description Model No. Description 

OD172 Whiteboard Marker Red OD177 Whiteboard Marker Black 

OD173 Whiteboard Marker Blue OD178 Whiteboard Marker Set of four (Red, Blue, Green, Black) 

OD175 Whiteboard Marker Green OD179 Whiteboard Marker Set of eight (All Colours) 

HOOK AND LOOP FASTENERS 

Alternative to zippers, screws, snaps and bolts. One nylon strip consists of tiny hooks and another consisting 

of soft pliable loops. Simply press together to fasten and pull apart to open. Current applications include the apparel, furniture, 

packaging and printing industries. Available in peel and stick adhesive backed models or 

regular style (sew-on) models. 

Hook Loop Length 

White Black White Black Width" yds 

PEEL AND STICK (Adhesive backed) 

OC439 OC440 OC441 OC442 3/4 10 

OC500 OC501 OC502 OC503 1 10 

OC447 OC448 OC449 OC450 3/4 25 

OC504 OC505 OC506 OC507 1 25 

REGULAR - STAPLE OR SEW-ON 

OC455 OC456 OC457 OC458 3/4 10 

OC508 OC509 OC510 OC511 1" 10 

OC463 OC464 OC465 OC466 3/4 25 

OC512 OC513 OC514 OC515 1" 25 

ADHESIVE BACKED DOTS 

Hook Loop Dots/ 

White Black White Black Dot Size" Box 

OC471 OC472 OC473 OC474 1/2 500 

OC475 OC476 OC477 OC478 3/4 500 

OC479 OC480 OC481 OC482 1/2 3040 

OC483 OC484 OC485 OC486 3/4 2110

40 - Varco Industrial Sales

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

Delete template?

Save as template?